SEAT - Explore our Compact Cars, MPVs, SUVs, Sedans & more · Foreword This Instruction Manual and its correspond-ing supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself

OWNER’S MANUAL

Ateca

575012720BE

Ingl

és 5

7501

2720

BE

(11

.17)

Ate

ca

Ingl

és (

11.1

7)

SEAT recommendsSEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommendsCastrol EDGE Professional

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.17

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ATECA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not in-cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the mar-ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function-alities better. It does not replace the instruc-tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment

Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

ForewordThis Instruction Manual and its correspond-ing supplements should be read carefully tofamiliarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance ofthe vehicle, its correct handling will help pre-serve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the informa-tion concerning accessories, modificationsand part replacements.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-boarddocumentation to the new owner, as itshould be kept with the vehicle.

You can access the information in this man-ual using:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.

● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.

● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety informa-tion concerning the passenger's front air-bag ››› page 90, Important informationregarding the front passenger's airbag.

Thank you for trusting in us.

We wish you safe and enjoya-ble motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

Related videos

Always connected

www.seat.com/youtube-af/se326/fulllink

››› page 123››› Booklet Navigation system

Smart solutions

www.seat.com/youtube-af/se326/blindspot

››› page 237››› page 249››› page 265

Lighting

www.seat.com/youtube-af/se326/fullled››› page 144

Autonomous driving

www.seat.com/youtube-af/se326/stauassist

››› page 221››› page 233››› page 242

Hands-free

www.seat.com/youtube-af/se326/electricboot

››› page 129››› page 137

Frequently Asked Ques-tions

Before driving

How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 18

How do you adjust the steering wheel? ››› page 20

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? ››› page 20

How do you turn on the exterior lights? ››› page 30

How does the automatic gearbox selector lever work?››› page 49

How do you refuel? ››› page 56

How do you activate the windscreen wipers and wind-screen washer system? ››› page 32

Emergency situations

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does thismean? ››› page 46

How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 17

How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 69

Where is the vehicle tool kit located? ››› page 64

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture kit?››› page 63

How do you change a wheel? ››› page 64

How do you change a fuse? ››› page 61

How do you change a light? ››› page 62

How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 68

Useful tips

How do you set the time? ››› page 115

When should the vehicle inspection should be per-formed? ››› page 43

What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on thesteering wheel perform? ››› page 121

How do you remove the luggage compartment cover?››› page 167

How do you drive in an economical and environmental-ly-friendly way? ››› page 201

How do you check and top up the engine oil?››› page 57

How do you check and top up the engine coolant?››› page 58

How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?››› page 59

How do you check and top up the brake fluid?››› page 59

How do you check and adjust tyre pressure values?››› page 308

Vehicle washing tips ››› page 285

Functions of interest

Easy Connect, CAR menu ››› page 33

How does the START-STOP system work? ››› page 208

What parking assistants are available? ››› page 262

How does the rear assist work? ››› page 270

How does the adaptive cruise control work?››› page 221

How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted?››› page 242

How does the lane departure warning system work?››› page 230

How does tyre pressure monitoring work? ››› page 312

How do you open the vehicle without a key (Keyless Ac-cess)? ››› page 129

Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 152

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsThe essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Passenger-side general instrument panel(right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Driver information System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 62Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 68

How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Correct position of the vehicle occupants . . . . 74Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Why wear a seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 82Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Description and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit* . . . . . . . . . . 95Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Manual unlocking/locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 97Tow-starting and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Change the front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Change the rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Side turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 114Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 120System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 121Controls on the steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Rear lid (luggage compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Windscreen wiper and window wiper sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Adjusting the seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . 156Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 160Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Auxiliary heater (additional heater)* . . . . . . . . 177Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 181Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

5

Table of Contents

Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Engine management and exhaust gas purifica-tion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Emergency brake assist system (Front As-sist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Lane Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis-tance (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Traffic sign detection system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 248Park Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Parking System Plus (ParkPilot)* . . . . . . . . . . . 257Parking aid (Park Pilot)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Top View Camera* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Rear Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Accessories and modifications to the vehi-cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Vehicle exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 318Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

6

The essentials

Exterior view

››› page 16

››› page 56

››› page 15

››› page 56

1

2

3

4

››› page 68

››› page 17

››› page 62

5

6

7

7

The essentials

Exterior view

››› page 58

››› page 57

››› page 59

››› page 61

1

2

3

4

››› page 57

››› page 59

››› page 59

››› page 165

5

6

7

8

››› page 29

››› page 64

››› page 63

9

10

11

8

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 312 ››› page 443 ››› page 154 ››› page 30

5 ››› page 206 ››› page 187 ››› page 17

8 ››› page 469 ››› page 32

10 ››› page 36

11 ››› page 3012 ››› page 2013 ››› page 61

9

The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 322 ››› page 363 ››› page 15

4 ››› page 305 ››› page 206 ››› page 18

7 ››› page 468 ››› page 319 ››› page 44

10 ››› page 2011 ››› page 30

10

The essentials

Centre console

››› page 49

››› page 183

1

2

››› page 33

››› page 31

3

4

››› page 51, ››› page 535

The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical.

11

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

››› page 21

››› page 161

1

2

12

The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

››› page 21

››› page 61

››› page 17

››› page 161

1

2

3

413

The essentials

Interior view

››› page 19

››› page 19

››› page 18

››› page 155

1

2

3

4

››› page 26

››› page 164

››› page 18

››› page 22

5

6

7

814

The essentials

How it works

Unlocking and locking

Doors

Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons.

Fig. 2 Driver door: central locking switch.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using thekey

● Locking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.

● Locking the vehicle without activating theanti-theft system: Press the ››› Fig. 1 buttonfor a second time within 2 seconds.

● Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 1 button.

● Unlocking the rear lid: Hold down the ››› Fig. 1 button for at least 1 second.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock-ing switch

● Locking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button. Noneof the doors can be opened from the outside.The doors can be opened from the inside bypulling the inside door handle.

● Unlocking: press the ››› Fig. 2 button.

››› in Description on page 125

››› page 125

››› page 15, ››› page 16

Unlocking or locking of driver door

Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

If the central locking system should fail to op-erate, the driver door can still be locked andunlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked manually all other doors are locked.When it is unlocked manually, only the driverdoor opens. Please observe the instructionsrelating to the anti-theft alarm system››› page 125.

● Unfold the vehicle key blade››› page 126.

● Insert the key shaft into the lower openingin the cover on the driver door handle››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover up-wards.

● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinderto unlock or lock the vehicle. »

15

The essentials

Special Characteristics

● The anti-theft alarm will remain active whenvehicles are unlocked. However, the alarmwill not be triggered ››› page 125.

● After the driver door is opened, you have15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Oncethis time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.

● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key anddeactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note

The anti-theft alarm is not activated when thevehicle is locked manually using the keyshaft ››› page 125.

Emergency locking of doors withoutdoor cylinder

Fig. 4 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, doors with no lock cylinderwill have to be locked separately.

A mechanical locking device (only visiblewhen the door is open) is provided on thefront passenger door.

● Pull the cap out of the opening.

● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn itto the right as far as it will go (if the door ison the right side) or to the left (if the door ison the left side).

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-rior door handle once to unlock and open thedoor.

Rear lid

Fig. 5 Rear lid: handle

Fig. 6 Rear lid: button to close rear lid.

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally*. It is activated by exerting slight pres-sure on the handle ››› Fig. 5.

To lock/unlock, press the button or button ››› Fig. 1 on the remote control key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given if itis opened while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing

● Opening the rear lid: Exert slight pressureon the handle. The rear lid opens automati-cally.

● Closing the rear lid: hold one of the han-dles on the inner trim and close it by slidingdown, or press the button on the rear lid*››› Fig. 6.

16

The essentials

››› in Rear lid automatic locking onpage 139

››› page 137

››› page 17

Manual release mechanism for therear lid

Fig. 7 Luggage compartment: access to man-ual release.

Fig. 8 Luggage compartment: emergency re-lease.

The rear lid can be unlocked manually frominside in the event of an emergency.

● Remove the cover using the key blade as alever ››› Fig. 7.

● To unlock the rear lid, push the lever in thedirection of the arrow using the key blade››› Fig. 8.

Bonnet

Fig. 9 Release lever in the driver's footwellarea.

Fig. 10 Cam under the bonnet

● Opening the bonnet: Pull the lever underthe dashboard ››› Fig. 9 1 .

● Lift up the bonnet. Press the release catchunder the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 10 2 . Thearrester hook under the bonnet is released. »

17

The essentials

● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

››› in Working in the engine compart-ment on page 299

››› page 298

*Controls for the windows

Fig. 11 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows.

● Opening the window: Press the button.

● Closing the window: Pull the button.

Buttons on the driver door

Window on the front left door

Window on the front right door

Window on the rear left door

1

2

3

Window on the rear right door

Safety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors.

››› in Electric opening and closing ofwindows on page 140

››› page 139

Panoramic roof*

Fig. 12 On the interior roof lining: sunroofbutton.

● Opening: press button C backwards.

● Closing: press button D forwards.

● To tilt open: press the rear part of buttonB .

● Lowering: press the front part of button A .

4

5 ››› in Introduction on page 141

››› page 141

Before driving

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 13 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Forward/back: pull the lever and movethe seat forwards or backwards.

Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.

Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

Lumbar support: move the lever until therequired position is achieved.

››› in Manual adjustment of the seatson page 156

1

2

3

4

18

The essentials

Electric adjustment of the driver'sseat*

Fig. 14 Driver's seat: electric seat adjust-ment.

Adjusting the lumbar support: press thebutton according to the desired position.

Seat up/down: Press the buttonup/down. To adjust the front of the seatcushion, press the front of the buttonup/down. To adjust the rear of the seatcushion, press the rear of the buttonup/down.

Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-ton forwards/backwards.

Backrest further upright/further reclined:press the button forwards/backwards.

››› in Electric driver's seat adjustment*on page 157

A

B

C

Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 15 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-straint.

● Grab the sides of the head restraints withboth hands and push upwards to the desiredposition. To lower it, repeat the same action,pressing the 1 button on the side.

››› in Correct adjustment of front headrestraints on page 77

››› page 77, ››› page 157

Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 16 Positioning and removing the seatbelt buckle. »

19

The essentials

Fig. 17 Correct seat belt and head restraintpositions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your should-ers, adjust the height of the seats.

The shoulder part of the seat belt should bewell centred over it, never over the neck. Theseat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on theupper part of the body.

The lap part of the seat belt lies across thepelvis, never across the stomach. The seatbelt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-vis.

››› page 80

››› page 82

Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the frontseats and side rear seats1) tighten automati-cally.

The tensioner can be triggered only once.

››› in Maintenance and disposal of belttensioners on page 84

››› page 83

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 18 Detail of the driver door: control forthe exterior mirror.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knobto the corresponding position:

Turning the knob to the desired posi-tion, adjust the mirrors on the driverside (L, left) and the passenger side (R,right) to the direction desired.

Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.

Folding in mirrors.

››› in Adjusting the exterior rear-viewmirrors on page 156

››› page 155

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 19 Lever in the lower left side of thesteering column.

L/R

1) Depending on version/market.20

The essentials

● Adjusting the position of the steeringwheel: Pull the ››› Fig. 19 1 lever down,move the steering wheel to the desired posi-tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.

››› in Adjusting the steering wheel po-sition on page 75

Airbags

Front airbags

Fig. 20 Driver airbag located in steeringwheel.

Fig. 21 Front passenger airbag located indash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located inthe steering wheel ››› Fig. 20 and the airbagfor the front passenger is located in the dashpanel ››› Fig. 21. Airbags are identified by theword “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbagsare deployed, the covers remain attached tothe steering wheel and dashboard, respec-tively ››› Fig. 20 ››› Fig. 21.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the front occupants ad-ditional protection for the head and chest in »

21

The essentials

the event of a severe frontal collision ››› inFront airbags on page 86.

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occupantputs pressure on the bag. Thus, the head andchest are protected by the airbag. After thecollision, the airbag deflates sufficiently toallow visibility.

››› page 86

Deactivating the front passenger frontairbag

Fig. 22 Front passenger front airbag switch.

Fig. 23 Dash panel: control lamp for deactiva-ted front passenger airbag in centre console.

To deactivate the front passenger front air-bag:

● Switch the ignition off.

● Open the door on the front passenger side.

● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 22. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.

● Turn the key gently to the position. Ifyou have difficulty, ensure that you have in-serted the key as far as it will go.

● Close the front passenger door.

● Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp remains lit where itsays in the centre of thedash panel ››› Fig. 23.

››› in Activation and deactivation offront passenger airbag* on page 89

››› page 88

22

The essentials

Knee airbag*

Fig. 24 On the driver side: location of theknee airbag

Fig. 25 On the driver side: radius of action ofthe knee airbag.

The knee airbag is located on the driver sidebelow the dash panel ››› Fig. 24. Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red (deployment area)››› Fig. 25 is covered by the knee airbag when

it is deployed. Objects should never beplaced or mounted in this area.

››› page 86

Side airbags*

Fig. 26 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 27 Illustration of completely inflated sideairbags on the left side of the vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver'sseat and front passenger seat backrests››› Fig. 26. The locations are identified by thetext “AIRBAG” in the upper region of thebackrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the sideairbag system provides additional protectionfor the upper body in the event of a severeside collision ››› in Side airbags* onpage 86.

In a side collision, the side airbags reducethe risk of injury to passengers to the areasof the body facing the impact. In addition totheir normal protection, the seat belts alsohold the passengers in the event of a sidecollision; this is how these airbags providemaximum protection.

››› page 86

23

The essentials

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 28 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors››› Fig. 28 and are identified with the text“AIRBAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the vehicleoccupants additional protection for the headand upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› in Curtain airbags* onpage 87.

››› in Curtain airbags* on page 87

Child seats

Important information regarding thefront passenger's airbag

Fig. 29 Airbag stickers - version 1: on thepassenger-side sun blind and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 30 Airbag stickers - version 2: on thepassenger-side sun blind and on the rearframe of the front passenger's door .

A sticker with important information aboutthe passenger airbag is located on the pas-senger's sun visor and/or on the passengerside door frame.

››› in Important information regardingthe front passenger's airbag on page 91

››› page 90

24

The essentials

Securing child seats

Fig. 31 On the rear seats: Possible installationsfor the child seat.

Figure ››› Fig. 31 A shows the basic child re-straint system mounting using lower retain-ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig-ure ››› Fig. 31 B shows the child restraintsystem mounting using the vehicle seat belt.

The seat belt may be used to secure univer-sal type child seats to the vehicle seatsmarked with a U in the table below.

● In a front passenger seat without height ad-justment: It is necessary to place the frontpassenger seat in its rearmost position1).

● In a front passenger seat with height ad-justment: it is necessary to place the front

passenger seat in its rearmost and highestposition1).

To correctly use a child seat in the back, thefront backrest must be adjusted so that thereis no contact with the child seat in the backin the case that it goes opposite to the direc-tion of the car. In the case of front facing re-straint systems, the front backrest must beadjusted so that there is no contact with thechild's feet.

To adjust the passenger seat to accommo-date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a

perfect position, adjust the passenger back-rest as far forward as possible1).

If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-led, in which the method of attachment tothe car is through the seat belt and supportbracket, it should never be installed in thecentral rear seat as the ground clearance islower than in other places and the supportbracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-ciently stable.

The systems include the child restraint sys-tem mounting with an upper retaining strap(Top Tether) and lower anchoring points onthe seat. »

1) Compliance with current national legislation andthe manufacturer's instructions is required when us-ing or installing child seats.

25

The essentials

Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X Uc) U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X Uc) U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X Uc) U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UFc) UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UFc) UF UF

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration.U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

››› in Safety instructions on page 91

Securing child seats with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear outer seats with the“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted oneach rear seat. In some vehicles, the ringsare secured to the seat frame and, in others,they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO-

FIX” rings are located between the rear seatbackrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 32.The Top Tether* rings are located on the rearpart of the backrests of the rear seats (be-hind the seat backrest or in the boot)››› Fig. 33.

To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the tablebelow.

The body weight permitted and informationregarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la-bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi-universal” certification.

26

The essentials

Weight group Size classElectrical equip-

ment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat


Baby carrierF ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- ---

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group.IL: Suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRSs) listed in the attached list. This relates to ISOFIX CRSs that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universalcategories.: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.


27

The essentials

Securing child seats with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” ISOFIX System

Fig. 32 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings.

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac-turer's instructions.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-taining rings ››› Fig. 32 until the child seat isheard to engage securely. If the child seat isequipped with Top Tether* anchor points, se-cure it to the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 33.Observe the manufacturer's instructions.

● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-sure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*attachment system are available from Techni-cal Services.

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat


Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U Valid position for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

28

The essentials

Securing child seats with the TopTether* retaining straps

Fig. 33 Position of the Top Tether rings on theback of the rear seat.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mountedseats

Currently, there are very few rear-facing childsafety seats that have Top Tether. Pleasecarefully read and follow the seat manufac-turer instructions to learn the proper way toinstall the Top Tether strap.

Securing the Top Tether* to the an-chorage point

Fig. 34 Retainer strap: adjustment and as-sembly according to the Top Tether belt.

Securing the retainer strap

● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainerstrap.

● Place the belt under the head restraint ofthe back seat ››› Fig. 34 (depending on the in-

structions of the chair itself, lift or remove thehead restraint if necessary).

● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 33.

● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap

● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-er's instructions.

● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.


29

The essentials

Starting the vehicle

Ignition lock

Fig. 35 Ignition key positions.

Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni-tion and start the engine.

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel

● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Removethe key from the ignition and turn the wheeluntil it locks. Depending on the country, invehicles with an automatic gearbox, to re-move the key the gear lever must be in the Pposition. If necessary, press the locking keyon the selector lever and release it again.

● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the keyinto the ignition and turn it at the same timeas the steering wheel in the direction indica-ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turnthe steering wheel, it may be because it islocked.

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glowplugs reheating

● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2

position.

● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1

position.

● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheatwhen the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine

● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal allthe way down and move the gearbox lever in-to neutral.

● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedaland move the selector lever to the P positionor into N.

● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au-tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do notpress the accelerator.

Start-Stop System*

When you stop and release the clutch pedal,the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.The ignition remains switched on.

››› in Switching the ignition on andstarting the engine with the key onpage 182

››› page 181

Lights and visibility

Light switch

Fig. 36 Dash panel: light control.

● Turn the switch to the required position››› Fig. 36.

Sym-bol

Ignition switchedoff

Ignition isswitched on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and side lightsoff.

Daylight runninglights switched on.

The “Coming home”,“Leaving home” andWelcome lights maybe switched on.

Automatic control ofdipped beam anddaytime runninglight.

Side light on.Daylight runninglights switched on.

Dipped beam head-light off

Dipped beamswitched on.

30

The essentials

Front fog lights: move the switch to thefirst position, from positions , or .

Rear fog light: move the switch completelyfrom positions , or .

● Switching off fog lights: Push the switch orturn it to the position.

››› in Side light and dipped beam head-light on page 144

››› page 144

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 37 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn signal: Right-hand parkinglight (ignition switched off).

1

Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).

Main beam switched on: Control lamp lit up on the instrument panel.

Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever ispushed. Control lamp lit up.

Lever all the way down to switch it off.

››› in Turn signal and main beam leveron page 145

››› page 145

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 38 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-ing lights.

Switched on, for example:

● When approaching a traffic jam

2

3

4

● In an emergency

● The vehicle has broken down

● When towing or being towed

››› in Hazard warning lights onpage 150

››› page 149

Interior lights

Fig. 39 Detail of headliner: front interior light-ing.

Knob Function

Switches interior lights off.

Switches interior lights on. »

31

The essentials

Knob Function

Central positionor

a)

Door contact switch-on.The interior lights come on automati-cally when the vehicle is unlocked, adoor is opened or the key is removedfrom the ignition.The light goes off a few seconds af-ter all the doors are closed, the vehi-cle is locked or the ignition is switch-ed on.

Turning the reading light on and off

a) Depending on version.

Ambient light*: light guide on door panel.Lighting can be selected from 8 possible col-ours via the menu and the SETTINGS func-tion button.

››› page 152

Windscreen wipers and window wiperblade

Fig. 40 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper.


0 Windscreen wiper off.

1

Windscreen wipers interval wipe.Using the control ››› Fig. 40 A adjust theinterval (vehicles without rain sensor), orthe sensitivity of the rain sensor.


2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Holdthe lever down for more time to increasethe wipe frequency.

5

Automatic wipe. The windscreen washerfunction is activated by pushing the leverforwards, and simultaneously the wind-screen wipers start.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiperwill wipe the window approximately everysix seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is activa-ted by pressing the lever, and the rearwiper starts simultaneously.

››› page 153

››› page 71

32

The essentials

Easy Connect

CAR menu settings

Fig. 41 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 42 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options will dependon the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

● Switch the ignition on.

● If the Infotainment System is off, switch iton.

● Press the Infotainment button andthen the Vehicle function button ››› Fig. 41,

or, press the Infotainment button to go tothe Vehicle menu ››› Fig. 42.

● Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe Vehicle settings menu.

● To select a function in the menu, press thedesired button.

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing those me-nus.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system –Activation and deactivation of the traction control system (ASR) and the electronic sta-bility control (ESC) system, selecting the Sport / Off-road* mode of the electronic sta-bility control (ESC Sport)

››› page 189

TyresTyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 311

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning, adjusting the speed warning value ››› page 315 »33

The essentials


Lights

Light assist Dynamic Light Assist, Light Assist, motorway function, turning-on time, headlamprange adjustment, automatic lights when raining, one-touch signalling, travel mode.

››› page 144

Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 151

Coming Home/Leaving Home function Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions››› page 148››› page 149

Driver assistance

ACC (adaptive cruise control) Activation and deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 221

Front Assist (emergency brake as-sist system) Activation and deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning display ››› page 217

Lane Assist (system warning youif you leave the lane) Activation and deactivation of lane departure warning, adaptive lane guidance ››› page 230

Detection of traffic signs Display on the instrument panel, activation and deactivation of the speed warning ››› page 245

Trailer Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer), use to calculate theroute, maximum speed for trailer

››› page 273

Fatigue detection Activation and deactivation ››› page 248

Parking and ma-noeuvring

ParkPilot Automatic activation, front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound treble,adjust Infotainment volume

››› page 257,››› page 262

Auto Hold Switching on and off when starting off ››› page 211

Electric parking brake Switching on and off automatically ››› page 186

Braking while manoeuvring func-tion Switching on and off ››› page 262

Displaying the parking space Switching on and off

Ambient lighting – Switching on and off, selecting brightness, colour, area or total ››› page 152

34

The essentials


Mirrors and wind-screen wipers

Mirrors Synchronised regulation, lower the rear-view mirror when reversing, fold in after park-ing, rear-view mirror heating, dim in the dark

››› page 20,››› page 155

Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic windscreen wipers in case of rain, wipe when re-versing

››› page 32

Opening and clos-ing

Electric windows control Convenience opening, automatic closure in case of rain, automatic closure with cen-tral locking

››› page 140

Central locking systemUnlocking doors, automatic lock/unlock when driving, “Easy Open” audible confirma-tion, “Easy Entry” convenient entry function, automatic opening of the rear lid, interiormonitoring

››› page 125

Instrument panel –

Current consumption, average consumption, volume to refuel, convenience consum-ers, ECO Advice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed dis-play, speed warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, reset data “when settingoff”, reset data for “total calculation”, traffic signal detection

››› page 36

Date and time – Time source, time, select time zone, time format, date, date format –

Units –Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, GNC consumption, electricconsumption, pressure

–

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 43

Factory settingsAll Restore all settings –

Individual Lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, background lighting, rear viewmirrors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, instrument panel

–

››› in CAR menu on page 120

35

The essentials

Driver information System

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possibleto read the different functions of the displayby scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,the multifunction display can only be operat-ed with the steering wheel buttons.

The number of menus displayed on the in-strument panel will vary according to the ve-hicle electronics and equipment.

A specialised workshop will be able to pro-gramme or modify additional functions, ac-cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, itwill not be possible to read the menus››› page 40. Some warning messages canbe confirmed and made to disappear with thewindscreen wiper lever button or the multi-function steering wheel button.

The information system also provides the fol-lowing information and displays (dependingon the vehicle's equipment):

Driving data ››› page 38■ MFD from departure

■ MFD from refuelling■ MFD total calculation

Assist systems ››› page 39

Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system

Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-tion system

Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› BookletNavigation system

Vehicle status ››› page 33

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury.

● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.

Using the menus on the instrumentpanel

Fig. 43 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-tons.

Fig. 44 Right side of multifunction steeringwheel: control buttons.

The driver information system is controlledwith the multifunction steering wheel buttons››› Fig. 44 or with the windscreen wiper lever››› Fig. 43 (if the vehicle is not equipped withmultifunction steering wheel).

36

The essentials

Enabling the main menu


● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears,press button ››› Fig. 43 1 on the windscreenwiper lever or button on the multifunctionsteering wheel ››› Fig. 44.

● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev-er: to display the main screen or to return tothe main menu from another menu, holddown the rocker button ››› Fig. 43 2 .

● If managed from the multifunction steeringwheel: the main menu list is not displayed.To go from point to point in the main menu,press button or several times››› Fig. 44.

Select a submenu

● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 43 2 on thewindscreen wiper lever up or down or turnthe thumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel ››› Fig. 44 until the desired option ap-pears marked on the menu.

● The selected option is displayed betweentwo horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle isdisplayed on the right:

● To consult the submenu option, press but-ton ››› Fig. 43 1 on the windscreen wiperlever or button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel ››› Fig. 44.

Making changes according to the menu

● With the rocker switch on the windscreenwiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi-function steering wheel, make the desiredchanges. To increase or decrease the valuesmore quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.

● Mark or confirm the selection with button››› Fig. 43 1 on the windscreen wiper leveror button on the multifunction steeringwheel ››› Fig. 44.

Button for the driver assistance sys-tems*

Fig. 45 On the turn signal and main beamheadlight lever: button for the driver assis-tance systems

With the turn signal and main beam head-light lever button, you can activate or deacti-vate the driver assistance systems displayed

in the Assist systems menu››› page 208.

Activate or deactivate a driver assistancesystem

● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 45 in the di-rection of the arrow to open the menu As-sist systems.

● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it ››› page 36. A mark indi-cates that driver assistance system is switch-ed on.

Selection menu

Menu Function

Drivingdata

Information and possible configurationsof the multifunction display (MFD)››› page 38.

Assistsystems

Information and possible configurationsof the driver assistance systems››› page 39, ››› page 33.

Naviga-tion

Information instructions from the activa-ted navigation system: when a route guid-ance is activated, the turning arrows andproximity bars are displayed. The appear-ance is similar to the Easy Connect sys-tem.If route guidance is not activated, the di-rection of travel (compass) and the nameof the street along which you are drivingare shown ››› Booklet Navigation system. »

37

The essentials

Menu Function

AudioStation display on the radio.Track name on the CD.Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet Ra-dio or ››› Booklet Navigation system.

Tele-phone

Information and possible configurationsof the mobile phone preinstallation››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Navigationsystem.

Vehiclestatus

Display of the current warning or informa-tion texts and other system components,depending on the equipment››› page 120.

Driving data

The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ-ent values for the journey and the consump-tion.

Changing between display modes on theMFD

● In vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel: Press the rocker switch on thewindscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 43.

● Vehicles with a multifunction steeringwheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 44.

Multifunction display memory

The multifunction display is equipped withthree memories that work automatically: MFD

from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFDtotal calculation. On the screen display, youcan read which memory is currently dis-played.

● Toggle between memories with the ignitionon and the memory displayed: Press the button on the windscreen wiper lever

or the button of the multifunction steeringwheel.

Menu Function

MFD fromdeparture

Display and storage of the values forthe journey and the consumption fromwhen the ignition is switched on towhen it is switched off.If the journey is continued in less than2 hours after the ignition is switchedoff, the new data is added to the dataalready stored in the memory. Thememory will automatically be deleted ifthe journey is interrupted for more than2 hours.

MFD fromrefuelling

Display and storage of the values forthe journey and the consumption. Byrefuelling, the memory will be erasedautomatically.

Menu Function

MFD totalcalcula-tion

The memory records the values for aspecific number of partial trips, up to atotal of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km or9999 km, depending on the model ofinstrument panel. On reaching either ofthese limitsa), the memory is automati-cally erased and starts to count from 0again.

a) It varies according to the instrument panel version.

Erasing a memory manually

● Select the memory that you wish to erase.

● Hold the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel or the button of the multi-function wheel pressed down for about 2 sec-onds.

Personalising the displays

In the Easy Connect system you can adjustwhich of the possible displays of the MFD canbe shown on the instrument panel displaywith the button and the SETTINGS functionbutton ››› page 120.

38

The essentials

Data summary

Menu Function

Current fuelconsumption

The current fuel consumption dis-play operates throughout the jour-ney, in litres/100 km; and with theengine running and the vehiclestopped, in litres/hour.

Average fuelconsumption

After turning on the ignition, aver-age fuel consumption in li-tres/100 km will be displayed aftertravelling about 100 metres. Other-wise horizontal lines are displayed.The value shown is updated approxi-mately every 5 seconds.ACT®*: Depending on the equip-ment, number of active cylinders.

Operatingrange

Approximate distance in km that canstill be travelled with the fuel re-maining in the tank, assuming thesame style of driving is maintained.This is calculated using the currentfuel consumption.

Travellingtime

This indicates the hours (h) and mi-nutes (min) since the ignition wasswitched on.

Journey Distance covered in km (m) afterswitching on the ignition.

Averagespeed

The average speed will be shown af-ter a distance of about 100 metreshas been travelled. Otherwise hori-zontal lines are displayed. The valueshown is updated approximately ev-ery 5 seconds.

Menu Function

Digital dis-play ofspeed

Current speed displayed in digitalformat.

Speed warn-ing at ---km/h or Speedwarning at--- mph

If the stored speed is exceeded (be-tween 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -155 mph), an audible warning isgiven together with a visual warn-ing.

Detection oftrafficsigns

The traffic signs detected are dis-played.

Oil tempera-ture

Updated engine oil temperature dig-ital display

Coolant tem-peraturegauge

Digital display of the current temper-ature of the liquid coolant.

Convenienceconsumers

Information about the vehicle’smain convenience consumers. It isdisplayed by means of a consump-tion indicator bar.

Eco tips Tips on how to save fuel.

Reset data“when set-ting off”

Reset journey data when setting off.

Reset datafor “totalcalculation”

Reset travel journey to zero.

Storing a speed with the speed warning

● Select the display Speed warning at--- km/h (--- mph)● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel to store the current speedand activate the warning.

● To switch system on: adjust to the desiredspeed within 5 seconds using the rockerswitch on the windscreen wiper lever orby turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc-tion steering wheel. Next, press the button or again or wait several seconds.

The speed is stored and the warning activa-ted.

● To switch system off: press the but-ton or . The stored speed is de-leted.

Assist systems menu

Menu Function

ACC Adaptive cruise control (ACC) dis-play ››› page 221.

Front Assist Switching the monitoring system onand off ››› page 217.

Lane Assist*Switching the Lane Assist system onor off ››› page 231.

Blind spot*Switching the Blind Spot Detectionsystem (BSD) on or off ››› page 237 »

39

The essentials

Menu Function

Detection oftrafficsigns

Display of traffic signs ››› page 245:

Fatigue de-tection*

Switching the fatigue detection onor off (pause recommendation)››› page 248.

Status display

Bonnet, rear lid and doors open

Fig. 46 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C:front left door open; D: right rear door open.

When the ignition is switched on or whendriving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that areopen will be indicated on the instrument pan-el display, and, as applicable, this will be in-dicated audibly. The display may vary accord-ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.

Illustra-tion

Key to ››› Fig. 46

A Do not continue driving!The bonnet is open or is not properlyclosed ››› page 298.

B Do not continue driving!The rear lid is open or is not properlyclosed ››› page 137.

C, D Do not continue driving!A vehicle door is open or is not properlyclosed ››› page 125.

››› page 115

Warning and information messages

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults in the operation are displayed on thescreen using red and yellow symbols andmessages on the instrument panel display(››› page 119) and, in some cases, withaudible warnings. The display may vary ac-cording to the type of instrument panel fitted.

40

The essentials

Priority 1 warning (red symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audiblewarnings. Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warningand control lamps on page 119 !Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audiblewarnings.A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correctlevels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in Warn-ing and control lamps on page 119Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces-sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Informative text

Information relating to different vehicle processes.

Gear-change indicator

Fig. 47 Instrument panel: gear-change indica-tor (manual gearbox).

A gear change will be recommended if thegear you are in is not the most economicalchoice. If no gear-change is recommended, itmeans that you are already in the most eco-nomical gear.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

The following display symbols ››› Fig. 47mean:

● Change to a higher gear: the suggestedgear appears to the right of the current gearwhen a higher gear is recommended.

● Change to a lower gear: the suggestedgear appears to the left of the current gearwhen a lower gear is recommended.

The gear recommendation may occasionallyskip a gear (2nd 4th).

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox*

The display is only visible in tiptronic mode››› page 195.

The following display symbols mean:

● Shifting up a gear

● Shifting down a gear

CAUTION

The gear-change indicator is intended to helpsave fuel, but it is not intended to recom-mend the right gear for all driving situations.In certain situations, only the driver canchoose the correct gear (for instance whenovertaking, driving up a steep gradient ortowing a trailer).

Note

The display disappears from the instrumentpanel when you press the clutch pedal.

Outside temperature display

When the outside temperature is below +4°C(+39°F), the “ice crystal” symbol (warning ofrisk of freezing) is also displayed. At first, thissymbol flashes and then it remains lit untilthe outside temperature rises above +6°C(+43°F) ››› in Indications on the display onpage 117. »

41

The essentials

When the vehicle is at a standstill or whentravelling at very low speeds, the tempera-ture displayed may be higher than the trueoutside temperature as a result of the heatproduced by the engine.

The temperatures measured range from-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).

Engine oil temperature display

Vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel

● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 43 2 untilthe main menu appears. Enter into Drivingdata. With the button 2 move to the oiltemperature gauge.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel

● Enter the submenu Driving data andturn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera-ture display appears.

The engine reaches its operating temperaturewhen in normal driving conditions, the oiltemperature is between 80°C (180°F) and120°C (250°F). If the engine is required towork hard and the outside temperature ishigh, the engine oil temperature can in-crease. This does not present any problem aslong as the warning lamps ››› table onpage 47 or ››› table on page 47 do notappear on the display.

Additional consumers

● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*:Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 43 2 until themain menu appears. Enter into the sectionDriving data. With the rocker switch,move to the display Convenience con-sumers.

● Operation with the multi-function steeringwheel*: move with the buttons or

to Driving data and enter with OK. Turnthe right thumbwheel until the Conven-ience consumers display appears.

In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur-rent sum of all the additional appliances.

Saving tips

Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed inconditions that increase fuel consumption.Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi-cations appear automatically only with the ef-ficiency programme. After a time, the tips willdisappear automatically.

If you wish to hide a saving tip immediatelyafter it appears, press any button on thewindscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer-ing wheel*.

Note

● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-ter you switch the ignition on again.

● The saving tips do not appear in all situa-tions, but rather with a large separation oftime.

Speed warning device

The speed warning device warns the driverwhen they have exceeded the pre-set speedlimit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warningsignal sounds, and the warning lamp andthe driver message Speed limit excee-ded! will be displayed simultaneously on theinstrument panel. The warning lamp switches off when reducing speed below thestored maximum limit.

Speed warning programming is recommen-ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi-mum speed, such as when travelling in acountry with different speed limits or for amaximum speed for winter tyres.

Setting speed limit warning

You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* toset, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.

● Vehicles with radio: press the SETUP button> control button Driver Assistant >Speed warning.

42

The essentials

● Vehicles with Easy Connect: Press the button and the function button SETTINGS >Driver assistance > ACC > Dis-tance.

The warning limit can be set from 30 to240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustmentis made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.

Note

● Please bear in mind that, even with thespeed warning function, it is still importantto keep an eye on the vehicle speed with thespeedometer and to observe the legal speedlimits.

● The speed limit warning function in the ver-sion for some countries warns you at a speedof 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-setspeed limit.

Service intervals

Fig. 48 Instrument panel

The service interval indication appears on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 48 1 .

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) andservices without engine oil change (e.g. In-spection).

In vehicles with Services established by timeor mileage, the service intervals are alreadypre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by SEAT, with this serviceyou only need to change the oil when the ve-

hicle so requires. To calculate this change(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions ofuse and individual driving styles are consid-ered. The advance warning first appears 20days before the date established for the cor-responding service. The kilometres (miles)remaining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)and the time is given in complete days. Thecurrent service message cannot be vieweduntil 500 km after the last service. Prior tothis, only lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

When the Service date is approaching, whenthe ignition is switched on a Service remind-er is displayed.

Vehicles without text messages: a span-ner will be displayed on the instrumentpanel plus an indication in km.

The kilometres indicated are the maximumnumber of kilometres that can be travelleduntil the next service. After a few seconds,the display mode changes. A clock symbolappears and the number of days until thenext service is due.

Vehicles with text messages: Service in--- km or --- days will be shown on theinstrument panel display. »

43

The essentials

Service due

When the service date is due, an audiblewarning is given when the ignition is switch-ed on and the spanner displayed on thescreen flashes for a few seconds .

Vehicles with text messages: Service nowwill be shown on the instrument panel dis-play.

Reading a service notification

With the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Press and hold the button 0.0/SET for morethan 5 seconds to consult the service mes-sage 2 .

When the service date has passed, a minussign is displayed in front of the number of kil-ometres or days.

Vehicles with text messages: the followingmessage is displayed: Service --- km(miles) or --- days ago.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a SEATdealership, the display can be reset as fol-lows:

● Switch off the ignition, press and hold thebutton 0.0/SET 2 .

● Switch ignition back on.

● Release the button 0.0/SET and press itagain for the next 20 seconds.

Note

● The service message disappears after a fewseconds, when the engine is started or whenOK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper

lever, or OK on the multifunction steeringwheel.

● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnected fora long period of time, it is not possible to cal-culate the date of the next service. Thereforethe service interval display may not be cor-rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximumservice intervals permitted in the ››› BookletMaintenance Programme.

● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea-son we recommend that the service intervaldisplay be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.

Cruise control

Operating the cruise control system(CCS)*

Fig. 49 On the left of the steering column:switches and controls for operating the CCS

Fig. 50 On the left of the steering column:third lever to operate the CCS.

44

The essentials

Operation of the turn signal lever

● Switching on the CCS: Move switch››› Fig. 49 1 to . The system is on. If nospeed has been programmed, the system willnot control it.

● Activating the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 492 in the area. The current speed is

memorised and controlled.

● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Moveswitch ››› Fig. 49 1 to or push thebrake. The cruise control system is switchedoff temporarily.

● Reactivating the CCS: Press button››› Fig. 49 2 in . The memorised speedis saved and controlled again.

● Increasing stored speed during CCS regula-tion: press button 2 in . The vehicle ac-celerates until the new stored speed.

● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-tion: press button 2 in to lower thespeed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduceduntil reaching the new stored speed.

● Switching off the CCS: Move switch››› Fig. 49 1 to . The system is disconnec-ted and the memorised speed is deleted.

Operation using the third lever

● Switching on the CCS: move the third leverto ››› Fig. 50. The system switches on but itdoes not control the speed as no speed hasbeen programmed.

● Activating the CCS: press the ››› Fig. 50button. It memorises and maintains the cur-rent speed.

● Temporarily switching off the CCS: movethe lever to ››› Fig. 50 and release it or

press the brake pedal. The cruise control sys-tem is switched off temporarily.

● Reactivating the CCS: move the lever to ››› Fig. 50 and release it. The memo-rised speed is saved and controlled again.

● Switching off the CCS: move the third leverto position ››› Fig. 50. The system is dis-connected and the memorised speed is de-leted.

››› in Operation on page 213

››› page 212

45

The essentials

Warning lamps

On the instrument panel

Fig. 51 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Red warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additionalinformation on the instrument pan-el display

–

Parking brake on.››› page 186

Do not continue driving!The brake fluid level is too low orthere is a fault in the brake system.

››› page 188

Lit up or flashing: Do not continue driving!Fault in the steering.

››› page 200

Driver or passenger has not fas-tened seat belt.

››› page 79

Use the foot brake!››› page 222

Yellow warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additionalinformation on the instrument pan-el display

–

46

The essentials

Front brake pads worn.››› page 188

it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis-connection caused by the system. ››› page

189flashes: ESC or ASR activated.

ASR manually deactivated.

››› page 189

ESC in Sport mode.

ABS faulty or does not work.

Rear fog light switched on.››› page 144

lights up or flashes: fault in theemission control system.

››› page 204

it lights up: pre-heating of dieselengine. ››› page

205flashes: fault in the diesel enginemanagement.

fault in the petrol engine manage-ment.

››› page 205

lights up or flashes: fault in thesteering system.

››› page 200

Tyre pressure too low, or fault inthe tyre pressure monitoring sys-tem.

››› page 311

Fuel tank almost empty.››› page 118

Fault in airbag system and seatbelt tensioners.

››› page 89

Lane Assist is switched on, but notactive.

››› page 230

Other warning lamps

Left or right turn signal.

››› page 145

Hazard warning lights on.››› page 149

Trailer turn signals.››› page 273

it lights up green: Auto Hold activa-ted.

››› page 211

it lights up green: Press the brakepedal!It blinks in green: the selector leverlocking button has not engaged.

››› page 193

it lights up green: cruise control ac-tivated or speed limiter switchedon and active. ››› page

212it blinks in green: the speed set bythe speed limiter has been excee-ded.

it lights up green: Lane Assist isswitched on and active.

››› page 230

Main beam on or flasher on.››› page 145

››› in Warning and control lamps onpage 119

››› page 119

On the instrument panel display

Fig. 52 On the instrument panel display: dooropen.

Do not continue driving!With the corresponding indi-cation: door(s), rear lid or bon-net open or not properlyclosed.

››› page 125››› page 137››› page 298 »

47

The essentials

Ignition: Do not carry ondriving! Engine coolant leveltoo low, coolant temperaturetoo high

››› page 302

Flashing: Fault in the enginecoolant system.

Do not continue driving!Engine oil pressure too low. Ifthe warning lamp flashes,stop driving, even if the oillevel is correct. Do not evenrun the engine at idle speed!

››› page 300

Fault in the battery.››› page 305

Driving light totally or partiallyfaulty.

››› page 106

Fault in the cornering lightsystem.

››› page 148

Diesel particulate filterblocked

››› page 205

Level of windscreen washerfluid too low.

››› page 153

Flashing: Fault in the oil leveldetection. Control manually. ››› page

300Ignition: Insufficient engineoil.

Fault in the gearbox.››› page 200

Light Assist on.››› page 146

it lights up white: Hill DescentControl (HDC) is active.it lights up grey: Hill DescentControl (HDC) is not active.The system is switched on, butis not adjusting.

››› page 210

Immobiliser active.››› page 133

Service interval display ››› page 43

Mobile telephone is connec-ted via Bluetooth to the origi-nal telephone device. ››› Booklet

Audio ornavigationsystem

Mobile telephone batterycharge meter. Available onlyfor devices pre-installed in fac-tory.

Freezing warning. The outsidetemperature is lower than+4°C (+39°F).

››› page 41

Start-Stop system activated. ››› page 208

Start-Stop system unavailable.

Low consumption driving sta-tus

››› page 116

››› page 115

On the instrument panel

Fig. 53 Warning lamp for disabling the frontpassenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag isdisabled ( ).

››› page 89

The front passenger front airbagis activated ( ).

››› page 89

››› in Activation and deactivation offront passenger airbag* on page 89

››› page 88

48

The essentials

Gearbox lever

Manual gearbox

Fig. 54 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speedmanual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on thegearbox lever ››› Fig. 54.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-sition.

● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push itdownwards, move it to the left as far as it willgo and then forwards to select reverse››› Fig. 54 R .

● Release the clutch.

››› in Changing gear on page 192

››› page 192

Automatic gearbox*

Fig. 55 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po-sitions.

Parking lock

Reverse gear

Neutral (idling)

Drive (forward)

Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) togo down a gear.

P

R

N

D/S

+/–

››› in Selector lever positions onpage 194

››› page 193

››› page 49

Manual release of the selector lever

Fig. 56 Selector lever: manual release fromposition P.

Should the power supply be interrupted,there is a manual unlocking device locatedunder the console of the selector lever, onthe right. Releasing the selector lever re-quires a certain degree of practical skill.

● Unlocking: use the flat part of a screwdriverblade. »

49

The essentials

Removing the cover from the selector lever

● Apply the handbrake ››› to ensure thatthe car does not move.

● Carefully pull the corners of the selectorlever boot and twist it upwards above the lev-er handle.

Releasing the selector lever

● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel-low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 56.

● Press the interlock button on the selectorlever and move the selector lever to posi-tion N.

● After carrying out the manual release, at-tach the selector lever boot on the gearboxconsole again.

If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis-charged battery) and the vehicle has to bepushed or towed, the selector lever must first

be moved to position N, after operating themanual release mechanism.

WARNING

The selector lever may be moved out of posi-tion P only when the handbrake is firmly ap-plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi-cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi-cle could otherwise start to move inadver-tently after shifting the selector lever out ofposition P - accident risk!

50

The essentials

Air conditioning

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 57 In the centre console: Climatronic con-trols

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

1

TemperatureThe left and right sides can be adjusted separately: Turn the control to adjust the temperature

2

FanThe power of the fan is automatically adjusted. The fan is also adjusted manually by turning the control.

3

Air distributionThe airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .

4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides. »

51

The essentials

Defrost function

The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind-screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

Air distribution towards the footwell.

Upward air distribution.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation

Seat heating buttons

Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the button to make maximum cooling capacity available. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distri-bution adjusts automatically to the position .

When the warning light for button lights up, the settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or the temper-ature control on the passenger side

Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution. Press the button: the warning lamp on the button will light up .

Press the configuration button : the air conditioning operation menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect system screen.

Switching off Turn the blower control to the position or press the button.

››› in Introduction on page 171

››› page 170

52

The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning work*?

Fig. 58 In the centre console: Manual air condi-tioning controls.



1

TemperatureTurn the control to adjust the temperature

2

FanSetting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched offLevel 6: maximum fan level.

3

Air distributionRotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.

Defrost function

The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear thewindscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.


Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area. »53

The essentials


Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Air recirculation


Maximum cooling power. The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air distribution adjusts automatically to theposition


››› page 170

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

Fig. 59 In the centre console: heating system andfresh air controls.

54

The essentials



1

TemperatureTurn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot coolor dehumidify the air

2

FanSetting 0: blower, heating and fresh air systems switched offLevel 6: maximum fan level

3

Air distributionRotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.

Defrost function

The airflow is directed at the windscreen.


Distribution of air towards the chest and the footwell area.


Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes

Air recirculation ››› page 174



››› page 170

55

The essentials

Fluid Level control

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and dieselengines

Front-wheel drive vehicles:50 l, of which approx. 7 l reserve

Four-wheel drive vehicles:55 l, of which approx. 8.5 l reserve

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid container

Versions withoutheadlight washersystem

approx. 3 litres

Versions withheadlight washersystem

approx. 5 litres

Fuel

Fig. 60 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlockedand locked automatically using the centrallocking.

Opening the fuel tank cap

● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on theleft side.

● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

● Place it in the space on the hinge of theopen flap ››› Fig. 60.

Closing the fuel tank cap

● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right asfar as it will go.

● Close the lid.

››› in Refuelling on page 292

››› page 292

56

The essentials

Oil

Fig. 61 Engine oil dipstick. Fig. 62 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap.

The level is measured using the dipstick loca-ted in the engine compartment››› page 298.

The oil should leave a mark between zonesA and C . It should never exceed zone A .

● Zone A : Do not add oil.

● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.

● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B .

Topping up engine oil

● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.

● Add oil slowly.

● At the same time, check the level to ensureyou do not add too much.

● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty. »

57

The essentials

Engine oil specifications

Engine type Flexible service (LongLife)Set Service (dependent on time/distance travel-

led)

Petrol enginesVW 508 00

VW 504 00a) VW 504 00

Engines with particulate filter (DPF)b) VW 507 00 VW 507 00

Diesel engines without particulate filter (DPF) –VW 505 01c)

VW 506 01c)

a) Use of engine oil compliant with the VW 504 00 specification instead of VW 508 00 may have a slight negative effect on the vehicle’s exhaust gas values.b) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.c) If the quality of the fuel available in the country does not fulfil the EN 228 (for petrol) and EN 590 (for diesel) standards.

››› in Changing engine oil on page 302

››› page 300

Coolant

Fig. 63 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 298.

When the engine is cold, replace the coolantwhen the level is below .

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additive G13(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives thenecessary frost protection down to -25°C(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts ofthe engine cooling system against corrosion.It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-ses the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the cooling system, the percentageof additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may be

58

The essentials

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theG13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-corrosion protection ››› in Topping up cool-ant on page 303. The mixture of G13 withG12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green-blue) engine coolants will significant-ly reduce anti-corrosion protection andshould therefore be avoided ››› in Toppingup coolant on page 303.

››› in Topping up coolant on page 303

››› page 302

Brake fluid

Fig. 64 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 298.

The level should be between the and marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-cal Service.

››› in Top up brake fluid on page 304

››› page 303

Windscreen washer

Fig. 65 In the engine compartment: wind-screen washer reservoir top.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located inthe engine compartment ››› page 298.

To top up, mix water with a product recom-mended by SEAT.

In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.

››› in Checking and topping up thewindscreen washer reservoir onpage 304

››› page 304

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment ››› page 298. It does not require »

59

The essentials

maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-spection Service.

››› in Important safety warnings forhandling a vehicle battery on page 306

››› page 305

60

The essentials

Emergencies

Fuses

Fuse location

Fig. 66 Left-hand drive: fuse box cover onthe driver-side dash panel. Right-handdrive: fuse box behind the glove compart-ment.

Fig. 67 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover.

Underneath the instrument panel (left-handdrive)

The fuse box is located behind the storagecompartment ››› Fig. 66 .

Behind the glove compartment (right-handdrive)

The fuse box is located behind the glovecompartment ››› Fig. 66 . To be able to ac-cess the fuse box ››› page 103.

In the engine compartment

Press the locking tabs to release the fuse boxcover ››› Fig. 67.

Identifying fuses situated below the dashpanel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Colour Amp rating

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40


››› page 102

61

The essentials

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 68 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparation

● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-trical equipment.

● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 103.

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 68.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse

● Remove the fuse.

● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.

● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Bulbs

Bulbs (12 V)

Note: Depending on the level of equipmentfitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used forpart or all of the interior and/or exterior light-ing. LEDs have an estimated life that exceedsthat of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go toan authorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Daytime running light/sidelight

LED (it cannot be re-placed)

Dipped beam headlights H7 LL

Main beam headlights H7 LL

Turn signal PY21W

Full-LED main headlights

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs

Front fog light Type

Fog/cornering lights* H8

Rear lights Type

Brake light/tail light P21W LL

Side lights P21W LL

Turn signal PY21W LL

Retro fog light P21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

LED rear lights Type

Turn signal PY21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

The remaining functions work with LEDs

››› page 106

Action in the event of a punc-ture

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surfaceand in a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.

● Apply the handbrake.

● Switch on the hazard warning lights.

● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.62

The essentials

● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector leverto position P.

● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.

● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 95and the spare wheel* ready››› page 314.

● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).

● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING

● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.

● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the car witha stone or similar to prevent the vehicle frommoving.

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-ture kit

Fig. 69 Standard representation: contents ofthe anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located under thefloor panel in the luggage compartment.

Sealing the tyre

● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 69 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.

● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 69 10 .

● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 69 3 intothe sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will breakautomatically.

● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 69 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.

● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,fill the tyre with the contents of the sealantbottle.

● Remove the bottle from the valve.

● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 69 1 .

Inflating the tyre

● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 69 5 into the tyre valve.

● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 69 7 .

● Start the engine and leave it running.

● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 69 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 162.

● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFFswitch ››› Fig. 69 8 .

● Keep the air compressor running until itreaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8minutes.

● Disconnect the air compressor.

● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.

● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre. »

63

The essentials

● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.

● Repeat the inflation process.

● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stopand request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.

● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.

● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).

● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 97.

››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* onpage 95

››› page 95

Changing a wheel

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 70 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Towline anchorage

Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Crank handle for jack

Jack*

Hook for extracting the central wheeltrims*

Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps.

››› in What to do first on page 63

››› page 95

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Central wheel trim*

Fig. 71 Correct positioning of the centralwheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for accessto the wheel bolts.

Removing

● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools) to oneof the chambers of the central wheel trim.

● Insert the box spanner through the hook,supporting it on the tyre and remove thewheel trim.

Fitting

● Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. Thebottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge shouldalign with the inflation valve ››› Fig. 71 1 .

● Press the central trim firmly until it locks inwith an audible click.

64

The essentials

Note

There is also a valve mark on the back of thecentral wheel trim that indicates the correctalignment.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 72 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal

● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools››› Fig. 70 7 ) over the cap until it clicks intoplace ››› Fig. 72.

● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

Anti-theft wheel bolts

Fig. 73 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap andadapter.

● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.

● Insert the special adapter (vehicle tools)onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it onas far as it will go.

● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) ontothe adapter as far as it will go.

● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 65.

Note

Make a note of the code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place,but not in your vehicle. If you need a newadapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi-cial Service, indicating the code number.

Loosening the wheel bolts

Fig. 74 Wheel: loosen the wheel bolts.

● Insert the box spanner (vehicle tools) ontothe wheel bolt as far as it will go. An adapteris required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 65.

● Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turnto the left ››› Fig. 74 (arrow). To apply the re-quired torque, hold the wheel brace at theend. If it is not possible to loosen a wheelbolt, carefully apply pressure with one footon the end of the box spanner. Hold on to thevehicle for support and take care not to slip.

WARNING

Slightly loosen the wheel bolts (one turn) be-fore raising the vehicle with the jack*. If not,an accident may occur.

65

The essentials

Raising the vehicle

Fig. 75 Crossbar: marks.

Fig. 76 Strut: mounting the jack on the vehi-cle.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› .

● Find the support point on the strut (sunkenarea) closest to the wheel to be changed››› Fig. 75.

● Turn the jack* crank handle, located belowthe strut support point, to raise it until thetab 1 ››› Fig. 76 is below the housing provi-ded.

● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” ontothe housing provided on the strut and themobile base 2 is resting on the ground. Thebase plate 2 should fall vertically with re-spect to the support point 1 .

● Continue turning the jack* until the wheelis slightly lifted off the ground.

WARNING

● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. Ifthe surface is slippery or soft, the jack* couldslip or sink, respectively, with the resultantrisk of injury.

● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-plied by the manufacturer. Other vehiclescould slip, with the consequent risk of injury.

● Only mount the jack* on the support pointsdesigned for this purpose on the strut, andalways align the jack correctly. If you do not,the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad-equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!

● The height of the parked vehicle canchange as a result of variations in tempera-ture and loading.

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be raised on the cross-bar. Only place the jack* on the points de-signed for this purpose on the strut. Other-wise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Removing and fitting a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelbolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

Taking off the wheel

● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.

● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel

When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotationdirection, observe the instructions in››› page 67.

● Mount the wheel.

● Screw on the wheel bolts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.

● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.

● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairsusing the wheel brace.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect

66

The essentials

the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-ting the wheel.

Tyres with compulsory direction of ro-tation

A directional tread pattern can be identifiedby the arrows on the sidewall that point inthe direction of rotation. Always observe thedirection of rotation indicated when fittingthe wheel to guarantee optimum propertiesof this type of tyres with regard to grip,noises, wear and aquaplaning.

If it is absolutely necessary to fit the sparetyre* against the direction of rotation, drivewith care as this means the tyre does not of-fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-ticular importance when the road surface iswet.

To return to directional tread tires, replacethe punctured tyre as soon as possible andrestore the obligatory direction of rotation ofall tyres.

Subsequent work

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.

● Plate wheels: fit the central wheel rim again››› page 64.

● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.

● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in theluggage compartment ››› page 162.

● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.

● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-cator, adjust the pressure and store the read-ing in the radio/Easy Connect system*››› page 311.

● Have the tightening torque of the wheelbolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench (it should be 140 Nm). Mean-while, drive carefully.

● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on thefront wheels.

Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions. Keep your speedbelow 50 km/h (30 mph).

If there is a danger of being trapped despitehaving mounted the chains, it is best to disa-ble the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC››› page 191, Switching on/off the ESCand ASR.

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

215/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm



Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims and the rimring before fitting snow chains.

Remove the chains when roads are free ofsnow. Driving characteristics worsen, and thewheels become damaged quickly and mayeven be rendered unusable.

67

The essentials

Emergency towing of the vehi-cle

Towing

Fig. 77 Right side of the front bumper: tow-line anchorage screwed in.

Fig. 78 Right side of the rear bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

Towline anchorages

Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-rages.

The towline anchorages are located underthe floor panel in the luggage compartment,next to the vehicle tools ››› page 95.

Screw the towline anchorage into the screwconnection ››› Fig. 77 o ››› Fig. 78 and tightenit with the wheel brace.

Tow rope or tow bar

The tow bar offers increased safety and alower risk of damage.

The tow rope is recommended when there isno tow bar. It must be elastic so that it doesnot damage the vehicle.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

● The tow rope must be taut before you driveoff.

● Release the clutch very carefully when start-ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler-ate gently (automatic gearbox).

Driving style

Towing requires some experience, especiallywhen using a tow rope. Both drivers shouldrealise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In-experienced drivers should not attempt totow.

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicleand take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-ways a risk of overloading and damaging theanchorage points.

Switch on the ignition so that the turn sig-nals, windscreen wipers and windscreenwasher can work. Ensure that the steeringwheel is unlocked and moves freely.

Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicleswith a manual gearbox. With an automaticgearbox, place the lever in N.

To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. Thebrake servo does not work when the engineis switched off.

The power steering only works when the igni-tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving,provided that the battery is sufficiently charg-ed. Otherwise, it will need more force.

Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at alltimes.


››› page 98

68

The essentials

Tow-starting

If the engine will not start, first try starting itusing the battery of another vehicle››› page 69. You should only attempt to tow-start a vehicle if charging the battery doesnot work. This is done by leveraging wheelmovement.

When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter thecatalytic converter.

● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.

● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.


● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.

● As soon as the engine has started, pressthe clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.

How to jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be at least25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note

● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 79 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start Stop system

Fig. 80 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start Stop system

Jump lead terminal connections

Switch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .

Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 79.

Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in thevehicle providing assistance B .

For vehicles without Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadto the negative terminal – of the vehi-cle providing the current B ››› Fig. 79.

For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-nect one end of the black jump lead X

to a suitable ground terminal, to a solidpiece of metal in the engine block, or tothe engine block itself ››› Fig. 80. »

1.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

69

The essentials

Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component bol-ted to the engine block or to the engineblock itself of the vehicle with the flatbattery. Do not connect it to a point nearthe battery A .

Position the leads in such a way thatthey cannot come into contact with anymoving parts in the engine compart-ment.

Starting

Start the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.

Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutesuntil the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

Before you remove the jump leads,switch off the dipped beam headlights ifthey are switched on.

Turn on the heater blower and heatedrear window in the vehicle with the flatbattery. This helps minimise voltagepeaks which are generated when theleads are disconnected.

When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery termi-nals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING

● Please note the safety warnings referring toworking in the engine compartment››› page 298.

● The battery providing assistance must havethe same voltage as the flat battery (12V) andapproximately the same capacity (see imprinton battery). Failure to comply could result inan explosion.

● Never use jump leads when one of the bat-teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-ter the battery has thawed, battery acid couldleak and cause chemical burns. If a batteryfreezes, it should be replaced.

● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettesaway from batteries, danger of explosion.Failure to comply could result in an explo-sion.

● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.

● Do not connect the negative cable from theother vehicle directly to the negative terminalof the flat battery. The gas emitted from thebattery could be ignited by sparks. Danger ofexplosion.

● Never attach the negative cable to fuel sys-tem components or the brake lines in the oth-er vehicle.

● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-hicle, this can cause a short circuit.

● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-sult in chemical burns.

Note

The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-erwise electricity could flow as soon as thepositive terminals are connected.

70

The essentials

Changing the wiper blades

Windscreen wipers service position

Fig. 81 Wipers in service position.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-ers are in service position ››› Fig. 81.

● Close the bonnet ››› page 298.

● Switch the ignition on and off.

● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly 4 ››› page 32.

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

››› page 97

Changing the windscreen and rearwindow wiper blades

Fig. 82 Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Fig. 83 Changing the rear wiper blade

Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms

● Place the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition ››› page 71.

● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas-tening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

● Raise the wiper arms.

● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.

● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› in Changingthe windscreen and rear window wiperblades on page 98.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

● Lift and unfold the wiper arms.

● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 82 1

and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.

● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.

● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear wiper blade

● Raising/lowering the wiper arm.

● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 83 (arrowA ).

● Hold down the release button 1 whilegently pulling the blade in the direction of ar-row B .

● Insert a new blade of the same length andtype in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-rection to the arrow B and hook into placebutton 1 . »

71

The essentials

● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

››› in Changing the windscreen andrear window wiper blades on page 98

››› page 97

72

Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Safety first!

WARNING

● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle, bothfor the driver and the passengers. The othersections of the on-board documentation alsocontain further information that you shouldbe aware of for your own safety and for thesafety of your passengers.

● Ensure that the on-board documentation iskept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-cially important when lending or selling thevehicle to another person.

Advice about driving

Before setting off

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 162.

– Make sure that no objects can interferewith the pedals.

– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-rors properly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rearseats always have the head restraints inthe in-use position ››› page 77.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-straints according to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 90.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position ››› page 74.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly ››› page 79.

What affects driving safety?

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers. When your concentra-tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-

cumstance, you endanger yourself as well asothers on the road ››› , for this reason:

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, takebreaks regularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip,the risk of injury and accidents increases.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce the »

73

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover partof the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

● three-point seat belts,

● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats,

● belt tensioners for the front and rear sideseats,

● front airbags,

● knee airbags,

● side airbags in the front seat backrests,

● head-protection airbags,

● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats inthe rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,

● height-adjustable front head restraints,

● rear head restraints with in-use positionand non-use position,

● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position of the vehicleoccupants

Correct sitting position for the driver

Fig. 84 The proper distance between driverand steering wheel.

Fig. 85 Correct head restraint position for thedriver.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-mend the following adjustments for the driv-er:

– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is adistance of at least 25 cm between thesteering wheel and the centre of your chest››› Fig. 84.

– Move the driver's seat forwards or back-wards so that you are able to press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals to thefloor with your knees still slightly angled››› .

– Ensure that you can reach the highest pointof the steering wheel.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› Fig. 85.

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 79.

– Keep both feet in the footwell so that youhave the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 156.

1) Depending on the version/market.74

Safe driving

WARNING

● An incorrect sitting position of the drivercan lead to severe injuries.

● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is atleast 25 cm distance between the centre ofthe chest and the centre of the steeringwheel ››› Fig. 84. If you are sitting closer than25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect youproperly.

● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of 25cm, contact a specialised workshop. Theworkshop will help you decide if special spe-cific modifications are necessary.

● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.This reduces the risk of injury when the driverairbag is triggered.

● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.in the centre of the steering wheel). In suchcases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

● To reduce the risk of injury to the driverduring sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac-cident, never drive with the backrest tilted farback! The airbag system and seat belts canonly provide optimal protection when thebackrest is in an upright position and thedriver is wearing his or her seat belt correct-ly.

● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-ieve optimal protection.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Read the additional information carefully››› page 20.

WARNING

● Never adjust the position of the steeringwheel when the vehicle is moving, as thiscould cause an accident.

● Move the lever up firmly so the steeringwheel position does not accidentally changeduring driving. risk of accident!

● Make sure you are capable of reaching andfirmly holding the upper part of the steeringwheel: risk of accident!

● If you adjust the steering wheel so that itpoints towards your face, the driver airbagwill not protect you properly in the event ofan accident. Make sure that the steeringwheel points towards your chest.

Correct position for the front passen-ger

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident, we recom-mend the following adjustments for the frontpassenger:

– Move the front passenger seat back as faras possible ››› .

– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-tion so that your back rests completelyagainst it.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the samelevel as the top of your head ››› page 77.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the front passenger seat.


It is possible to deactivate the front passen-ger airbag in exceptional circumstances››› page 89.

Adjusting the front passenger seat››› page 156.

WARNING

● An incorrect sitting position of the frontpassenger can lead to severe injuries.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so thatthere is at least 25 cm between your chestand the dash panel. If you are sitting closerthan 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protectyou properly.

● If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the minimum distance of 25cm, contact a specialised workshop. Theworkshop will help you decide if special spe-cific modifications are necessary. »

75

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● Always keep your feet in the footwell whenthe vehicle is moving; never rest them on thedash panel, out the window or on the seat. Anincorrect sitting position exposes you to anincreased risk of injury in case of a suddenbraking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-gered, you could sustain severe injuries dueto an incorrect sitting position.

● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas-senger in events such as sudden braking ma-noeuvres or an accident, never travel with thebackrest tilted far back! The airbag systemand seat belts can only provide optimal pro-tection when the backrest is in an upright po-sition and the front passenger is wearing hisor her seat belt properly. The further the seatbackrests are tilted to the rear, the greaterthe risk of injury due to incorrect positioningof the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po-sition!

● Adjust the head restraint correctly in orderto achieve maximum protection.

Correct sitting position for rear seatpassengers

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of asudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,passengers on the rear seat bench must con-sider the following:

– Sit up straight.

– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-sition ››› page 77.

– Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of the rear seat.


– Use an appropriate child restraint systemwhen you take children in the vehicle››› page 90.

WARNING

● If the passengers in the rear seats are notsitting properly, they could sustain severe in-juries.

● Adjust the head restraint correctly in orderto achieve maximum protection.

● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-tion when seat backrests are in an uprightposition and the vehicle occupants are wear-ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers Inthe rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi-tioning of the seat belt increases.

Examples of incorrect sitting posi-tions

Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly when the belt webs are properly posi-tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan-tially reduce the protective function of seatbelts and increase the risk of injury due to in-correct seat belt position. As the driver, youare responsible for all passengers, especiallychildren.

– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrectsitting position in the vehicle while travel-ling ››› .

The following list contains examples of sit-ting positions that could be dangerous for allvehicle occupants. The list is not complete,but we would like to make you aware of thisissue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

● Never stand in the vehicle.

● Never stand on the seats.

● Never kneel on the seats.

● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.

● Never lean against the dash panel.

● Never lie on the rear bench.

● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

● Never sit sideways.

● Never lean out of a window.

● Never put your feet out of a window.

● Never put your feet on the dash panel.

● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.

● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-well.

● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.

● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-gage compartment.

76

Safe driving

WARNING

● Any incorrect sitting position increases therisk of severe injuries. Sitting in an incorrectposition exposes the vehicle occupants to se-vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by strik-ing a vehicle occupant who has assumed anincorrect sitting position.

● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-er sitting position and maintain it throughoutthe trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas-sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po-sition during the trip ››› page 74, Correct posi-tion of the vehicle occupants.

Correct adjustment of front head re-straints

Fig. 86 Correctly adjusted head restraint asviewed from the front and the side.


Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of passenger protection and canreduce the risk of injuries in most accidentsituations.

● Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is, as far as possible, at the same levelas the top of your head, or at the very least,at eye level ››› Fig. 86.

WARNING

● Travelling with the head restraints removedor improperly adjusted increases the risk ofsevere injuries. An improper adjustment ofthe head restraints may cause death in an ac-cident and increase the risk of suffering inju-ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-pected manoeuvres.

● The head restraints must always be adjus-ted according to the height of the passenger.

Correct adjustment of rear head re-straints

Fig. 87 Head restraints in the correct posi-tion.

Fig. 88 Head restraint position warning label.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-portant part of the passenger protection andcan reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-dent situations »

77

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Rear head restraints

– The rear head restraints have 2 positions:use and non-use.

– One position for use (head restraint raised)››› Fig. 87. In this position, the head re-straints are used normally, protecting pas-sengers along with the rear seat belts.

– And one position for non-use (head re-straint lowered).

– To fit the head restraints in position for use,pull on the edges with both hands in thedirection of the arrow.

WARNING

● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the head restraintsare in the non-use position. See the warninglabel located on the rear side fixed window››› Fig. 88.

● Do not swap the centre rear head restraintwith either of the outer seat rear head re-straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident!

CAUTION

Note the instructions on the adjustment ofthe head restraints ››› page 157.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the accel-erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpairedto the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal mustbe pressed down thoroughly in order to stopthe vehicle.

Wear suitable footwear

Always wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING

● Restricting pedal operation can lead to crit-ical situations while driving.

● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-erings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.

● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal area andimpair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-den driving or braking manoeuvre, you willnot be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-celerator pedal. Risk of accident!

78

Seat belts

Seat belts

Why wear a seat belt

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the frontand three in the rear. Each seat is equippedwith a three-point seat belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approvedonly for four seats. Two front seats and tworear seats.

WARNING

● Never transport more than the permittedamount of people in your vehicle.

● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his orher seat. Children must be protected with anappropriate child restraint system.

Seat belt control lamp*

Fig. 89 Instrument panel: right rear seat oc-cupied and corresponding seat belt fasteneddisplay.

The control lamp illuminates to remind thedriver to fasten his seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

– Fasten your seat belt securely.

– Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.

– Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight.

When the ignition is switched on, the controllamp in the instrument panel lights up (de-pending on the model version) if the driver orpassenger have not fastened their seat belts.

An audible warning signal will sound for afew seconds if the seat belts are not fastenedas the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed

of more than approximately 25 km/h(15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastenedwhile the vehicle is in motion. The warninglight will also flash .

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-nition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Depending on the model version, when theignition is switched on, the seat belt statusdisplay ››› Fig. 89 on the instrument panel in-forms the driver whether the passengers inthe rear seats have fastened their seat belts.The symbol indicates that the passenger inthis seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.

When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastenedor unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-dication can be hidden by pressing the0.0/SET button on the dash panel.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion.An audible warning will also be heard if thevehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h(15 mph).

79

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 90 Drivers with properly worn seat beltswill not be thrown forward in the event of sud-den braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability of thebelts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury.This is why it is so important to fasten seatbelts before every trip, even when "just driv-ing around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injuryand improving the chances of survival wheninvolved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, overturns or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seatbelt and ensure that all vehicle occupantshave fastened their seat belts properly beforeyou drive off!

Important safety instructions for theuse of seat belts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING

● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.

● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-cupants must also wear the seat belts at alltimes, otherwise they run the risk of being in-jured.

● The seat belt cannot offer its full protectionif the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Never allow two passengers (even children)to share the same seat belt.

● Always keep both feet in the footwell infront of your seat as long as the vehicle is inmotion.

● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

● The seat belt must never be twisted while itis being worn.

● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)because this can cause injuries.

● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged orjammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.

● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as anovercoat over a sweater) impairs the properfit and function of the seat belts, reducingtheir capacity to protect.

80

Seat belts

● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not beblocked with paper or other objects, as thiscan prevent the latch plate from engaging se-curely.

● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings orsimilar items to alter the position of the beltwebbing.

● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to theconnections, belt retractors or parts of thebuckle could cause severe injuries in theevent of an accident. Therefore, you mustcheck the condition of all seat belts at regularintervals.

● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci-dent and have been stretched must be re-placed by a specialised workshop. Renewalmay be necessary even if there is no apparentdamage. The belt anchorage should also bechecked.

● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.

● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise theretractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 91 A driver not wearing a seat belt isthrown forward violently.

Fig. 92 The unbelted passenger in the rearseat is thrown forward violently, hitting thedriver who is wearing a seat belt.

It is easy to explain how the laws of physicswork in the case of a head-on collision: whena vehicle starts moving, a type of energy

called “kinetic energy” is created both in thepassengers and inside the vehicle.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and on the weight ofthe vehicle and of its passengers. The higherthey are, the more energy there is to be “ab-sorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h(30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-netic energy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle inour example do not have their seat belts fas-tened, in the event of a collision the entireamount of the passengers' kinetic energy willbe only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is not »

81

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

possible to brace oneself with one's hands.In a frontal collision, unbelted passengersare thrown forward and will make violent con-tact with the steering wheel, dash panel,windscreen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 91.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 92.

How to properly adjust yourseatbelt

Fastening and unfastening your seatbelt

Fig. 93 Positioning and removing the seatbelt buckle.

Fig. 94 Position of seat belt during pregnan-cy.


Fasten your seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection ifthe seat belt is not positioned correctly.

● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latchplate and pull it slowly across your chest andlap.

● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for theappropriate seat and push it down until it issecurely locked with an audible click››› Fig. 93 A.

82

Seat belts

● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automat-ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free-dom of movement is permitted when theshoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-ing sudden braking, during travel in steepareas or bends and during acceleration, theautomatic retractor on the shoulder belt islocked.

The automatic belt retractors on the frontseats and side rear seats are1) fitted withseat belt tensioners ››› page 83.

Releasing the seat belt

● Press the red button on the belt buckle››› Fig. 93 B. The latch plate is released andsprings out ››› .

● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim is not damaged.

Positioning seat belts

Seat belts offer their maximum protection on-ly when they are properly positioned.

WARNING

● The seat belts offer best protection onlywhen the backrests are in an upright position

and the seat belts have been fastened prop-erly.

● Never put the latch plate in the buckle ofanother seat. If you do this, the seat belt willnot protect you properly and the risk of injuryis increased.

● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion. If you do, you increase therisk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se-vere injuries in the event of an accident.

● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible over thepelvis, never across the stomach, and alwayslie flat so that no pressure is exerted on theabdomen ››› Fig. 94.

● Always engage the retractor lock when youare securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1››› page 90.

● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 80.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works


The seat belts for the front seats and the siderear seats1) are equipped with belt tension-ers. The belt tensioners are activated by sen-sors, although only in severe head-on, lateraland rear-end collisions. This retracts andtightens the seat belts, reducing the forwardmotion of the occupants.

The belt tensioners will not be triggered inthe event of minor collisions, if the vehicleoverturns, or in accidents where no majorforces act on the vehicle.

Note

● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and it isnot an indication of fire in the vehicle.

● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or components ofthe system are scrapped. Specialised work-shops are familiar with these regulations,which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of belt ten-sioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seat »

1) Depending on version/market.83

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

belt may be damaged. The consequence maybe that, in the event of an accident, the belttensioners function incorrectly or may notfunction at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known tothe specialised workshops, must be ob-served.

WARNING

● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners mayfail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir-cumstances.

● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove orinstall parts of the belt tensioners or seatbelts.

● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto-matic retractor cannot be repaired.

● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other repairwork, must be performed by a specialisedworkshop only.

● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must be changedif they have been activated.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear a seatbelt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only work ef-fectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the head restraints properly. There-fore, it is most important to properly wear theseat belts at all times, not only because thisis required by law in most countries, but alsofor your safety ››› page 79, Why wear a seatbelt.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to bethrown forward into the area of the deploying

airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-pant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors that will triggeran airbag are: the type of accident, the angleof collision and the speed of the vehicle.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orcurtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-to account that the visible damage in a vehi-cle involved in an accident, no matter howserious, is not a determining factor for theairbags to have been triggered.

WARNING

● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-ing an incorrect sitting position can lead tocritical or fatal injuries.

● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustain criti-cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.Children up to 12 years old should always

84

Airbag system

travel on the rear seat. Never transportchildren in the vehicle if they are not restrain-ed or the restraint system is not appropriatefor their age, size or weight.

● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if youlean forward or to the side while travelling orassume an incorrect sitting position, there isa substantially increased risk of injury. Thisincreased risk of injury will be further in-creased if you are struck by an inflating air-bag.

● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflatingairbag, always wear the seat belt properly››› page 79.

● Always adjust the front seats properly.

Description of airbag system


The airbag system is not a substitute for theseat belts. The airbag system offers addition-al protection for the driver and passenger incombination with the seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the followingmodules (as per vehicle equipment):

● Electronic control unit

● Front airbags for driver and passenger

● Knee airbag for the driver

● Side airbags

● Head airbag

● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel ››› page 89

● Key-operated switch for front passenger air-bag

● Control lamp for disabled/enabled statusof the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :

● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 89,

● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignitionis switched on,

● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on,

● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:

● the ignition is switched off

● there is a minor frontal collision

● there is a minor side collision

● there is a rear-end collision

● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING

● The seat belts and airbags can only providemaximum protection if the occupants areseated correctly ››› page 74, Correct positionof the vehicle occupants.

● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,have the system checked immediately by aspecialised workshop. Otherwise there is adanger that during a collision, the systemmay fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousandths of a second, to provide addi-tional protection in the event of an accident.A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-tion of fire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role, »

85

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even thoughthe accident may cause extensive damage tothe car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions:

● Driver airbag.

● Front passenger front airbag

● Knee airbag for the driver.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions:

● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.

● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:

● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);

● the hazard warning lights switch on;

● all doors are unlocked;

● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Airbag safety instructions

Front airbags


WARNING

● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not in anycase be occupied by other passenger, petsand objects.

● The airbags provide protection for just oneaccident; replace them once they have de-ployed.

● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

● Do not attempt to modify components ofthe airbag system in any way.

Knee airbag*


WARNING

● The knee airbag is deployed in front of thedriver's knees. Always keep the deploymentareas of the knee airbags free.

● Never not fix objects to the cover or in thedeployment area of the knee airbag.

● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is adistance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) betweenyour knees and the location of the this air-bag. If your physical constitution preventsyou from meeting these requirements, makesure you contact a specialised workshop.

Side airbags*


WARNING

● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly while thevehicle is in motion, you are at a greater riskof injury if the side airbag system is triggeredin an accident.

● In order for the side airbags to provide theirmaximum protection, the prescribed sittingposition must always be maintained withseat belts fastened while travelling.

● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctly meas-ure the pressure increase on the interior ofthe doors, due to air escaping through the

86

Airbag system

areas with holes or openings in the door pan-el.

● Never drive if the interior door panels havebeen removed or if the panels have not beencorrectly fitted.

● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakersin the door panels have been removed, un-less the holes left by the loudspeakers havebeen closed properly.

● Always check that the openings are closedor covered if loudspeakers or other equip-ment are fitted inside the door panels.

● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploymentspace between them and the airbags, or al-low children or other passengers to travel inthis position. It is also important not to at-tach any accessories (such as cup holders) tothe doors. This would impair the protectionoffered by the side airbags.

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged. Inthis case, the side airbags would not be trig-gered.

● Under no circumstances should protectivecovers be fitted over seats with side airbagsunless the covers have been approved for usein your vehicle. Because the airbag deploysfrom the side of the backrest, the use of con-ventional seat covers would obstruct the side

airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec-tiveness.

● Any damage to the original seat upholsteryor around the seams of the side airbag unitsmust be repaired immediately by a special-ised workshop.


● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag compo-nents for other repairs (such as removal ofthe front seat) should only be performed by aspecialised workshop. Otherwise, faults mayoccur during the airbag system operation.


Curtain airbags*


WARNING

● In order for the head-protection airbags toprovide their maximum protection, the pre-scribed sitting position must always be main-tained with seat belts fastened while travel-ling.

● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag mustbe disabled in those vehicles fitted with ascreen dividing the interior of the vehicle.

See your technical service to make this ad-justment.

● There must be no other persons, animals orobjects between the occupants of the outerseats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protec-tion airbag can deploy completely without re-striction and provide the greatest possibleprotection. Therefore, sun blinds which havenot been expressly approved for use in yourvehicle may not be attached to the side win-dows

● The built-in coat hooks should be used onlyfor lightweight clothing. Do not leave anyheavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-ers.


● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of the air-bag components for other repairs (such as re-moval of the roof lining) should only be per-formed by a specialised workshop. Other-wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-tem operation.


● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior of thefront doors. To ensure the correct operation ofthe side and curtain airbags neither thedoors nor the door panels should be modifiedin any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the »

87

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

front door is damaged, the airbag systemmay not work correctly. All work carried outon the front door must be done in a special-ised workshop.

Deactivating airbags

Activation and deactivation of frontpassenger airbag*

Fig. 95 Switch for activating and deactivatingthe front passenger airbag.

Fig. 96 Dash panel: control lamp for deactiva-ted front passenger airbag in centre console.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbagonly if you have to use a rear-facing childseat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in therear seat to avoid having to deactivate thefront passenger airbag.

Front passenger front airbag switch

When the front passenger airbag is deactiva-ted, this means that only the front passengerfront airbag is deactivated. All the other air-bags in the vehicle remain activated.

Disconnect the front passenger front airbag


● Open the door on the front passenger side.

● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag

››› Fig. 95. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.

● Turn the key gently to the position. Ifyou have difficulty, ensure that you have in-serted the key as far as it will go.


● Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp remains lit where itsays in the centre of thedash panel ››› Fig. 96.

Connect the front passenger front airbag


● Open the front passenger door.

● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 95. About 3/4 of the key should enter,as far as it will go.

● Turn the key gently to the position. If youhave difficulty, ensure that you have insertedthe key as far as it will go.


● Check, with the ignition switched on, thatthe control lamp does not remain litwhere it says in the cen-tre of the dash panel ››› Fig. 96. The con-trol lamp lights up for 60 seconds and thengoes off.

88

Airbag system

WARNING

● The driver of the vehicle is responsible fordisabling or switching on the airbag.

● Always switch off the ignition before disa-bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to doso could result in a fault in the airbag deacti-vation system.

● Never leave the key in the airbag disablingswitch as it could get damaged or enable ordisable the airbag during driving.

● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,reactivate it as soon as possible so that it canfulfil its protective function.

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-in-strument

Fault in airbagsystem and seatbelt tensioners.

Have the system checked immedi-ately by a specialised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passengerfront airbag disa-bled.

Check whether the airbag shouldremain disabled

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passengerfront airbag ena-bled.

The control lamp switches off auto-matically 60 seconds after the igni-tion is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner systemcontrol lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-cates a malfunction in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system ››› . Have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the warning lamp re-mains lit on the dash panel to remind youthat the airbag is deactivated. If, with thefront passenger airbag deactivated, this lampdoes not remain lit or if it is lit together withthe control lamp on the dash panel, thereis a fault in the airbag system ››› . If thecontrol lamp is flashing, there is a fault in thedisabling of the airbag system ››› . Have thesystem checked immediately by a specialisedworkshop.

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system, the airbags and seat

belts may not trigger correctly, may fail totrigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.

● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the sys-tem checked immediately by a specialisedworkshop.

● Do not mount a child seat in the front pas-senger seat or remove the mounted childseat! The front passenger front airbag maydeploy during an accident in spite of thefault.

CAUTION

Always pay attention to any lit control lampsand to the corresponding descriptions and in-structions to avoid damage to the vehicle orharm to the occupants.

89

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Transporting children safely

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 81. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children mustalways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all ages

made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (seewww.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seatsshown on the website as described below:

● Child seats in the opposite direction oftravel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket(Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).

● Child seats in the direction of travel (group1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIXDUO Plus).

● Child seats in the direction of travel (group2): seat belt and ISOFIX (Peke G3 KIDFIX)1).

● Child seats in the direction of travel (group3): with seat belt (Peke G3 KIDFIX)1).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 90.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Important information regarding thefront passenger's airbag


Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 84.

● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 86.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 88.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 92.

1) Temporarily, the child seat recommended by theAccessories Programme for groups 2 and 3 will beROMER KIDFIX XP© instead of Peke G3 KIDFIX. It isavailable from the SEAT website.

90


WARNING

● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.

● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and project itwith great force against the door, the roof orthe backrest.

● Never install a child seat facing backwardson the front passenger seat unless the frontpassenger front airbag has been disabled.Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child!However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca-ses, to transport a child in the front passen-ger seat, the front passenger front airbagmust always be disabled ››› page 89. If thepassenger seat has a height adjustment op-tion, move it to the highest, most upright po-sition. If you have a fixed seat, do not installany child restraint system in this location.

● For those vehicles that do not include a keylock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi-cle must be taken to a technical service. Donot forget to reconnect the airbag when anadult wants to sit in the front passenger seat.

● All vehicle occupants, especially children,must assume the proper sitting position andbe properly belted in while travelling.

● Never hold children or babies on your lap,this can result in potentially fatal injuries tothe child!

● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, or to

stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling.In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-juries to themselves and to the other vehicleoccupants.

● If children assume an improper sitting posi-tion when the vehicle is moving, they exposethemselves to greater risk of injury in theevent of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in anaccident. This is particularly important if thechild is travelling on the front passenger seatand the airbag system is triggered in an acci-dent; as this could cause serious injury oreven death.

● A suitable child seat can protect your child!

● Never leave a child alone in the child seator inside the vehicle because depending onthe season, very high temperatures may bereached inside a parked vehicle, which couldbe fatal.

● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries to theabdominal and neck areas during a suddenbraking manoeuvre or in an accident.

● Do not allow the seat belt to become twis-ted and the seat belt should be properly inplace ››› page 79.

● Only one child may occupy a child seat››› page 91, Child seats.

● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should be ac-tivated ››› page 134.

Child seats

Safety instructions


WARNING

When travelling, children must be secured inthe vehicle with a restraint system suitablefor age, weight and size.

● Read and always observe information andwarnings concerning the use of child seats››› page 90.

WARNING

The retaining rings are designed only for usewith “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system childseats.

● Never secure other child seats that do nothave the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, orretaining belts or objects to the fasteningrings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-ries to the child.

● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-curing rings.

WARNING

An undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash. »

91

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in theluggage compartment.

● Never secure or tie luggage or other itemsto the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upperones (Top Tether).

Categorisation of child seats intogroups

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

These seats are subject to the ECE-R 44 orECE-R 129 standard. ECE-R stands for: Eco-nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9months)

Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18months)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4years old)

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7years old)

Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7years old)

Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle withthe test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats fromthe Original Accessories Catalogue. Thesechild seats have been designed and testedfor use in SEAT vehicles. You can find theright child seat for your model and age groupat SEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval category

Child seats may have the approval categoryof universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

● Universal: Child seats with universal appro-val can be installed in all vehicles. There isno need to consult any list of models. In thecase of universal approval for ISOFIX, thechild seat is additionally provided with a TopTether belt.

● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, inaddition to the standard requirements of uni-

versal approval, requires safety devices tolock the child seat, which require additionaltesting. Child seats with semi-universal ap-proval include a list of vehicle models forwhich they can be installed.

● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approvalrequires a dynamic test of the child seat foreach vehicle model separately. Child seatswith vehicle-specific approval also include alist of vehicle models for which they can beinstalled.

● i-Size: Child seats with i-Size approval mustmeet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation andsafety. Child seat manufacturers can tell youwhich seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-cle.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-ment systems are used for safely installingchild seats.

Attachment systems overview

● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-ment system allowing quick and safe attach-ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-tachment establishes a rigid connection be-tween the child seat and the car body.

92


The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,called connectors. These connectors are fit-ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings foundbetween the seat cushion and the backrest ofthe vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIXattachment systems are used mainly in Eu-rope ››› page 26. If necessary, ISOFIX at-tachment may have to be supplemented witha Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

● Automatic three-point seat belt. Wheneverpossible, it is preferable to attach the childseats with the ISOFIX system rather than at-taching them with an automatic three-pointseat belt ››› page 25.

Additional attachment:

● Top Tether: The Top Tether belt is guidedover the back of the rear seat and attached toan anchor point with a hook. Anchor pointsare located at the back of the rear seat back-rest on the boot side ››› page 29. Therings for retaining the Top Tether belt aremarked with an anchor symbol.

● Support bracket: Some child seats rest onthe floor of the vehicle with a support brack-et. The support bracket prevents the childseat from tipping forward in the event of im-pact. Child seats fitted with a support bracketshould only be used in the passenger seatand side rear seats ››› . For the assembly ofthis type of seat you should also consult thelist of approved vehicles for this assembly,

available in the instructions for child restraintsystems.

Recommended systems for attaching childseats

SEAT recommends attaching child seats asfollows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppositedirection of travel: ISOFIX and support brack-et or iSize.

● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-FIX and Top Tether.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the support bracket cancause serious or fatal injury.

● Make sure the support bracket is correctlyand safely installed.

93

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Safety

Event Data Recorder

Description and operation

Your vehicle has an event data recorder(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to record data in theevent of a mild or serious accident. These da-ta are used to support the analysis of howdifferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-ing data and data from the restraint systems,such as:

● How different vehicle systems worked.

● Whether the driver and the occupants werewearing their seatbelts.

● How hard the acceleration or brake pedalwas pressed.

● Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are alsorecorded. This includes data such as whetherthe systems were inactive or active and ifsuch action had an impact on the vehicle’sdynamic behaviour, changing its path in theaforementioned situations, accelerating ordecelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-cludes data from systems such as:

● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

● Emergency brake assist system (Front As-sist).

● Park Pilot system

● Parking aid system (Park Assist).

● Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specific ac-cident situations. No data are recorded innormal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around thevehicle are recorded. Under no circumstancesare personal data such as name, age, or gen-der recorded. Nevertheless, third parties(such as criminal proceedings authorities)may relate the contents of the EDR data toother data sources and create a personal ref-erence in the context of an accident investi-gation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessaryto access (if legally permitted to do so) thevehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unlessthe owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lesseeor hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-relatedproducts, SEAT may use the EDR data for fieldresearch and in order to improve vehicle sys-tem quality. Any data used for the purposesof research will be treated anonymously (inother words, no reference will be made to thevehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

94

Self-help

Emergencies

Self-help

Vehicle tool kit, anti-puncture kit*

The tools and anti-puncture kit* are storedunder the floor panel in the luggage compart-ment.

To access the vehicle tools:

– Lift up the floor surface by the plastic han-dle until it is fastened to the tabs on bothsides.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the an-ti-puncture kit* is located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment.

The tool kit includes:

● Jack*

● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-er*/wheel bolt cap clip.

● Box spanner for wheel bolts*

● Towline anchorage

● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

● Towing bracket device

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional ex-tras.

Note

The jack does not generally require any main-tenance. If required, it should be greased us-ing universal type grease.

Tyre repair

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

Read the additional information carefully››› page 63

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob-jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressure about10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set ifthe vehicle is parked in a safe place, you arefamiliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:

● If the wheel rim has been damaged.

● In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F).

● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.

● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.

● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre at theroadside. Please observe the following rulesto minimise the risk of injury:

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.Park it at a safe distance from surroundingtraffic to fill the tyre.

● Ensure the ground on which you park is flatand solid.

● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the work area.

● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.

● Use the tyre mobility system only if you arefamiliar with the necessary procedures. Oth-erwise, you should seek professional assis-tance.

● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-rary emergency use only until you can reachthe nearest specialised workshop.

● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo-bility set as soon as possible. »

95

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

● The sealant is a health hazard and must becleaned immediately if it comes into contactwith the skin.

● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of thereach of small children.

● Never use an equivalent jack, even if it hasbeen approved for your vehicle.

● Always stop the engine, apply the hand-brake lever firmly and engage gear if using amanual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk ofvehicle involuntary movement.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.

● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking andfast cornering.

● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.


Dispose of used or expired sealant observingany legal requirements.

Note

A new bottle of sealant can be purchased atSEAT dealerships.

Note

Take into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur-er.

Contents of the tyre mobility system*

Fig. 97 Standard representation: contents ofthe anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 97:

Tyre valve remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed “max.80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”

Filler tube with cap

1

2

3

Air compressor

Tube for inflating tyres

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe compressor).

Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-sor may have a button).

ON/OFF switch

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at thelower end for a valve insert. The valve insertcan only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compressorand the inflator tube may become hot.

● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube orhot air compressor on flammable material.

● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.

● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

96

Self-help

CAUTION

Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over-heating! Before switching on the air compres-sor again, let it cool for several minutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 97 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:

● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealedsufficiently with the tyre mobility set.

● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:

● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.

● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshop with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious injury.

● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressureis 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.

● Seek specialist assistance.

Manual unlocking/locking

Introduction

Read the additional information carefully››› page 16, ››› page 17.

The doors, rear lid and panoramic tilting sun-roof can be locked manually and partiallyopened, for example if the key or the centrallocking is damaged.

WARNING

Opening and closing doors carelessly cancause serious injury.

● If the vehicle is locked from outside, thedoors and windows cannot be opened fromthe inside.

● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped in thecar in an emergency and will not be able toget themselves to safety.

● Depending on the time of the year, temper-atures inside a locked and closed vehicle canbe extremely high or extremely low resultingin serious injuries and illness or even death,particularly for young children.

WARNING

Getting in the way of the doors and the rearlid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-jury.

● Open and close the doors and the rear lidonly when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTION

When opening and closing in an emergency,carefully disassemble components and thenreassemble them carefully to avoid damageto the vehicle.

Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Changing the windscreen and rearwindow wiper blades


The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, thenoise of the water as it is wiped across thewindscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, »

97

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

they should be changed if they are damaged,or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

Damaged windscreen wiper blades should bereplaced immediately. These are availablefrom qualified workshops.

WARNING

Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades reducevisibility and increase the risk of accidentand serious injury.

● Always replace damaged or worn wind-screen wiper blades or blades that no longerclean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION

● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers couldscratch the glass.

● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.

● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows.

● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it mayhelp to leave the vehicle parked with the wip-ers in service position ››› page 71.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.

● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Tow-starting and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine ofthe vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling anotherthat is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relatingto tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehicle with adischarged battery is not allowed. The jumpstart should be used instead ››› page 69.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the batterycharge status, the drop in voltage may be solarge, even after just a few minutes, that noelectrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.

the hazard warning lights. In vehicles withthe Keyless Access system, the steeringwheel could lock ››› .

WARNING

A vehicle with no power should never be tow-ed.

● During towing, never switch off the ignitionwith the starter button. Otherwise, the elec-tronic lock of the steering column could sud-denly get blocked and it would be impossibleto steer the vehicle. This could cause an acci-dent, serious injury and loss of control of thevehicle.

● If during towing the vehicle runs out ofpower, stop towing immediately and requestthe assistance of specialist personnel.

WARNING

Vehicle handling and braking capacitychange considerably during towing. Pleaseobserve the following instructions to mini-mise the risk of serious accidents and injury:

● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:

– You should depress the brake much hard-er as the brake servo does not operate.Pay the utmost attention to avoid crash-ing into the towing vehicle.

– More strength is required at the steeringwheel as the power steering does not op-erate when the engine is switched off.

● As the driver of the towing vehicle:

98

Self-help

– Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion.

– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

– Brake earlier than usual and moresmoothly.

CAUTION

● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for examplethe paint, remove and replace the lid andtowing eye carefully.

● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic con-verter and damage it during towing.

Indications for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star-ted. The jump start should be used instead››› page 69.

For technical reasons, towing the followingvehicles is not allowed:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause in vehicles with the Keyless Accesslocking and ignition system the steering re-mains locked and the electronic parkingbrake cannot be deactivated nor can the elec-tronic lock of the steering column be re-leased if they are activated.

● If the battery is flat, it is possible that theengine control units may not operate correct-ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely betow-started (in the case of manual gearbox-es):

● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.

● Keep the clutch pressed down.

● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-ing lights.

● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.

● Once the engine starts, press the clutchand disengage the gear to avoid collidingwith the towing vehicle.

CAUTION

When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enterthe catalytic converter and damage it.

Note

The vehicle can only be tow-started if theelectronic parking brake and, if appropriate,the electronic lock of the steering column aredeactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup-ply or there is an electric system fault, theengine must be tow-started to deactivate theelectronic parking brake and the electroniclock of the steering column.

Indications for towing

Tow rope or tow bar

It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using atow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. Atow rope should only be used if a tow bar isnot available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoiddamage to both vehicles. It is advisable touse a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-ilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to thetowing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-ing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with atow bar if this has been specially designed tobe installed with a tow hitch ››› page 276.

When the vehicle needs to be towed:

Check whether the vehicle may be towed››› page 100, Cases where towing a vehicleis not allowed.


● Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-lector lever in the N ››› page 192 position.

● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed atspeeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).

● The vehicle must not be towed further than50 km (30 miles). »

99

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles withautomatic transmission are only allowed tobe towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive(4Drive)

Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can betowed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the ve-hicle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-pended, the engine must be switched off,otherwise the transmission may be damaged.

Cases where towing a vehicle is not allowed

● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-cant.

● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-propriate, the electronic parking brake can-not be deactivated or the electronic lock ofthe steering column released.

● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-elled.

● When, for example, after an accident, thesmooth rotation of the wheels or the steeringoperation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:

● Observe legal requirements.

● Keep in mind the instructions in the man-ual on towing vehicles.

Note

The vehicle can only be towed if the electron-ic parking brake and the electronic lock of thesteering column are deactivated. If the vehi-cle has no power supply or there is an electricsystem fault, the engine must be tow-started››› page 69 to deactivate the electronicparking brake and the electronic lock of thesteering column.

Fitting the front towing eye

Fig. 98 Front bumper on right: remove the lid.

Fig. 99 Front bumper on right: towline an-chorage screwed in.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on theright side of the front bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 98.

The towing eye should always be kept in thevehicle.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 99.

Fitting the towline anchorage

● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 95.

● Extract the lid for the towing eye using thevehicle key blade (if you do not have the spe-cific tool), pressing on the side and leveringgently from left to right.

● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-hicle.

100

Self-help

● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it to the maximum anticlock-wise ››› . Use a suitable object that cancompletely and securely tighten the towingeye in its housing.

● After towing, unscrew the towing eye clock-wise with a suitable object.

● Insert the side tab of the lid into the open-ing of the bumper and press until the tab isproperly clipped into the bumper.

● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION

The towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

Fitting the rear towing eye

Fig. 100 Rear bumper on right: remove thelid.

Fig. 101 Rear bumper on right: towline an-chorage screwed in.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on theright side of the rear bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 100. Vehicles equipped as standardwith a towing bracket do not have any hous-ing for the screw towing eye behind the lid. Inthis case, the tow hitch needs to be extracted

or installed and used for towing››› page 273, ››› .

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 99.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars without afactory-equipped towing bracket)

● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 95.

● Press the upper side of the lid ››› Fig. 100 tounclip it.

● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-hicle.

● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it to the maximum anticlockwise››› Fig. 101 ››› . Use a suitable object thatcan completely and securely tighten the tow-ing eye in its housing.

● After towing, unscrew the towing eye clock-wise with a suitable object.

● Insert the upper flange of the lid into theopening of the bumper and press the lowerside of the lid until the upper flange is inser-ted into the bumper.

● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools. »

101

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

CAUTION

● The towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with atowing bracket, it is only allowed to tow witha tow bar if this has been specially designedto be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuita-ble tow bar is used, both the tow hitch andthe vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a towrope should be used.

Driving tips for towing

Towing requires some expertise and experi-ence, especially when using a tow rope. Bothdrivers should be familiar with the difficultiesinvolved in towing. For this reason, inexper-ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that noimpermissible tractive forces or shocks aregenerated. When towing on an unpavedroad, there is always a risk of overloadingand damaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signalthe change of direction even with the hazardwarning lights turned on. To do so, at thesame time, the turn signal lever must be op-erated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile,the hazard warning lights will go off. Whenthe turn signal lever is returned to the rest

position, the hazard warning lights will beautomatically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle

● Leave the ignition on, so that the steeringis not blocked, and the electronic parkingbrake may be deactivated and the turn sig-nals and wash/wipe operated.

● More strength is required at the steeringwheel as the power steering does not oper-ate when the engine is switched off.

● You should depress the brake much harderas the brake servo does not operate. Avoidhitting the towing vehicle.

● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the vehicle to be tow-ed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

● Accelerate with particular care and caution.Avoid sharp manoeuvres.

● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.

● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system cangive serious electrical shocks, causing burnsand even death!

● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-tion system.

● Take care not to cause short circuits in theelectrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.

102

Fuses and bulbs

● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same amper-age (same colour and markings) and size.

● Never repair a fuse.

● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, stapleor similar.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electricsystem, before replacing a fuse always turnoff the ignition, the lights and all electricalelements and remove the key from the igni-tion.

● If you replace a fuse with higher-ratingfuse, you could cause damage to another partof the electrical system.

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as they candamage the electrical system.

Note

● One component may have more than onefuse.

● Several components may run on a singlefuse.

Vehicle interior fuses

Fig. 102 On the driver-side dash panel (left-hand drive): fuse box cover.

Fig. 103 Glove compartment (right-handdrive): Access to the fuse box.

Opening and closing the fuse box situatedbelow the dash panel (left-hand drive)

● Opening: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 102.

● Closing: push back the cover it in until itclicks into place.

Fuses behind the glove compartment (right-hand drive)

To be able to access the fuse box: »

103

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

● Undo the opening limiter ››› Fig. 103 A intwo steps: first, unlock the limiter by pullingback on it (arrow 1 ) and then move it gentlyto the right (arrow 2 ). Remove the guidewhen the cover is in the normal opening po-sition (30°).

● Free the side pivots B to release the coverto its second opening position (60°).

Follow the same procedure in reverse order toreturn the glove compartment to its normalposition.

CAUTION

● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-ers and refit them correctly to avoid problemswith your vehicle.

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoidthe entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid-ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage tothe electrical system.

Engine compartment fuses

Fig. 104 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover.

To open the engine compartment fuse box

● Open the bonnet ››› page 298.

● Press the locking tabs to release the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 104.

● Then lift the cover out.

● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

Fuse placement


Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

1 Adblue (SCR) 30

5 Gateway 5

6 Automatic gearbox lever 5

7Air conditioning and heating con-trol panel, back window heating,auxiliary heating.

10

8

Diagnosis, handbrake switch,light switch, reverse light, interiorlighting, driving mode, lit-up doorsill

10

9 Steering column 5

10 Radio display 7.5

11 Left lights 40

12 Radio 20

14 Air conditioner fan 40

15 Steering column release 10

16 Connectivity Box. 7.5

17 Instrument panel 7.5

18 Rear camera 7.5

19 Kessy 7.5

21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

22 Trailer 15

104

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps

23 Electric sunroof 30

24 Right lights 40

25 Left door 30

26 Heated seats 30

27 Interior light 30

28 Trailer 25

32Control unit for parking aid, frontcamera and radar

7.5/10

33 Airbag 5

34Reverse switch, climate sensor,electrochromic mirror, rear powersockets (USB)

7.5

35Diagnosis, headlight control unit,headlight adjuster

10

36 Right LED headlight 7.5

37 Left LED headlight 7.5

38 Trailer 25

39 Right door 30

40 12V socket 20

42 Central locking 40

43SEAT Sound, beats sound CANand MOST.

30

44 Trailer 15

No. Consumers/Amps

45 Electric driver's seat 15

47 Rear window wiper 15

49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 5

50 Electric rear lid 40

52 Driving mode. 15

53 Heated rear window 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

1 ESP control unit 25

2 ESP control unit 40

3Engine control unit (diesel/pet-rol)

30/15

4 Engine sensors 5/10

5 Engine sensors 7.5

6 Brake light sensor 5

7 Engine power supply 10

8 Lambda probe 10/15

9 Engine 5/10/20

10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20

11 PTC 40

12 PTC 40

No. Consumers/Amps

13 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

14 Heated windscreen 40

15 Horn 15

16 Petrol pump 5/15/20

17 Engine control unit 7.5

18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 5

19 Front windscreen washer 30

20 Alarm horn 10

22 Engine control unit 5

23 Starter motor 30

24 PTC 40

31 Pressure pump 15

33 Gearbox pump 30

37 Parking heating 20

Note

● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. These shouldonly be changed by a specialised workshop.

● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.

● Some of the equipment listed in the tablesbelow pertain only to certain versions of themodel or are optional extras. »

105

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

● Please note that the above lists, while cor-rect at the time of printing, are subject tochange.

Changing a bulb

Topic introduction


Changing bulbs requires a certain degree ofpractical skill.

If you choose to change the engine compart-ment lamps yourself, remember that it is adangerous area ››› in Working in the en-gine compartment on page 299.

Always use identical bulbs with the samedesignation. The name can be found on thebase of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,there are different sets of headlights and taillights:

● Halogen headlights.

● Full-LED main headlights*

● Rear bulb light

● LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*

Full-LED headlights handle all light functions(daylight, side light, turn signal, dippedbeam and route light) with light emitting di-odes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot bereplaced. In case of headlight failure, go toan authorised workshop to have it replaced.

WARNING

● Take particular care when working on com-ponents in the engine compartment if the en-gine is warm. Risk of burns.

● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. Theglass can break when you touch the bulb,causing injury.

● When changing bulbs, please take care notto injure yourself on sharp edges, in particu-lar on the headlight housing.

CAUTION

● Remove the ignition key before working onthe electric system. Otherwise, a short circuitcould occur.

● Switch off the lights and the parking lightbefore changing a bulb.

● Take good care to avoid damaging any com-ponents.


Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note

● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) onyour vehicle is functioning properly. This isnot only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.

● Before changing a bulb, make sure youhave the correct new bulb.

● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb withyour bare hands, use a cloth or paper towelinstead, since the fingerprints left on theglass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-erated by the bulb, they will be deposited onthe reflector and will impair its surface.

● Depending on the level of equipment fittedin the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part orall of the interior and/or exterior lighting.LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds thanthat of the car. If an LED light fails, go to anauthorised workshop for its replacement.

106

Fuses and bulbs

Change the front bulbs

Dipped beam headlight

Fig. 105 In the engine compartment: removethe lid.

Fig. 106 In the engine compartment: dippedbeam headlight.

Follow the steps indicated:

Raise the bonnet.1.

Move the loops ››› Fig. 105 1 in the di-rection of the arrow and remove the cov-er.

Remove connector ››› Fig. 106 2 fromthe bulb.

Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 106 3

pressing clockwise and inwards.

Extract the bulb and fit the replacementso that the lug on the base fits into therecess on the reflector.

Installation involves all of the abovesteps in reverse sequence.

Main beam headlight bulb and turnsignal bulb

Fig. 107 In the engine compartment: removethe lid.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Fig. 108 In the engine compartment: mainbeam headlight bulb 2 and turn signal bulb

3 .


Main beam headlight bulb

Raise the bonnet.

Move the loop ››› Fig. 107 1 in the di-rection of the arrow and remove the cov-er.

Slide connector ››› Fig. 108 2 to the leftor right and pull.

Remove the bulb by disconnecting theconnector.

Installation involves all of the abovesteps in reverse sequence. »

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

107

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Turn signal bulb

Raise the bonnet.

Move the loop ››› Fig. 107 1 in the di-rection of the arrow and remove the cov-er.

Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 108 3 anti-clockwise and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on thebulb holder and turning it anticlockwiseat the same time.


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Front fog light bulb*

Fig. 109 Fog light: extracting the grille.

Fig. 110 Fog light: remove the bulb holder


Remove the screw ››› Fig. 109 1 fromthe fog light grille using a screwdriverand extract the grille.

Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 109 2 .

Remove the metal clip situated on theupper part of the fog light by pullingaway from the vehicle 3 and extractthe fog light.

Remove connector ››› Fig. 110 1 fromthe bulb.

Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 110 2 anti-clockwise and pull.

Remove the bulb by pressing on thebulb holder and turning it anticlockwiseat the same time.


Check that the bulb works properly.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

108

Fuses and bulbs

Note

Due to the difficulty of accessing fog lightbulbs, have them replaced at a TechnicalService or specialised workshop.

Change the rear bulbs

Overview of tail lights

Tail lights on side panel

Turn signal PY21W NA LL

Side light and brake light P21W LL

Tail lights on the rear lid

Left side

Side lights P21W LL

Fog light/side light P21W LL

Reverse light W16W

Right side

Side lights 2 x P21W LL

Reverse light W16W

The table corresponds to a right-hand trafficvehicle. The position of lights may vary ac-cording to the country.

Rear bulbs (in the side panel)

Fig. 111 Luggage compartment: access to thebolt securing the tail light unit.

Fig. 112 Retaining tabs on reverse side of taillight.


Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Open the rear lid.

1.

2.

Remove the lid, levering it with the flatside of a screwdriver into the recess››› Fig. 111 1 .

Remove the bulb connector.

Unscrew the light securing bolt by handor using a screwdriver ››› Fig. 111 2 .

Remove the light from the body, gentlypulling it toward you, and place on aclean, smooth surface.

Disassemble the bulb holder unlockingthe securing tabs ››› Fig. 112 1 .

Change the damaged bulb.

To refit follow the steps in reverse order,taking special care when fitting the bulbholder. The securing tabs must click intoplace.

CAUTION

Take care when removing the rear light unit tomake sure there is no damage to the paint-work or any of its components.

Note

● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready toplace under the glass on the rear light unit, toavoid any scratches.

● In the case of LED lights, change only theturn signal bulb.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

109

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Emergencies

Rear lights (in the rear lid)

Fig. 113 Rear lid open: remove the lid.

Fig. 114 Remove the bulb holder.

The rear lid must be open to change thebulbs.


Remove the rear lid cover in the direc-tion indicated ››› Fig. 113.

1.

Unlock the securing tabs from the bulbholder ››› Fig. 114 1 or turn the bulbholder to the left 2 and 3 .

Remove the bulb holder from its loca-tion.

Lightly press the defective bulb into thebulb holder, then turn it to the left andremove it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into thebulb holder and turn it to the right as faras it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprintsfrom the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Carry out the same actions in reverse or-der for assembly and pay special atten-tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuringthat the tabs are properly secured.

Note

For LED pilots, you can only change the re-verse bulb.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Changing number plate light bulbs

Fig. 115 In the rear bumper: number platelight.

Fig. 116 Number plate light: Remove the bulbholder.


Press the number plate light in the direc-tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 115.

Remove the number plate light.

1.

2.

110

Fuses and bulbs

Turn the connector lock ››› Fig. 116 in thedirection of arrow 1 and pull on theconnector.

Rotate the bulb holder in the direction ofarrow 2 and extract it with the bulb.

Replace the defective bulb with a newbulb with the same features.

Insert the bulb holder in the numberplate light and turn in the opposite di-rection of arrow 2 until it stops.

Plug the connector into the bulb holder.

Note

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDshave an estimated life that exceeds than thatof the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to anauthorised workshop for replacement.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Side turn signals

Fig. 117 Turn signal integrated in the rearview mirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-grated in the exterior mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work-shop to have them replaced.

111

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Fig. 118 Instruments and controls.

112

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

General instrument panel

Door release lever

Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Control for the electric adjustmentof the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Control lever for:

– Turn signals and main beamheadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

– Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

– Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 212

Depending on equipment fitted:

– Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 212

Steering wheel with horn and

– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

– On-board computer controls . . . . 36

– Controls for radio, telephone,navigation and speech dialoguesystem ››› Booklet Radio

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 195

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Control lever for:

– Windscreen wipers and washer . . 153

– Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . 153

– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Depending on equipment fitted: ra-dio or display for Easy Connect(navigation, radio, TV/video) . . . . . . 120

Depending on the equipment, but-tons for:

– Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

– Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . 149

– Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

– Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Depending on the equipment,glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 161

– CD player* and/or SD card*››› Booklet Radio

Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Front passenger airbag switch . . . . 88

Passenger seat heating control . . . . 158

Depending on the equipment, con-trols for:

– Heating and ventilation system ormanual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .54, 53

– Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . 51

Depending on the equipment:

– USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

– Lighter/power socket . . . . . . . . . . . 162

– Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

– Storage compartment

Gear lever for:

– Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

– Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Rotating control(Driving Experiencebutton) for driving modes . . . . . . . . . 242

Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Electronic parking brake switch . . . 186

Starter button (Keyless Access lock-ing and ignition system) . . . . . . . . . . 183

Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . 158

Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Steering column adjustment lev-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Note

● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-tion is only fitted on certain models or are op-tional extras. »

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

113

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● A separate Instructions Manual is enclosedif the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fittedradio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi-gation system.

● The arrangement of switches and controlson right-hand drive models* may be slightlydifferent from the layout shown in

››› page 112. However, the symbols used toidentify the controls are the same.

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 119 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 119: Rev counter (with the engine running, inhundreds of revolutions per minute).

1 The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed inany gear after running-in and with the

114


engine hot. However, it is advisable tochange up a gear or move the selectorlever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler-ator) before the needle reaches the redzone ››› .

Engine coolant temperature display››› page 117.

Displays on the screen ››› page 115.

Adjuster button and display››› page 117.

Speedometer.

Fuel gauge ››› page 118.

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury.

● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in the redzone for a short period of time.

● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not make theengine work hard.


Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel con-sumption and noise.

2

3

4

5

6

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 119 1 .

Together with the gear-change indicator, therev counter offers you the possibility of usingthe engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The start of the red zone on the dial indicatesthe maximum engine speed which may beused briefly when the engine is warm and af-ter it has been run in properly. Before reach-ing this range, you should change to a highergear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or forautomatic gearboxes put the selector lever in“D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped-al.

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the additionalinformation in ››› page 41, Gear-changeindicator.

CAUTION

Never allow the rev counter needle 1

››› Fig. 119 to go into the red zone on thescale for more than a very brief period, other-wise there is a risk of engine damage.


Changing up a gear early will help you to savefuel and minimise emissions and enginenoise.

Indications on the display

A variety of information can be viewed on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 119 3 , de-pending on the vehicle equipment:

● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open››› page 40.

● Warning and information messages››› page 40.

● Distance travelled ››› page 117.

● Time ››› page 116.

● Navigation instructions.

● Outside temperature ››› page 41.

● Compass ››› page 116.

● Shift lever position ››› page 193.

● Recommended gear (manual gearbox)››› page 41.

● Multifunction display (MFD) and menuswith different setting options ››› page 36.

● Service interval display ››› page 43.

● Second speed display ››› page 116.

● Speed warning function ››› page 42. »

115

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Start-Stop system status display››› page 208.

● Active cylinder management display(ACT®)* ››› page 202

● Signs recognised by the traffic signal de-tection system ››› page 245

● Low consumption driving status (ECO)››› page 116

● Engine code (MKB) ››› page 117.

Distance travelled

The odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distancetravelled since the last odometer reset. Thelast digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.

● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 119 4 to re-set the trip recorder to 0.

● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3seconds and the previous value will be dis-played.

Time

● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 1194 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select

the hour or minute display.

● To continue setting the time, press the up-per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but-

ton down to scroll through the numbersquickly.

● Press the button 4 again in order to finishsetting the time.

The time can also be set on the Easy Connectsystem using the button and the functionbutton SETTINGS > Date and time››› page 33.

Compass

With the ignition on and the navigation sys-tem on, the cardinal point corresponding tothe direction of travel of the vehicle is dis-played on the instrument panel.

Selector lever position

The selected gear is displayed on the side ofthe selector lever and on the instrument pan-el display. In positions D and S, and with theTiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis-played.

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

The recommended gear in order to save fuelis displayed on the instrument panel whileyou are driving ››› page 41.

Second speed display (mph or km/h)

In addition to the speedometer, the speedcan also be displayed in a different unit ofmeasurement (in miles or in km per hour).

This option cannot be deactivated in modelsdestined for countries in which the secondspeed must always be visible.

The second speed display can be adjusted inthe Easy Connect system by means of the button and the function button SETTINGS >Units ››› page 33.

Speed warning

When the speed setting is exceeded, this willbe indicated on the instrument panel display.This is very useful, for example when usingwinter tyres that are not designed for drivingat the maximum speed of the vehicle››› page 42.

The speed warning settings can be adjustedin the Easy Connect system by means of the button and the function button SET-TINGS > Driver Assistance››› page 33.

Start-Stop operating display

Updated information relating to the status isdisplayed on the instrument panel››› page 208.

Low consumption driving status (ECO)*

Depending on the equipment, when driving,the “ECO” display appears on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is in low consump-tion status due to active cylinder manage-ment (ACT®)* ››› page 202.

116


Identifying letters on engine (MKB)

Hold the button ››› Fig. 119 4 down for morethan 15 seconds to display the identifyingletters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To dothis, the ignition must be switched on andthe engine switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warningand control lamps on page 119.

WARNING

Even though outside temperatures are abovefreezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.

● At outside temperatures above +4°C(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal” symbolis not visible, there may still be patches of iceon the road.

● The outside temperature sensor takes aguideline measurement.

Note

● Different versions of the instrument panelare available and therefore the versions andinstructions on the display may vary. In thecase of displays without warning or informa-tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively bythe warning lamps.

● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can also be carried outin the Easy Connect system.

● When several warnings are active at thesame time, the symbols are shown succes-sively for a few seconds and will stay on untilthe fault is rectified.

Odometer

Fig. 120 Instrument panel: odometer and re-set button.

The distance covered is displayed in “kilome-tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to changethe measurement units (kilometres“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*.Please refer to the Easy Connect* InstructionsManual for more details.

Odometer/trip recorder

The odometer shows the total distance cov-ered by the vehicle.

The trip recorder shows the distance that hasbeen travelled since it was last reset. It is

used to measure short trips. The last digit ofthe trip recorder indicates distances of 100metres or tenths of a mile.

The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-ing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 120.

Fault display

If there is a fault in the instrument panel, theletters DEF will appear in the trip recorderdisplay. Have the fault repaired immediately,as far as is possible.

Coolant temperature gauge

Fig. 121 Instrument panel: coolant tempera-ture gauge

For vehicles with no coolant temperaturegauge, a control lamp appears for highcoolant temperatures ››› page 302. Pleasenote ››› . »

117

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

The coolant temperature gauge only workswhen the ignition is switched on ››› Fig. 121.In order to avoid engine damage, please readthe following notes for the different tempera-ture ranges.

Engine cold

If only the diodes in the lower part of thescale light up, this indicates that the enginehas not yet reached operating temperature.Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration anddo not make the engine work hard.

Normal temperature

If in normal operations, the diodes light upuntil the central zone, it means that the en-gine has reached operating temperature. Athigh outside temperatures and when makingthe engine work hard, the diodes may contin-ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. Thisis no cause for concern, provided the controllamp does not light up on the instrumentpanel digital display.

Heat range

When the diodes light up in the upper area ofthe display and the control lamp appears on the instrument panel display, the coolanttemperature is excessive ››› page 302.

CAUTION

● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warm al-so depends on the outside temperature. Ifnecessary, use the engine oil temperature*››› page 42 as a guide.

● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling effectof the coolant. At high outside temperaturesand high engine loads, there is a risk of theengine overheating.

● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri-bution of the cooling air when the vehicle ismoving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re-duce the cooling effect, which could causethe engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Fuel level

Fig. 122 Fuel gauge.

The display ››› Fig. 122 only works when theignition is switched on. When the display rea-ches the reserve mark, the lower diode lightsup in red and the control lamp appears››› page 114. When the fuel level is very low,the lower diode flashes in red.

The distance to empty fuel level is displayedon the instrument panel 3 ››› Fig. 119.

The capacity of the fuel tank of your vehicle isgiven in the Technical data section››› page 56.

CAUTION

Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir-regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. Inthis way the unburned fuel can reach the ex-haust system, which could cause the catalyticconverter to overheat resulting in damage.

118


Control lamps

Warning and control lamps


The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func-tions. Some control and warning lamps comeon when the ignition is switched on, andswitch off when the engine starts running, orwhile driving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrumentpanel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 114, Instruments.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or maycause accidents and severe injuries.

● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-sure that there are no highly flammable ma-terials under the vehicle that could come intocontact with the exhaust system (e.g. drygrass, fuel).

● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users. Ifnecessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle to ad-vise other drivers.

● Before opening the bonnet, switch off theengine and allow it to cool.

● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is ahazardous area and could cause severe inju-ries ››› page 298.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and textmessages when they appear may result infaults in the vehicle.

119

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Introduction to the EasyConnect system*

System settings (CAR)*

CAR menu


To select the settings menus, press the EasyConnect button and the SETTINGS func-tion button.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options in these me-nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronicsand equipment.

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing those me-nus.

Function buttons in thevehicle settingsmenu

Page

ESC system ››› page 189

Tyres ››› page 311

Function buttons in thevehicle settingsmenu

Page

Driver assistance ››› table on page 33

Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 262

Vehicle lights ››› table on page 33

Mirrors and windscreen wipers ››› table on page 33

Opening and closing ››› table on page 33

Multifunction display ››› table on page 33

Date and time ››› table on page 33

Units ››› table on page 33

Service ››› page 115

Factory settings ››› table on page 33

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, withthe risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connectsystem while driving could distract you fromtraffic.

120

Communications and multimedia


Controls on the steering wheel*

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 123 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigationfunctions without needing to distract thedriver.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

A

Turn

Turn volume up/down. You donot need to be in audio mode(radio).

Turn volume up/down. You donot need to be in audio mode(media).

Turn volume up/down. You donot need to be in audio mode(media).

Turn volume up/down. You donot need to be in telephonemode.

Turn announcement volumeup/down. You do not need tobe in navigation mode butthere has to be an announce-ment active when you adjustthe volume.

A

PressMute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.

Mute the current navigation an-nouncement.

B a)Activate/deactivate voice control.This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). When the system is in telephone mode this button’s functionis deactivated during the ongoing call, and without Radio/Media functionality (except AUX). »

121

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

C / DSearch for the previous/nextstationb).

Short press: Switch to the pre-vious/next song. Hold down: Fast rewind/for-wardc).

No function

– There is no active call: Ra-dio/Media functionality (ex-cept AUX) – Active call: no function

No function for the othermodes (navigation, assistants,vehicle status, travel data).

E / F a) Change instrument panel menu.This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

GColoured instrument panel: switch to the previous menu.Monochrome instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

H

Turn

Coloured instrument panel: Listof stations available (only ifthe instrument panel is in au-dio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:next track (only if the instru-ment panel is in audio menu).

No function

– There is no active call: List oflatest calls. – Active call: access the calloptions list (call on hold, hangup, mute microphone, privatenumber, etc.).

– Active route: access the viewto halt guidance to destination. – No active route: list of recentdestinations.

H

PressActs on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

122


Multimedia

USB/AUX-INPort

Fig. 124 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Fig. 125 Centre console, rear section: USBconnectors.

Depending on the special characteristics andthe country, the vehicle may have aUSB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in thestorage compartment area of the centre con-sole ››› Fig. 124.

The operating description is located in the re-spective Instruction Manuals of the audiosystem or the navigation system.

Depending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear of theconsole, between the front seats ››› Fig. 125.

Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger*

Fig. 126 Related video

Fig. 127 Centre console: Connectivity Box.

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have one of these two op-tions: Connectivity Box or Wireless Charger.

With the Connectivity Box you can chargeyour mobile device wirelessly with Qi1) tech-nology, while also reducing the radiation inthe vehicle and getting better reception.

With the Wireless Charger you only have thewireless charging function if your mobile de-vice has Qi technology.

The Connectivity Box/Wireless Charger is inthe storage compartment area of the centreconsole ››› Fig. 127.

The operating description is located in the re-spective Instruction Manuals of the audiosystem or the navigation system. »

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobilephone wirelessly.

123

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

Your mobile device must support the Qi wire-less inductive charging interface standard forproper operation.

124

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Central locking

Description


The vehicle can be locked and unlocked viathe central locking system. There are severalmethods, depending on the vehicle equip-ment:

● key with remote control ››› page 127,

● lock on driver door (emergency opening››› page 15) or

● interior central locking switch ››› page 128.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle only

When you lock the vehicle with the key, thedoors and the rear lid are locked. When youopen the door, you can either unlock only thedriver door, or all the vehicle doors. To selectthe required option, use Easy Connect*››› page 128.

Auto Lock*

The Auto Lock function locks the doors andthe rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speedof about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehiclecan also be unlocked via the central lockingswitch or by pulling one of the inside doorhandles. The Auto Lock function can beswitched on and off on the sound system oron the Easy Connect* system ››› page 128.

In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Anti-theft alarm system*

If the anti-theft alarm system senses interfer-ence with the vehicle it triggers an audibleand visible alarm.

The anti-theft alarm system is automaticallyswitched on when locking the vehicle. Itswitches off when the vehicle is unlockedfrom a distance.

When the driver door is unlocked with thekey, you should switch on the ignition within15 seconds. Otherwise the alarm will be trig-gered. On some export versions, the alarm istriggered immediately when you open a door.

To deactivate the alarm, press the buttonon the remote control key, or switch on theignition. After a certain time, the alarm willautomatically switch off.

Switch off the vehicle interior monitoring andtow-away protection if you wish to prevent

the alarm from being triggered accidentally››› page 136.

Turn signals

The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicleis locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one ofthe doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is notclosed correctly.

Accidental lock-out

The central locking system prevents you frombeing locked out of the vehicle in the follow-ing situations:

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-not be locked with the central locking switch››› page 128.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,when all the doors and the rear lid have beenclosed. This prevents the accidental lockingof the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) inthe vehicle if it is locked from the outside andthe anti-theft security system* is enabled, asthe doors and windows cannot then beopened from the inside. Locked doors coulddelay assistance in an emergency, potentiallyputting lives at risk. »

125

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

● Never leave any valuable items in the vehi-cle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not asafe.

● If the diode on the driver door sill lights upfor about 30 seconds when the vehicle islocked, the central locking system or anti-theft alarm* is not working properly. Youshould have the fault repaired at a SEAT Offi-cial Service or specialised workshop.

● The vehicle interior monitoring of the anti-theft alarm* system will only function as in-tended if the windows and the sunroof* areclosed.

Car key

Fig. 128 Vehicle key

Fig. 129 Vehicle key with alarm button.

Vehicle key

With the vehicle key the vehicle may belocked or unlocked remotely ››› page 125.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-cle. The range of the vehicle key with remotecontrol and new battery is several metresaround the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehi-cle using the remote control key, this shouldbe re-synchronised ››› page 134 or the bat-tery changed ››› page 133.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Control lamp on the vehicle key

When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 128 (arrow)once briefly, but if the button is held down for

a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-eral times, such as in convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not lightup when the button is pressed, replace thekey's battery ››› page 133.

Unfolding and folding the key shaft

Press button 1 ››› Fig. 128 or ››› Fig. 129 tounlock and unfold the key shaft.

To fold the shaft away, press button 1 andfold the key shaft in until it locks in place.

Alarm button*

Only press alarm button 2 in the event of anemergency! When the alarm button is press-ed, the vehicle horn is heard and the turn sig-nals are switched on for a short time. Whenthe alarm button is pressed again, the alarmis switched off.

Spare key

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip whichmust be coded with the data from the vehicleelectronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will notwork if it does not contain a microchip or themicrochip has not been encoded. This is alsotrue for keys which are specially cut for thevehicle.

126

Opening and closing

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-cialised workshop or an approved key servicequalified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchron-ised before use ››› page 134.

CAUTION

All of the vehicle keys contain electronic com-ponents. Protect them from damage, impactsand humidity.

Note

● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing the but-ton unnecessarily could accidentally unlockthe vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos-sible even when you are outside the radius ofaction.

● Key operation can be greatly influenced byoverlapping radio signals close to the vehicleworking in the same range of frequencies, forexample, radio transmitters or mobile tele-phones.

● Obstacles between the remote control andthe vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis-charged batteries can considerably reducethe range of the remote control.

● If the buttons of the vehicle key are press-ed ››› Fig. 128 or ››› Fig. 129 or one of the cen-tral locking buttons ››› page 128 is pressedrepeatedly in short succession, the centrallocking briefly disconnects as protection

against overloading. The vehicle is then un-locked. Lock it if necessary.

Unlocking/Locking by remote control


The vehicle will be locked again automatical-ly if you do not open one of the doors or therear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking thecar. This function prevents the vehicle fromremaining unlocked if the unlocking button ispressed by mistake. This does not apply ifyou press the button for at least one sec-ond.

In vehicles with a security central lockingfeature (selective unlocking of side doors)››› page 127, when the button is pressedonce, only the driver door and the fuel tankflap are unlocked. When the button is press-ed a second time, all the vehicle doors areunlocked.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip-tion on page 125.

Note

● Do not use the remote control key until thevehicle is visible.

● Other functions of the remote control key››› page 140, Convenience opening and clos-ing.

Selective unlocking system

The selective unlocking system allows you toonly unlock the driver door and the fuel tankflap. All other doors and the rear lid remainlocked.

Unlocking the driver door and tank flap

– Press (once) the button on the remotecontrol key or turn the key once in theopening direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and thetank flap simultaneously.

– Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-ton on the remote control key, or turn thekey twice within 5 seconds in the openingdirection.

The anti-theft security system* and the anti-theft alarm* are immediately disabled if youunlock only the driver door, without unlock-ing the other doors.

In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-gramme the security central locking systemdirectly ››› page 128.

127

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Adjusting the central locking

You can use Easy Connect* to select whichdoors are unlocked with the central lockingsystem. Using the radio or the Easy Connect*system, you can select whether the vehicleautomatically closes with the “Auto Lock”programme at speeds of more than 15 km/h(9 mph).

Programming the unlocking of the doors (ve-hicles with Easy Connect)

– Select: button > SETTINGS functionbutton > Opening and closing > Cen-tral locking > Unlocking doors.

Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles withradio)

– Select: SETUP button > control button Central locking > Locking whiledriving.

Programming the Auto Lock (vehicles withEasy Connect)

– Select: button > SETTINGS functionbutton > Opening and closing > Cen-tral locking > Locking whiledriving.

Unlocking doors

You can choose to unlock all the doors oronly the driver door when you unlock the

vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flapis also unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once, on-ly the driver door is unlocked. If that button ispressed twice, the rest of the doors and therear lid will be unlocked.

In vehicles with a conventional key, turn thekey in the door lock, in the direction of open-ing, twice within 2 seconds.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicledoors are locked. At the same time, a confir-mation signal* is heard.

Auto Lock while driving

If you select on, all the vehicle doors arelocked at speeds above 15 km/h (9 mph).

Central locking switch


Please note the following when using thecentral locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● It is not possible to open the doors or therear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).

● The LED in the central locking switch lightsup when all the doors are closed and locked.

● You can open the doors individually fromthe inside by pulling the inside door handle.

● In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, doors locked from the inside willbe automatically unlocked to facilitate accessand assistance.

WARNING

● The central locking switch also operateswhen the ignition is switched off and auto-matically locks all the vehicle doors when the button is pressed.

● The central locking switch does not operateif the vehicle is locked from the outside andthe anti-theft security system is switched on.

● Locked doors could delay assistance in anemergency, potentially putting lives at risk.Do not leave anyone, especially children, inthe vehicle.

Note

Your vehicle will lock automatically when itreaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)(Auto Lock) ››› page 125. You can unlock thevehicle again using the button on the cen-tral locking switch.

128

Opening and closing

Related video Keyless Access

Fig. 130 Handsfree

Unlocking and locking the vehiclewith Keyless Access*

Fig. 131 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: In the proximity of the car. Opening the rear lid with sensor-controlledopening (Easy Open)

Fig. 132 Keyless Access locking and ignitionsystem: sensor surface A for unlocking in-side the door handle and sensor surface B

for locking on the exterior of the handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. To do this, allthat is required is to have a valid vehicle keyin the detection area where you are attempt-ing to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 131 and totouch one of the sensor surfaces on the doorhandles ››› Fig. 132 or operate the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid››› page 137 ››› .

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked viathe front doors only. When doing so, the re-mote control key must be no further than ap-prox. 1.5 m from the door handle. »

129

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

It does not matter where you carry the key, forinstance whether it is in your jacket pocket orin a briefcase.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-not be opened again immediately. This willenable you to check that the doors are prop-erly closed.

If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlockonly the corresponding door or the entire ve-hicle. The necessary adjustments can be per-formed in vehicles with a driver informationsystem ››› page 33.

General information

If a valid key is in the proximity of the car,››› Fig. 131 the Keyless Access locking andstarting system gives the key entry as soonas one of the sensor surfaces on the doorhandles is touched or the softtouch/handleon the rear lid is operated. The following fea-tures are then available without having touse the vehicle key actively:

● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle usingthe handles of the front doors or the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid.

● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using thesensor of the driver or passenger door han-dle.

● Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving onefoot below the rear bumper.

● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en-gine with the starter button ››› page 181.

The central locking and locking systems oper-ate in the same way as a normal locking andunlocking system. Only the controls change.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; lockingby a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors andthe rear lid are closed leaving the last keyused inside the vehicle and none outside,the vehicle will not lock immediately. All thevehicle's indicator lights will flash four times.The vehicle will lock after a few seconds ifyou do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to openany door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless-Entry)

● Grip one of the front door handles. In doingthis, the sensor surface ››› Fig. 132 A (arrow)on the handle is touched and the vehicle un-locks.

● Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-tainment system configuration, pulling thedoor handle twice will unlock all doors.

On vehicles without a “Safe” security sys-tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex-it)


● Close the driver's door.

● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B

(arrow) on one of the front door handles. Thedoor that is used must be closed.

On vehicles with a “Safe” security system:shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit)


● Close the driver's door.

● Touch (once) the sensor surface B (arrow)on one of the front door handles. The vehiclelocks with the “Safe” ››› page 133 system.The door that is used must be closed.

● Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow)of one of the front door handles to lock thevehicle without activating the “Safe” securitysystem ››› page 133.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatch

When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 131 .

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. Ifthe complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lidwill not lock automatically after closing it.

130

Opening and closing

Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-ing/closing (Easy Open)

If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity››› Fig. 131 of the rear lid, it is possible tounlock and open or close it moving one footin the area of the sensors ››› Fig. 131 loca-ted under the rear bumper.


● Stand in front of the rear bumper, in themiddle.

● With a brisk movement, bring your foot andlower leg as close as you can to the bumper.The lower part of the leg needs to be close tothe upper sensor area and your foot to thelower sensor area ››› Fig. 131 1 .

● Quickly remove your foot and lower legfrom the sensor areas ››› Fig. 131 2 . Therear lid will be automatically opened.

● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro-cedure after a few seconds.

The third brake light flashes once to show theboot has opened with the Easy Open func-tion.

The rear lid can be closed with another footmovement similar to the opening one (provi-ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity ofthe rear lid).

When closed, the rear lid automatically locksif the vehicle has been locked beforehandand there is no valid key inside.

While the rear lid is in motion (either openingor closing), it can be stopped with anotherfoot movement similar to the opening one(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proxim-ity of the rear lid).

The Easy Open feature is not available or onlyhas limited availability in the following situa-tions (examples):

● If the rear bumper is very dirty.

● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water,e.g. after having driven on gritted roads.

● If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is notcovered.

● If the vehicle has been equipped at a latertime with a tow bracket.

In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea-ture may take a little longer to open the bootor may deactivate automatically, to avoid theboot opening by accident, e.g. because ofthe running water.

The Easy Open function can be connectedand disconnected permanently in the info-tainment system by pressing the buttonand the SETTINGS and the Opening and closing

function buttons ››› page 33.

What happens when locking the vehicle witha second key

If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a secondvehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is

blocked for engine ignition ››› page 181. Inorder to enable engine ignition, the buttonon the key inside the vehicle needs to bepressed.

Automatically disabling sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensors onthe passenger doors are automatically disa-bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles is often activated in an unusual mannerwith the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branchesof a bush rubbing against it), all proximitysensors are disabled for a certain period oftime.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.

● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the button on the key.

● OR: if the boot is opened.

● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually withthe key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnectionfunction*

You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac-cess unlocking for a locking and unlockingcycle. »

131

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-wise the vehicle cannot be locked.

● Close the door.

● Push the central locking button on theremote control and touch the locking sensorsurface ››› Fig. 132 B on the driver door han-dle once within the following 5 seconds. Donot grip the door handle, otherwise the vehi-cle will not lock. Deactivation is also possibleif the vehicle is locked through the driver’sdoor lock.

● To check that the function has been deacti-vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pullon the door handle. The door should notopen.

The next time the door can only be unlockedvia the remote control or the lock cylinder.The next time the door is locked/unlocked,Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functions

To close all the electric windows using theconvenience function, keep a finger on thelocking sensor surface B (arrow) of the doorhandle for a few seconds until the windowshave closed.

The doors opened by touching the sensorsurface of the door handle depend on thesettings that have been activated in the info-tainment system with the button and the

SETTINGS and Opening and closing function but-tons.

WARNING

If there is a valid key in the proximity of therear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-tion may be accidentally activated and therear lid will open, for example, when sweep-ing under the rear bumper, when directing awater jet or high pressure steam to the areaor when carrying out maintenance work or re-pairs in that area. If accidentally opened, therear lid could injure somebody situated in itsarea of operation or cause material damage.

● Therefore, always make sure that there isno unsupervised valid key in the area nearthe rear lid.

● Before carrying out any maintenance or re-pair work on the vehicle, always disable theEasy Open feature via the infotainment sys-tem.

● Before washing the vehicle, always disablethe Easy Open feature via the infotainmentsystem.

● Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trailer,››› page 273, always disable the Easy Openfeature via the infotainment system.

CAUTION

The sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehicle keyin the proximity. If at least one of the electric

windows is open and the sensor surface B

(arrow) on one of the handles is activatedcontinuously, all windows will close.

Note

● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge,or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire-ly out of charge, you will probably not be ableto lock or unlock the vehicle with the KeylessAccess system. The vehicle can be unlockedor locked manually ››› page 97.

● To control the proper locking of the vehicle,the release function is disabled for approx. 2seconds.

● If the message Keyless access systemfaulty is displayed on the screen of thedash panel, abnormalities may occur in theoperation of the Keyless Access system. Con-tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

● Depending on the function set on the info-tainment system for the mirrors, the exteriormirrors will unfold and the surround lightingwill come on when unlocking the vehicle us-ing the sensor surface on the driver and pas-senger door handles ››› page 155.

● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle orthe system fails to detect one, a warning willdisplay on the dash panel screen. This couldhappen if any other radio frequency signal in-terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo-bile device accessory) or if the key is coveredby another object (e.g. an aluminium case).

132

Opening and closing

● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay-er of salt, the correct functioning of the sen-sors on the door handles may be affected. Inthis case, clean the vehicle.

● If the vehicle is equipped with an automaticgearbox, it may only be locked in the gearstick is in position P.

Anti-theft security system (Safelock)*

The following message is displayed on the in-strument panel to remind the driver thatwhen the vehicle is closed from the outside,the anti-theft security system is switched on. Do not forget the Safelock.Please see Instruction Manual. Thevehicle cannot be opened from inside. Thismakes it more difficult for unauthorised per-sons to break into the vehicle ››› in De-scription on page 125.

The anti-theft security system can be switch-ed off each time the vehicle is locked:

● Turn the key a second time to the lock posi-tion, in the door lock, within two seconds. Ifnecessary, remove the protective cover onthe driver door handle ››› page 15 or

● Press the button on the remote controlkey for a second time within 2 seconds.

The flashing frequency of the diode in thedoor sill immediately confirms the process.

Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequencefor a brief period, then it stops for approxi-mately 30 seconds and, lastly continuesflashing slowly.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 133 Vehicle key: opening the batterycompartment.

Fig. 134 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 126.

● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-hicle key ››› Fig. 133 in the direction of the ar-row ››› .

● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 134.

● Place the new battery in the compartmentas shown ››› Fig. 134, pressing in the oppo-site direction to that shown by the arrow››› .

● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 133, pressingit onto the vehicle key casing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow until itclicks into place.

CAUTION

● If the battery is not changed correctly, thevehicle key may be damaged.

● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.

● When fitting the battery, check that the po-larity is correct. »

133

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation


Please dispose of your used batteries correct-ly and with respect for the environment.

Synchronising the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-synchronised as described below:

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 126.

● If necessary, remove the cover from thedriver door lever ››› page 15.

● Press the button on the vehicle key. Forthis, it must remain with the vehicle.

● Open the vehicle within one minute usingthe key blade. The key has been synchron-ised.

● If necessary, fit the cap.

Childproof lock

Fig. 135 Childproof lock on the left hand sidedoor.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock

– Unlock the vehicle and open the door inwhich you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the groove inthe door using the ignition key, clockwisefor the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 135 and

anti-clockwise for the right hand sidedoors.

Deactivating the childproof lock

– Unlock the vehicle and open the doorwhose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove inthe door using the ignition key, anti-clock-wise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 135and clockwise for the right hand sidedoors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.The childproof lock can be activated or deac-tivated by inserting the key in the groovewhen the door is open, as described above.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult tobreak into the vehicle or steal it.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turnedon when the vehicle is locked with the key.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.

134

Opening and closing

● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered forabout 30 seconds accompanied by soundand optical (flashing) warning signals andwill be repeated about ten times when thevehicle is locked and the following unauthor-ised actions are attempted:

● Opening a door that is mechanically un-locked using the vehicle key without switch-ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (incertain markets, such as the Netherlands,there is no 15 second waiting time and thealarm is activated immediately on openingthe door).

● A door is opened.

● The bonnet is opened.

● The rear lid is opened.

● When the ignition is switched on with anon-authorised key.

● When the vehicle battery is disconnected.

● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicleswith interior monitoring ››› page 136).

● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 136).

● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 136).

● When the vehicle is transported on a ferryor by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system orvehicle interior monitoring ››› page 136).

● When a trailer connected to the anti-theftalarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm

Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking buttonon the key or turn on the ignition with a validkey.

Note

● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery from ex-hausting if the vehicle has been left parkedfor a long period of time. The alarm systemremains activated.

● If, after the audible warning goes off, an-other monitored area is accessed (e.g. therear lid is opened after a door has beenopened), the alarm is triggered again.

● The anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked from within using thecentral locking button .

● If the driver door is unlocked mechanicallywith the key, only the driver door is unlocked,the rest of the doors remain locked. Onlywhen the ignition has been turned on will theother doors be available - but not unlocked -and the central locking button will be activa-ted.

● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-rectly.

● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not working forany reason.

● The alarm is triggered immediately if one ofthe battery cables is disconnected while thealarm system is active.

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detectsunauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-sound.

Activation

– It is automatically switched on when theanti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation

– Open the vehicle with the key, either me-chanically or by pressing the button onthe remote control. The time period fromwhen the door is opened until the key is in-serted in the contact should not exceed 15seconds, otherwise the alarm will be trig-gered. »

135

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

– Press the button on the remote controltwice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-sors will be deactivated. The alarm systemremains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are automatically switched onagain next time the vehicle is locked.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-towsensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switchedon. In order to activate it, all the doors andthe rear lid must be closed.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interiormonitoring and the anti-tow system, it mustbe done each time that the vehicle is locked;if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system should be switched off if animalsare left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,their movements will trigger the alarm) orwhen, for example, the vehicle is transportedor has to be towed with only one axle on theground.

False alarms

Interior monitoring will only operate correctlyif the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a false alarm:

● Open windows (partially or fully).

● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially orcompletely).

● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging fromthe rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note

● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm isactivated without the volumetric sensor func-tion, relocking will activate the alarm with allits functions, except the volumetric sensor.This function is reactivated when the alarm isswitched on again, unless it is deliberatelyswitched off.

● If the alarm has been triggered by the volu-metric sensor, this will be indicated by aflashing of the warning lamp on the driverdoor when the vehicle is opened. The flash isdifferent to the flash indicating the alarm isactivated.

● The vibration of a mobile phone left insidethe vehicle may cause the vehicle interiormonitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensorsreact to movements and shakes inside the ve-hicle.

● If on activating the alarm, any door or therear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa-ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and theanti-tow system will only be activated onceall the doors are closed (including the rearlid).

Deactivating the vehicle interior moni-toring and anti-tow system*

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will betriggered if movements are detected in theinterior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in-clination is changed (e.g. during transport).You can prevent the alarm from being trig-gered accidentally by switching off the vehi-cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro-tection.

● To switch off the interior monitoring andtow-away protection, switch off the ignitionand, using the Infotainment system, select: button > SETTINGS function button > Open-

ing and closing > Central locking > Switch offalarm.

● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicleinterior monitoring and the tow-away protec-tion are switched off until the next time thedoor is opened.

If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*››› page 133 is switched off, the vehicle interi-or monitoring and the tow-away protectionare automatically switched off.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip-tion on page 125.

136

Opening and closing

Rear lid (luggage compart-ment)

Related video

Fig. 136 Handsfree

Rear lid with electric opening andclosing*

Fig. 137 Rear lid open: button to close therear lid immediately.

Fig. 138 Centre console: button to open andclose rear lid.

Opening the rear lid

● Unlock the vehicle ››› page 125 and brieflypress the handle of the rear lid. On vehicleswith Keyless Access you can directly pressthe handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un-locked if an authorised key is recognised inthe proximity of the vehicle.

● OR: press the button on the centre consolefor at least one second ››› Fig. 138. The but-ton also works when the ignition is switchedoff.

● OR: Press and hold the button on thevehicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehi-cle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked(the doors remain locked).

● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access andsensor-controlled opening you can open therear lid by moving one foot in the area of thesensors located below the rear bumper (Easy

Open). The rear lid will be automaticallyopened.

Closing the rear lid

● Briefly press the button on the rear lid››› Fig. 137 ››› .

● OR: press the button located on thecentre console until the rear lid is closed››› Fig. 138.

● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, pressand hold the vehicle key button until therear lid is closed or move one foot in the areaof the sensors located below the rear bumper(Easy Open) ››› page 129. The vehicle keymust not be further than approx. 1.5 m fromthe luggage compartment and should not bein the vehicle.

● OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc-tion of closing until it closes automatically.

● The rear lid goes down automatically to thefinal position and also closes automatically››› .

Interrupting opening or closing

After beginning to open or close the rear lid,the action can be halted by pressing one ofthe buttons.

Continue opening or closing the rear lid byhand. To do this, some force will have to beused. »

137

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

If you press one of the buttons again, therear lid will move again in the original direc-tion.

If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob-stacle during the automatic opening or clos-ing, opening or closing will be interruptedimmediately. For the closing process, the rearlid opens again slightly.

● Check why it has not been possible to openor close the rear lid.

● Try to open or close the rear lid again.

● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened orclosed by hand using reasonable force.

Special feature for pulling a trailer

If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri-cally connected to a trailer ››› page 273, theelectric rear lid can only be opened or closedwith the buttons on the rear lid itself.

Acoustic warnings

Throughout the process of opening or closingthe rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard.Exception: when the rear lid is opened man-ually using the handle or the Easy Open func-tion with the movement of the foot or closedusing the button on the rear lid itself››› Fig. 137.

Modifying and memorising the opening an-gle

If the space behind or above the vehicle isless than the travel area of the rear lid, youcan change the opening angle of the rear lid.

To memorise a new opening angle, the rearlid must be open at least halfway.

● Interrupt the opening process in the de-sired position.

● Press the button ››› Fig. 137 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.

The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa-tion is indicated by blinking of the hazardwarning lights and an audible warning.

Resetting and memorising the opening angle

For the rear lid to reopen completely, theopening angle must be reset and memorisedagain.

● Release the rear lid and open it to thememorised height.

● Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. Todo this, some force will have to be used.

● Press the button ››› Fig. 137 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.

● This resets and memorises the factory-setopening angle. Memorisation is indicated byblinking of the hazard warning lights and anaudible warning.

Automatic protection against overheating

If the system is operated repeatedly in ashort space of time, it automatically switchesoff to prevent overheating.

Once the system is cool again, the functioncan be reused. Until then, the rear lid can on-ly be opened and closed by hand using rea-sonable force.

If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery isdisconnected ››› page 305 or the corre-sponding fuse burns out ››› page 102, thesystem will have to be reset. This requiresclosing the rear lid completely once.

Emergency unlocking

››› page 17

WARNING

If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or itis heavily loaded, the rear lid may not openor, after opening, it may lower by itself due tothe extra weight and cause serious injury.

● Do not open the rear lid when there is a lotof snow on it or when carrying a load (e.g. ona rack).

● Before opening the rear lid, remove thesnow or the load.

WARNING

If the rear lid is closed incorrectly or withoutdue care, it could result in serious injury.

138

Opening and closing

● Never leave the vehicle unattended or allowchildren to play inside or next to it, especiallyif the rear lid is open. Children could enterthe luggage compartment, close the rear lidand become trapped. A locked vehicle canreach extremely high and low temperatures,depending on the time of year, thus causingserious injuries, illness or even death.

CAUTION

Before opening or closing the rear lid, makesure that there is enough space to open orclose it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a ga-rage.

Rear lid automatic locking

Where the vehicle has been locked by press-ing the button on the remote control withthe rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto-matically when closed.

The automatic rear lid locking time extensionfunction can be activated. Where this func-tion is activated and once the rear lid hasbeen unlocked by pressing the button onthe remote control key ››› page 127, the rearlid can be re-opened for a certain length oftime.

Where required, the automatic tailgate lock-ing time extension function can be activatedor deactivated at an Authorised SEAT Service,

which will provide all the necessary informa-tion.

Before the vehicle locks automatically, thereis a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle.Therefore, we recommend you always lockthe vehicle by pressing the button on theremote control or by using the central lockingbutton.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 97.

● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk ofaccident or injury.

● The rear lid must not be opened when thereverse or rear fog lights are lit. This maydamage the tail lights.

● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it downwith your hand on the rear window. The glasscould smash. Risk of injury!

● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-ing.

● Closing the rear lid without observing andensuring it is clear could cause serious injuryto you and to third parties. Make sure that noone is in the path of the rear lid.

● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into theinterior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

● If you only open the rear lid, do not leavethe key inside. The vehicle cannot be openedif the key is left inside.

Controls for the windows

Electric opening and closing of win-dows

Fig. 139 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows.


The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor. The other doors each have a switch fortheir own window.

Always close the windows fully if you parkthe vehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front passen-ger door has been opened and the key hasnot been removed from the ignition. »

139

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Safety switch *

The safety switch ››› Fig. 139 5 on the driverdoor can be used to disable the electric win-dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doorsare deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel-low if the buttons on the rear doors areswitched off.

WARNING


● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.

● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise couldcause serious injury to you and third parties.Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-dow.

● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk of in-jury, for example, in the electric windows.

● The doors can be locked using the remotecontrol key. This could become an obstaclefor assistance in an emergency situation.

● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.

● The electric windows will work until the ig-nition has been switched off and one of thefront doors has been opened.

● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-ble the rear electric windows. Make sure thatthey have been disabled.

Note

If the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, the win-dow will automatically open again››› page 140. If this happens, check why thewindow could not be closed before attempt-ing to close it again.

Roll-back function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .

● Next, check why the window does not closebefore attempting it again.

● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes again with difficultyor there is an obstruction, the automatic clos-ing will stop working for 10 seconds.

● If the window is still obstructed, the win-dow will stop at this point.

● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it again bypulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-dow closes with maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated.

● If more than 10 seconds pass, the windowwill open fully when you operate one of thebuttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Electricopening and closing of windows on page 140.

● The roll-back function does not prevent fin-gers or other parts of the body gettingpinched against the window frame. Risk ofaccident.

Convenience opening and closing

Use the convenience opening/closing func-tion to easily open/close all the windowsfrom the outside.

Convenience open function

– Press and hold the button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows havereached the desired position, or

– First unlock the vehicle using the buttonon the remote control key and then keepthe key in the driver door lock until all the

140

Opening and closing

windows have reached the required posi-tion.

Convenience close function

– Press and hold the button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows are closed››› , or

– Lock the driver's door with the key and holdthe key in the <zitat>lock</zitat> position un-til all the windows are closed

Programming convenience opening in theEasy Connect*

– Select: button > SETTINGS functionbutton > Opening and closing > Open-ing the window by holding downbutton or > Front window on/off.

WARNING

● Never close the windows without due careor proper control. There is a risk of sufferinginjury.

● For safety reasons, you should only use theremote control open and close functions with-in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in-juries, always keep an eye on the windowswhen pressing the button to close them. Thewindows stop moving as soon as the buttonis released.

One-touch opening and closing

One-touch opening and closing means youdo not have to hold down the button.

Buttons ››› Fig. 139 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 havetwo positions for opening windows and twofor closing them. This makes it easier to openand close windows to the desired position.

One-touch closing

– Pull up the window button briefly up to thesecond position. The window closes fully.

One-touch opening

– Push down the window button briefly up tothe second position. The window opensfully.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing

The automatic open and close function willnot work if the battery has been temporarilydisconnected. The function can be restoredas follows:

– Close the window as far as it will go by lift-ing and holding the electric window switch.

– Release the switch and then lift it again for1 second. This will re-enable the automaticfunction.

If you push (or pull) a button to the firststage, the window will open (or close) untilyou release the button. If you push or lift the

button briefly to the second stage, the win-dow will open (one-touch opening) or close(one-touch closing) automatically. If you op-erate the button while the window is openingor closing, it stops at this position.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof consists of two glass parts. Therear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al-so has a sun blind.

WARNING

If the sunroof is used negligently or withoutpaying due attention, it can cause serious in-jury.

● Open or close the sunroof and the sun blindonly when no one is in their path of move-ment.

● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting.

● Never leave a child or any other person whomay need help in the vehicle, especially ifthey have access to the vehicle key. If usingthey key unattended, they could lock the ve-hicle, start the engine, switch on the ignitionand activate the sunroof.

● After switching off, it is still possible toopen or close the sunroof during a short »

141

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

space of time provided that neither the drivernor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION

● To prevent damage, during winter tempera-tures remove any ice or snow that might beon the car roof before opening the sunroof oradjusting the tilt position.

● Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rain-fall, always close the sunroof. With the sun-roof open or in a tilted position, water can en-ter the interior and can cause considerabledamage to the electrical system. As a result,other damage can occur in the vehicle.

Note

● Leaves and other loose objects that accu-mulate on the sunroof rails should be regular-ly cleaned away either by hand or with a vac-uum.

● If the sunroof does not work correctly, theanti-trap function will not work either. Con-tact a specialised workshop.

Opening and closing the sunroof

Fig. 140 On the interior roof lining: sunroofbutton.

The sunroof only works when the ignition isswitched on. Once the ignition has beenswitched off, you can still open or close thesunroof for a few minutes provided the driverdoor and the front passenger door are notopened.

The sun blind automatically opens along withthe sunroof if completely closed or if in frontof the sunroof. The sun blind remains in theprevious position and does not automaticallyclose with the sunroof. The sun blind can on-ly be closed completely once the sunroof hasbeen closed.

The button ››› Fig. 140 has two levels. Thefirst level switches the sunroof to the tiltedposition, opening or closing it fully or partial-ly.

On the second level, the sunroof automatical-ly moves to the corresponding final positionafter briefly pressing the button. Activatingthe button again stops the automatic func-tion.

Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof

● Press the rear part of the button B to thefirst level.

● Automatic operation: briefly press the rearpart of button B to the second level.

Closing the sunroof from a tilted position

● Press the front part of the button A to thefirst level.

● Automatic operation: briefly press the frontpart of the button A to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation by adjust-ing the tilted position of the sunroof or byclosing the sunroof

● Press button A or B again.

Opening the sunroof

● Press button C backwards to the first lev-el.

● Automatic operation to comfort position:briefly press button C backwards to the sec-ond level.

142

Opening and closing

Closing the sunroof

● Press button D forwards to the first level.

● Automatic operation: briefly press buttonD forwards to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation during theopening or closing

● Press button C or D again.

Opening and closing the sun blind

Fig. 141 On the interior roof lining: switchesfor the sun blind.

The electrical sun blind works when the igni-tion is switched on.

When the sunroof is in its most tilted posi-tion, the sun blind automatically goes into aventilation position. The sun blind remains inthis position also with the sunroof closed.

Buttons ››› Fig. 141 1 and 2 have two lev-els. The first level opens or closes the sunblind fully or partially.

By briefly pressing the button to the secondlevel, the sun blind automatically moves tothe corresponding final position. Activatingthe button again stops the automatic func-tion.

Once the ignition has been switched off, youcan still open or close the sun blind for a fewminutes provided the driver door and thefront passenger door are not opened.

Opening the sun blind

● Press button 1 to the first level.

● Automatic operation: briefly press button1 to the second level.

Closing the sun blind

● Press button 2 to the first level.

● Automatic operation: briefly press button2 to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation during theopening or closing

● Press button 1 or 2 again.

Note

When the sunroof is open, the electric sunblind can only be closed to the front edge ofthe sunroof.

Anti-trap function of the panoramicsliding sunroof and the sun blind

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk ofinjury when closing the sunroof and the sunblind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind en-counter resistance or an obstacle when clos-ing, they reopen immediately.

● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do notclose.

● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.

● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closeddue to an obstacle or some resistance, itstops at the corresponding position and thenopens. For automatic closing, a new closingattempt might take place.

● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable toclose, close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without theanti-trap function

● Sunroof: within approx. 5 seconds of hav-ing activated the roll-back function, press the button ››› Fig. 140 to the second level inthe direction of arrow ››› Fig. 140 D until thesunroof closes completely.

● Sun blind: within approx. 5 seconds of hav-ing activated the anti-trap function, pressbutton ››› Fig. 141 2 until the sun blindcloses completely.

● The sunroof or sun blind close without theanti-trap function intervening! »

143

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● If the sunroof or sun blind will still notclose, visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without theanti-trap function can cause serious injuries.

● Always be careful when closing the sunroofand sun blind.

● No person should ever remain in the way ofthe sunroof or sun blind, especially whenclosing without the anti-trap function.

● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin-gers or other parts of the body from becom-ing trapped against the roof frame and inju-ries occurring.


Lights

Related video

Fig. 142 Vehicle lights

Side light and dipped beam headlight


The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched off

If the key is not in the ignition and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this is a remind-er to turn off the lights.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 145.

● When the light switch is in position or.

WARNING

The side lights or daytime running lights arenot bright enough to illuminate the roadahead and to ensure that other road users areable to see you.

● Always use your dipped beam head lights ifit is raining or if visibility is poor.

WARNING

If the headlights are set too high and notused correctly, there is a risk of dazzling ordistracting other road users. This could resultin a serious accident.

● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

Note

The legal requirements regarding the use ofvehicle lights in each country must be ob-served.

144


Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights consist of individ-ual lights, integrated in the front headlights.By connecting the daytime running lights,these lights are switched on1) ››› .

The daytime running lights switch on everytime the ignition is switched on, if the switchis in positions or , according to the levelof exterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , alight sensor automatically switches dippedbeam on and off (including the control andinstrument lighting) or the daytime runninglights depending on the level of exteriorlighting.

WARNING

● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lighting con-ditions. Daytime lights do not provideenough light to illuminate the road properlyor be seen by other road users.

● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,when activating the daytime running lightthe rear lights are not switched on. A vehiclewhich does not have the rear lights on maynot be visible to other drivers in the dark-ness, in the case of heavy rain or in condi-tions of poor visibility.

Turn signal and main beam lever


Push the lever all the way down to turn offthe corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals

For the one-touch signalling, when the igni-tion is switched on, move the lever as far aspossible upwards or downwards and releasethe lever. The turn signal will flash threetimes.

One-touch signalling is activated and deacti-vated in the Easy Connect system via the button and the function button SETTINGS >Lights > One-touch signalling››› page 33.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

WARNING

Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, orforgetting to deactivate them can confuseother road users. This could result in a seri-ous accident.

● Always give warning when you are going tochange lane, overtake or when turning, acti-vating the turn signal in good time.

● As soon as you have finished changinglane, overtaking or turning, switch the turnsignal off.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the headlights may cause ac-cidents and serious injury, as the main beammay distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note

● If the convenience turn signals are operat-ing (three flashes) and the other convenienceturn signals are switched on, the active partstops flashing and only flashes once in thenew part selected.

● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warninglights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.

● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, thecontrol lamp will stop flashing (trailer turnsignals) and the vehicle turn signal will flashat double speed.

● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on. »

1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the rearside light is switched on as well.

145

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● In cold or damp weather conditions, theheadlights, tail lights and turn signals maymist up inside temporarily. This is normal andin no way effects the useful life of the vehiclelighting system.

Automatic dipped beam control *

The automatic dipped beam control is merelyintended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , thevehicle lights and the instrument panel andswitch lighting switch on and off automatical-ly in the following situations ››› in Daytimerunning lights on page 145:

Automatic switchingon

Automatic switchingoff

The photo sensor detectsdarkness, for example,when driving through atunnel.

When adequate lighting isdetected.

The rain sensor detectsrain and activates thewindscreen wipers.

When the windscreen wip-ers have been inactive fora few minutes.

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road userscannot see the vehicle well enough or at all,accidents may occur.

● The automatic dipped beam control ()only switches on the dipped beam whenthere are no changes in brightness, and not,for example when it is foggy.

Main beam assist*

Main beam assist (Light Assist)

The main beam assist acts within the limitsof the system and depending on environmen-tal and traffic conditions. Once switched on,the system is activated as of a speed ofabout 60 km/h (37 mph) and is deactivatedbelow about 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› .

When the system is activated and the cameradetects other vehicles that may be dazzled,the main beam is automatically switched off.Otherwise, the main beam is automaticallyswitched on.

The main beam assist generally detects illu-minated areas and deactivates the mainbeam when passing through a town, for ex-ample.

Switching the main beam assist on and off

Func-tion

Use

Activate:

– Switch the ignition on and turn the lightswitch to position .– From the base position, move the mainbeam and turn signal lever forwards››› page 145. When the warning lamp isdisplayed on the instrument panel display,the main beam assist is switched on.

To switchsystem

off:

– Switch off the ignition.– OR: turn the light switch to a different po-sition to ››› page 144.– OR: with main beam on, move the mainbeam and turn signal lever backwards.– OR: move the main beam and turn thesignal lever forwards to manually switchthe main beam on. The main beam assistwill then be deactivated.

Malfunctions

The following conditions may prevent themain beam headlight control from turning offthe headlights in time or from turning off al-together:

● In poorly lit towns with highly reflectivesigns.

● Other insufficiently lit road users (such aspedestrians or cyclists).

● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)and when oncoming vehicles are partially ob-scured.

146


● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi-cles (such as a truck) can see over a guardrail in the centre of the road.

● If the camera is damaged or the power sup-ply is cut off.

● In fog, snow and heavy rain.

● With dust and sand turbulence.

● With loose gravel in the field of vision ofthe camera.

● When the field of vision of the camera ismisted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,ice, etc.

WARNING

The convenience features of the main beamassist should not encourage the taking ofrisks. The system is not a replacement fordriver concentration.

● You are always in control of the main beamand adapting it to the light, visibility and traf-fic conditions.

● It is possible that the main beam headlightcontrol does not recognise all driving situa-tions and is limited under certain circumstan-ces.

● When the field of vision of the camera isdirty, covered or damaged, operation of themain beam control may be affected. This alsoapplies when changes are made to the vehi-

cle lighting system, for example, if additionalheadlights are installed.

CAUTION

To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-tem, take the following points into considera-tion:

● Clean the field of vision of the camera regu-larly and make sure it is free of snow and ice.

● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-era.

● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the field of vision of the camera.

Note

Main beam and headlight flasher can beturned on and off manually at any time withthe turn signal and main beam lever››› page 145.

Fog lights

Fig. 143 Dash panel: light control.

The warning lamps or also show, on thelight switch or instrument panel, when thefog lights are on.

● Switching on front fog lights* : pull thelight switch to the first point ››› Fig. 143 1 ,from positions , or .

● Switching on the rear fog light : com-pletely pull the light switch 2 from position, or .

● To switch off the fog lights, press the lightswitch or turn it to position . »

147

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behindyou. You should use the rear fog light onlywhen visibility is very poor.

Cornering lights*1)

When turning slowly or on very tight bends,the cornering lights are activated automati-cally. The cornering lights may be integratedin the fog lights and are switched on only atspeeds of less than 40 km/h (25 mph).

When reverse gear is engaged, the corneringlights on both sides of the vehicle switch on,in order to better illuminate the area for park-ing.

“Coming home” function

This function may be connected/disconnec-ted through the radio menu. The “ComingHome” and/or “Leaving Home” delay timemay also be set (default: 30 sec).

Vehicle with halogen headlights

In the “Coming Home” function, the daytimerunning lights (DRL), the rear side lights andthe licence plate lights are turned on.

Vehicle with full-LED headlights

In the “Coming Home” function, the dippedbeams, the daytime running lights (DRL), therear side lights, the number plate lights andthe courtesy lights in the rear view mirror(Welcome Light) switch on.

Automatic* activation of “Coming Home”

For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-ry light switch in position ).

● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition with the rotary light switchin position ››› page 30.

● The automatic “Coming Home” function isonly active when the light sensor detectsdarkness.

● When the car door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on.

Manual “Coming Home” activation

For vehicles with a light and rain sensor (rota-ry light switch without position ).

● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition.

● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-mately 1 second.

● Activated for any position of the rotary lightswitch.

● When the car door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on. The headlights areturned off 60 seconds after the vehicle dooris opened.

Deactivation

● If no door has been closed, they go out au-tomatically after 60 seconds.

● After the last door has been closed, theheadlights will be switched off after the“Coming Home” delay (as established in theradio menu) has elapsed.

● On turning the light switch to position ››› page 30.

● When the ignition is switched on (whenstarting the engine).

1) This function is not available on vehicles equippedwith full-LED headlights.

148


Function “Leaving Home”

The “Leaving Home” function is only availa-ble for vehicles with a light and rain sensor(rotary light switch in position ).

This function may be connected/disconnec-ted through the radio menu. The “LeavingHome” function switch-off delay may also beset (default: 30 sec).

Vehicle with halogen headlights

In the “Leaving Home” function, the daytimerunning lights (DRL), the rear side lights andthe licence plate lights are switched on.

Vehicle with full-LED headlights

In the “Leaving Home” function, the dippedbeams, the daytime running lights (DRL), therear side lights, the number plate lights andthe courtesy lights in the rear view mirror(“Welcome Light”) switch on.

Activation

● When the vehicle is unlocked using the re-mote control.

● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-ted when the rotary light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

Deactivation

● When the “Leaving Home” delay periodends (default: 30 sec).

● When the vehicle is locked using the re-mote control.

● When the light control is switched into aposition other than .

● With the ignition is switched on.

Welcome light*3 Valid for vehicles with a light and rain sensor(light switch in position ) and Full LED head-lights.

The Welcome light is a light located on theexterior mirrors facing the ground which isswitched on or off if the lights control is inthe position and the “Coming Home” /“Leaving Home” function is switched on oroff.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 144 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-ing lights.


The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your vehi-cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;for an automatic gearbox, move the gearlever to P. »

149

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-tion of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously whenthe hazard warning lights are switched on.The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch willflash at the same time. The simultaneoushazard warning lights also work when the ig-nition is switched off.

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50mph), the brake light flashes several timesper second to warn the vehicles driving be-hind. If you continue braking, the hazardwarning lights will come on automaticallywhen the vehicle comes to a standstill. Theyswitch off automatically when the vehiclestarts to move again.

WARNING

● The risk of an accident increases if your ve-hicle breaks down. Always use the hazardwarning lights and a warning triangle to drawthe attention of other road users to your sta-tionary vehicle.

● Due to the high temperatures that the cata-lytic converter can reach, never park in anarea where the catalytic converter could come

into contact with highly inflammable materi-als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. Thiscould start a fire.

Note

● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.

● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-tory requirements.

Parking lights

When the parking light is switched on, (rightor left turn signal), the front side light andthe rear light on the corresponding side ofthe vehicle stay lit. The parking lights can on-ly be activated with the ignition switched offand the turn signal and main beam lever inthe central position, before being triggered.

Parking light on both sides

With the ignition switched off and the lightswitch in position , when locking the vehi-cle from the outside, the parking lights onboth sides of the vehicle light up. In doingso, only the side lights of both headlightslight up, and additionally the tail lights willdo so partially.

Motorway light*

The motorway light is available on vehiclesequipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected/disconnected viathe corresponding Easy Connect systemmenu.

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-er's visibility distance.

● Deactivation: when reducing the speed ofthe car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip-ped beam returns to its normal position.

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a countrythat drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-mally necessary to cover part of the headlightbulbs with stickers or to change the adjust-ment of the headlights to avoid dazzling oth-er drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution.This is known as “Tourist light”.

150


The light distribution of the halogen and full-LED headlights allows the specific “touristlight” values to be met without the need forstickers or changes in the settings.

Note

“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a country thatdrives on the other side, you should take thevehicle to an Authorised Technical Service tochange the headlights.

Headlight range control

Fig. 145 Next to the steering wheel: Head-light range control

The headlight range control ››› Fig. 145 ismodified according to the value of the head-light beam and the vehicle load status. Thisoffers the driver optimum visibility and theheadlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers››› .

The headlights can only be adjusted whenthe dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 145:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compartmentempty

All seats occupied, luggage compartmentfull. With trailer and minimum drawbarload.

Driver only, luggage compartment full Withtrailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in thetable, it is possible to select intermediary positions.

OR:

Using the Easy Connect system, by means ofthe button and the function button SET-TINGS > Lights > Headlight heightadjustment ››› page 33).

Setting 0Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

Setting 1All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment empty

Setting 2All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment full. With trailer and minimumdrawbar load.

Setting 3Driver only, luggage compartment fullDriving with trailer and minimum draw-bar load.

Dynamic headlight range control

The control is not mounted in vehicles withdynamic headlight range control. The head-light range is automatically adjusted accord-ing to the vehicle load status when they areswitched on.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean thatthe headlights dazzle and distract other driv-ers. This could result in a serious accident.

● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other drivers.

Lighting of the instrument panel,screens and controls

Depending on the model, the lighting of theinstrument panel and controls can be adjus-ted in the Easy Connect system, using the button and the SETTINGS function button››› page 33.

With the ignition on and without light activa-tion, the instrument panel lighting remainsactivated in daytime light conditions. Thelighting is reduced as the exterior light di-minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving »

151

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

through a tunnel without the functionactive, the instrument panel lighting mayeven switch off. The objective of this functionis to provide the driver with a visual indica-tion that he or she should activate the dip-ped beam.

Interior and reading lights1)


Glove compartment and luggage compart-ment lighting*

When opening and closing the glove com-partment on the front passenger side and therear lid, the respective light will automaticallyswitch on and off.

Footwell lighting*

The lights in the footwell area below the dash(driver and front passenger sides) will switchon when the doors are opened and will de-crease in intensity while driving. The intensityof these lights can be adjusted using the ra-dio menu (see Easy Connect > Light

Settings > Interior lighting››› page 33).

Ambient light*

The ambient light lights up the area of thecentre console, the footwell area and, de-pending on the version, the front door pan-els.

The ambient lighting in the door panels maychange colour. The brightness and colour ofthese lights can be adjusted using the radiomenu (see Easy Connect > Light Set-tings > Interior lighting››› page 33).

Note

The reading lights switch off when the vehi-cle is locked using a key or after several mi-nutes if the key is removed from the ignition.This prevents the battery from discharging.

Visibility

Sun visors

Fig. 146 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors:

● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.

● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 146 1 .

● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon-gitudinally backwards.

1) Depending on the level of equipment fitted in thevehicle, LEDs can be used for the following interiorlights: front courtesy light, rear courtesy light, foot-well light, sun blind and glove compartment light.

152


Vanity mirror light

There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, onthe rear of the sun visor. When the cover isopened 2 a light comes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirrorcover is closed or the sun visor is pushedback up.

WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

Note

The light above the sun visor automaticallyswitches off after a few minutes in certainconditions. This prevents the battery fromdischarging.

Windscreen wiper and windowwiper systems

Window wiper lever


CAUTION

If the ignition is switched off with the wind-screen wipers active, they complete theirwipe before returning to the rest position.When switching the ignition back on, thewindscreen wiper will continue to operate atthe same wiping level. Ice, snow and otherobstacles on the windscreen may damage thewiper and the windscreen wiper motor.

● If necessary, remove snow and ice from thewindscreen wipers before starting your jour-ney.

● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wipersfrom the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icerspray for this operation.

● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers ifthe windscreen is dry. Cleaning with thewindscreen wipers while dry can cause dam-age.

● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it mayhelp to leave the vehicle parked with the wip-ers in service position ››› page 71.

Note

● The windscreen and window wipers onlyfunction when the ignition is switched on andthe bonnet or rear lid, respectively, areclosed.

● The interval wipe speed varies according tothe vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is

moving, the more often the windscreen iscleaned.

● The rear wiper is automatically switched onwhen the windscreen wiper is on and the caris in reverse gear.

Windscreen wiper functions

Windscreen wiper performance in different sit-uations

If the vehicle is at astandstill

The activated position provision-ally changes to the previous posi-tion.

During automaticwipe

The air conditioner comes on forapproximately 30 seconds in airrecirculation mode to prevent thesmell of the windscreen washerfluid entering the inside the vehi-cle.

For the interval wipe

Intervals between wipes dependon the vehicle's speed. The high-er the vehicle speed the shorterthe intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets*

The heating only thaws the frozen jets, itdoes not thaw the water in the washer hoses.When the ignition is switched on the heatedwindscreen washer jets automatically adjustthe heat depending on the ambient tempera-ture. »

153

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Headlight wash/wipe system*

The headlight washers/wipers clean theheadlight lenses.

After the ignition is switched on, the first andevery fifth time the windscreen washer isswitched on, the headlights are also washed.Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever shouldbe pulled towards the steering wheel whenthe dipped beam or main beam are on. Anyincrusted dirt (such as insects) should becleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).

To ensure the headlight washers work cor-rectly in winter, any snow which has got intothe bumper jet supports should be cleanedaway. If necessary, remove snow with an anti-icing spray.

Note

The wiper will try to wipe away any obstaclesthat are on the windscreen. The wiper willstop moving if the obstacle blocks its path.Remove the obstacle and switch the wiperback on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 147 Windscreen wiper lever: adjustingthe rain sensor A

Fig. 148 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of thewindscreen wiper intervals, depending onthe amount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of therain sensor can be adjusted manually. Man-ual wipe ››› page 153.

Move the lever to the required position››› Fig. 147:

Rain sensor off.

Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.

Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor

– Set control to the right: highly sensi-tive.

– Set control to the left: less sensitive.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor stays on and startsoperating again when the windscreen wipersare in position 1 and the vehicle is travel-ling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

Rain sensor modified behaviour

Possible causes of faults and mistaken read-ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 148 ofthe rain sensor include:

● Damaged blades: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activationtime, reduce the washing intervals or resultin a fast and continuous wipe.

● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.

● Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in theroads may cause an extra long wipe when thewindscreen is almost dry.

● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may

0

1

A

154


reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor ormake it react more slowly, later or not at all.

● Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects thereduction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sen-sor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNING

The rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.

● If necessary, switch on the wipers manuallywhen water on the windscreen obstructs visi-bility.

Note

● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sen-sor regularly and check the blades for dam-age ››› Fig. 148 (arrow).

● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.

Mirror

Anti-dazzle rear view mirror

It is dangerous to drive if you cannot seeclearly through the rear window.

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-dazzlefunction*

The anti-dazzle function is activated everytime the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, theinterior rear vision mirror will darken auto-matically according to the amount of light itreceives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNING

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluidmay leak. This could cause irritation to theskin, eyes and respiratory organs. If youcome into contact with this liquid, it must berinsed with large quantities of water. If neces-sary, get medial help.

CAUTION

In the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte fluidmay leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces.Clean it with a wet sponge as soon as possi-ble.

Note

● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sunblind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror withautomatic setting will not operate perfectly.

● When the interior lights are on or reversegear engaged, the mirrors do not darken withautomatic adjustment for anti-dazzle posi-tion.

Adjusting the exterior rear-view mir-rors

Fig. 149 Driver door: control for the exteriormirror.


Synchronized regulation of the exterior mir-rors

● In the Settings - Convenience menu,select whether or not the exterior mirrorsshould move in synchronisation. »

155

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Turn the knob to position L1).

● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Theright exterior mirror will be adjusted at thesame time (synchronised).

● If necessary the right exterior mirror adjust-ment may need correcting. turn the control toposition R1).

● In the Easy Connect system the exterior mir-rors can be adjusted using the buttonand the SETTINGS function button.

Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking(convenience function)*

The Easy Connect system, the button andthe function buttons SETTINGS andMirrors and windscreen wipers can be used to

have the exterior mirrors fold in when the ve-hicle is parked ››› page 120.

When the vehicle is locked with the remotecontrol, by pressing for more than approxi-mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol-ded in automatically. When the vehicle isopened with the remote control, the exteriormirrors are deployed automatically.

WARNING

Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors give alarger field of vision. However, they make ob-

jects look smaller and further away than theyreally are. If you use these mirrors to esti-mate the distance to vehicles behind youwhen changing lane, you could misjudge thedistance. Risk of accident!

CAUTION

● If one of the mirror housings is knocked outof position (e.g. when parking), the mirrorsmust first be fully retracted with the electriccontrol. Do not readjust the mirror housing byhand, as this will interfere with the mirror ad-juster function.

● Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, please make sure to retract the ex-terior mirrors to prevent them from beingdamaged. Electrically retractable exteriormirrors must not be folded in or out by hand.Always use the electrical power control.

Note

If the electrical adjustment should fail to op-erate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted byhand by lightly pressing the edge of the mir-ror glass.

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seats and headr-ests

Manual adjustment of the seats


WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains importantinformation, tips, suggestions and warningsthat you should read and observe for yourown safety and the safety of your passengers››› page 73.

WARNING

● Adjust the front seats only when the vehi-cle is stationary. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.

● Be careful when adjusting the seat height.Careless or uncontrolled adjustment cancause injuries.

● The front seat backrests must not be re-clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts andthe airbag system might not protect as theyshould, with the subsequent danger of injury.

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmet-rical.

156


Electric driver's seat adjustment*


WARNING

● If the electric front seats are used negli-gently or without paying due attention, it cancause serious injury.

● The front seats can also be electrically ad-justed when the ignition is switched off. Nev-er leave a child or any other person who mayneed help in the vehicle.

● In the event of an emergency, electrical ad-justment can be stopped by pressing anycontrol.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the electrical componentsof the front seats, please refrain from kneel-ing on the seat or applying sharp pressure ata single point to the seat cushion and back-rest.

Note

● It may not be possible to electrically adjustthe seat if the vehicle battery is very low.

● If the engine is started while the seats arebeing electrically adjusted, the adjustmentwill stop.

Adjusting the front head restraints


Adjust the head restraint ››› page 19 sothat as far as possible the top of the head re-straint is level with the top of your head.When this is not possible, try to get as closeas possible to this position.

Adjustment of the rear head restraints

Fig. 150 Rear centre head restraint: releasepoint.

When transporting people in the back seat,place the head restraints of the occupiedseats at a minimum of the next socket up››› .

Adjusting the head restraints

– To set the head restraint higher, grasp thesides with both hands and move it up-wards, until you see it engage.

– To set the head restraint lower down, pressthe 1 ››› Fig. 150 button and move itdownwards.

Removing the head restraint

To remove the head restraint, the correspond-ing backrest must be partially folded forward.

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 159.

– Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-rives to the top.

– Press button 1 ››› Fig. 150, while simulta-neously pressing on the security hole 2

››› Fig. 150 with a flat screwdriver a maxi-mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the headrestraint.

– Move the backrest until it engages properly››› .

Fitting the head restraint

To mount the external head restraints, thecorresponding backrest must be partially fol-ded forward.

– Unlock the backrest ››› page 159.

– Insert the head restraint bars into theguides until they perceptibly engage. It »

157

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

should not be possible to remove the headrestraint from the backrest.

– Move the backrest until it engages properly››› .

WARNING

● Please observe the general notes››› page 77.

● Remove the rear head restraints only whenit is necessary for the placement of a childseat ››› page 90. After removing a child seat,remount the head restraint immediately.Travelling with the head restraints removedor improperly adjusted increases the risk ofsevere injuries.

Seat functions

Introduction

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions cancause severe injuries.

● Assume the proper sitting position beforeyour trip and remain in it throughout. This al-so applies to the other occupants.

● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and otherparts of the body away from the operating ra-dius and the adjustment of seats.

Seat heating

Fig. 151 In the centre console: front seatsheating switch

The seat cushions can be heated electricallywhen the ignition is switched on. The back-rest is also heated in some versions.

The seat heating should not be engaged inany of the following conditions:

● The seat is unoccupied.

● The seat has a covering.

● There is a child seat installed in the seat.

● The seat cushion is wet or damp.

● The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-er than 25°C (77°F).

Activate

Press the button or . Seat heating isswitched on fully.

Adjusting the heating output

Press the button or repeatedly until thedesired intensity level is reached.

Deactivating

Press the button or until all warninglamps switch off.

WARNING

Children and people who cannot perceivepain or temperature because of medications,paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes)or have a limited perception of these, maysuffer burns to the back, buttocks or legswhen using seat heating, an occurrence thatmay entail a very lengthy recovery period orfrom which it may not be possible to recoverfully. Seek medical advice if you have doubtsregarding your health.

● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.

● If an abnormality in the device's tempera-ture control is detected, have it checked by aspecialist workshop.

WARNING

If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad-versely affect the operation of the seat heat-ing, increasing the risk of burns.

● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.

158


● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.

● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.

● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION

● To avoid damaging the heating elements ofthe seat heaters, please do not kneel on theseat or apply sharp pressure to a single pointon the seat cushion or backrest.

● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma-terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damagethe seat heating.

● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have it inspected bya specialised workshop.


The seat heating should remain on only whenneeded. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuelwaste.

Front centre armrest

The centre armrest can be adjusted to variouslevels.

Adjusting the centre armrest

– To adjust the tilt, lift the armrest from thestarting position so that it is engaged.

– To return the armrest to the starting posi-tion, remove the armrest from the upperfixed position and lower it.

The armrest can be moved backwards andforwards.

Folding down and lifting the rear seatbackrest

Fig. 152 On the rear seat backrest: releasecatch 1 ; red mark 2 .

Fig. 153 In the luggage compartment: leversfor remote release of the left part 1 and rightpart 2 of the rear seat backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each partbe lowered separately to extend the luggagecompartment.

When the rear seat backrest is lowered no-body else can travel in the correspondingseats (not even a child).

Lowering the rear seat backrest with the un-lock button

● Lower the head restraint properly.

● Push the unlock button ››› Fig. 152 1 for-wards and at the same time lift the backrest.

● The rear seat backrest is not engaged whenthe red marking of the button 2 is visible.

Lowering the rear seat backrest with the re-mote release lever

● Lower the head restraint properly. »159

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Open the rear lid.

● Pull the remote release lever of the left part››› Fig. 153 1 or right part 2 of the backrestin the direction of the arrow. The releasedpart of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-matically down and forwards.

● If this occurs, close the rear lid.

The rear seat backrest is not engaged whenthe red marking of the button ››› Fig. 152 2

is visible.

Folding up the rear seat backrest

● Lift the backrest and press it firmly into thelock until it engages ››› .

● It should not be possible to see the redmark of the unlock button 2 .

● The backrest must be properly engaged.

WARNING

Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seatbackrest is lowered or lifted without due careand attention.

● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrestwhile driving.

● Do no trap or damage the seat belt whenraising the rear seat backrest.

● When lowering or lifting the rear seat back-rest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and otherbody parts out of its path.

● For the rear seat belts to offer the necessa-ry protection all the parts of the rear backrest

must be properly engaged. This is particular-ly important in the case of the centre rearseat. If someone is seated in a seat whosebackrest is not properly engaged they will flyforward, along with the backrest, during anaccident or a sudden driving or braking ma-noeuvre.

● A red signal on the button 2 warns thatthe backrest is not engaged. Always checkthat the red marking is not visible when thebackrest is in the upright position.

● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or isnot properly engaged nobody else can travelin the corresponding seats (not even a child).

CAUTION

Serious damage can be caused to the vehicleand other objects if the rear seat backrest islowered or lifted without due care and atten-tion.

● Before lowering the rear seat backrest, al-ways adjust the front seats so that neitherthe head restraints nor the cushions of therear backrest can hit them.

Transport and practicalequipment

Storage compartments

Storage areas under the front seats*

Fig. 154 Storage compartment under thefront seats.

There is a storage compartment with a coverunder each front seat.

The drawer* is opened by pulling on the han-dle of the cover ››› Fig. 154.

To close the drawer, press the cover until itlocks into position.

WARNING

● The drawers will hold a maximum weight of1.5 kg.

160

Transport and practical equipment

● Do not drive with the drawer cover open.There is an injury risk for passengers if thecargo is released in case of sudden braking oran accident.

Drink holders

Fig. 155 Centre console: front drink holders.

Front drink holders

– Place drinks in the holder ››› Fig. 155.Placement of two drinks is possible. Thereis also the possibility of placing larger plas-tic bottles in the trims of the doors.

WARNING

● Do not place any hot drinks in the drinkholder while the vehicle is moving. Hot drinkscould spill and cause burns, which may causean accident.

● Do not use hard china cups or glasses.These could cause injury in the event of anaccident.

CAUTION

You should avoid putting open drinks con-tainers in the drink holders. The drinks couldotherwise spill over and cause damage to e.g.the electrical equipment or the seat covers.

Glove compartment

Fig. 156 Glove compartment

Opening/closing

– To open the glove compartment, pull thehandle in the direction of the arrow.

– To close the glove compartment, move thecover upwards until it engages.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CDplayer is located in the glove compartment.Separate operating instructions are enclosedfor this equipment in the corresponding In-struction Manual.

WARNING

The cover of the glove compartment shouldalways be closed while driving. Failure to fol-low this instruction could result in an acci-dent.

Other storage compartments

You will find more object holders, compart-ments and supports in other parts of the ve-hicle:

● In the top of the glove compartment in ve-hicles that do not have a CD reader. The loadof the compartment should not exceed1.2 kg.

● In the centre console under the centre arm-rest*.

● Coat hooks in the door frames ››› .

● Other storage compartments are found inthe rear seat, to the left and the right of theseats. »

161

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

● Please make sure that any items of clothinghanging from the coat hooks do not obstructyour view to the rear.

● The coat hooks should only be used forlightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavyor sharp objects in the pockets.

● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up theclothing, as this could interfere with the func-tion of the head-protection airbags.

Power sockets

Fig. 157 Centre console: 12 volt socket

Fig. 158 Centre console, rear section: USBpower sockets.

● Remove the cap located on the centre con-sole of the socket ››› Fig. 157.

● Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected to the12 volt power socket. The appliances connec-ted to each power socket must not exceed apower rating of 120 Watt.

USB power sockets

Depending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear of theconsole, between the front seats ››› Fig. 158.These connectors can work at a maximumpower of up to 10.5 W per port.

They are not intended for file playback.

WARNING

The power socket works only when the igni-tion is on. Improper use may cause seriousinjury or even fire. Children should thereforenot be left in the vehicle unattended if thebutton is also left behind. Otherwise there isa possibility that they may be injured.

CAUTION

Always use the correct type of plugs to avoiddamaging the sockets.

Note

● The use of electrical appliances with theengine switched off will cause a battery dis-charge.

● Should the connected appliance overheat,immediately switch it off and disconnect itfrom the socket.

● Before switching the ignition on or off, un-plug the appliances from the USB ports toprotect them from any damage caused byfluctuations in voltage.

Storing objects

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must besafely secured in the luggage compartment.Unsecured objects which shift back and forth

162


could impair the driving safety or drivingcharacteristics of the vehicle by shifting thecentre of gravity.

– Distribute the load evenly in the luggagecompartment.

– Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-ble in the luggage compartment.

– Place the heavy objects first.

– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fasteningrings ››› page 165.

WARNING

● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-gage compartment could cause serious inju-ries.

● Always stow objects in the luggage com-partment and secure them on the fasteningrings.

● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-jects.

● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,loose objects can be thrown forward, injuringvehicle occupants or passers-by. This in-creased risk of injury will be further increasedif a loose object is struck by an inflating air-bag. If this happens, objects may shoot out-ward like a missile. Risk of fatal injury.

● Please note that the centre of gravity mayshift when transporting heavy objects; thismay affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust

your speed and driving style accordingly, toavoid accidents.

● Never exceed the allowed axle weights orallowed maximum weight. If said weights areexceeded, the driving characteristics of thevehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-juries and damage to the vehicle.

● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-cially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.

● Never allow children to play in or aroundthe vehicle. Close and lock all the doors andthe rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Be-fore you lock the vehicle, make sure thatthere are no adults or children in the vehicle.

Note

● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reducefogging of the windows. Used air escapesthrough ventilation slits in the side trim ofthe luggage compartment. Ensure that theventilation slots are never covered.

● Straps for securing the load to the fasten-ing rings are commercially available.

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 159 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and installing the rear shelf.

Fig. 160 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and installing the rear shelf.

The luggage compartment cover blocks theview into the luggage compartment. »

163

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Removing

● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 159 B fromtheir hooks A .

● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-ports ››› Fig. 160 by pulling it upwards andthen take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-der the luggage compartment double floor››› page 164.

Fitting

● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-cess” fits onto the axis of the supports››› Fig. 160 and press down until it engages.

● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 159 B to the rearlid.

WARNING

● The luggage compartment cover must al-ways be fixed properly (risk of accident).

● The luggage compartment cover should notbe used as a storage shelf. Articles placed onthis cover could cause injury to vehicle occu-pants in an accident or if the brakes are ap-plied suddenly.

Storing the rear shelf

Fig. 161 In the luggage compartment: coversfor storing the rear shelf.

Fig. 162 In the luggage compartment: fittingthe storage compartment shelf.

The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-gage compartment variable floor.

● Remove the left and right covers››› Fig. 161.

● Press the rear shelf until it engages in itshousing ››› Fig. 162.

● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

Tailboard for transporting long items*

Fig. 163 On the rear seat backrest: openingthe tailboard.

Fig. 164 In the luggage compartment: open-ing the tailboard.

164


On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,there is a tailboard for transporting longitems in the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objectsshould be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) beforethey are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard

● Lower the centre armrest.

● Pull the release lever in the direction of thearrow and push the tailboard cover››› Fig. 163 1 down and forwards.


● Insert the long objects through the gapfrom the luggage compartment.

● Secure the objects with the seatbelt.

● Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard

● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. Thered mark on the luggage compartment sideshould never be visible.


● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

Note

The tailboard can also be opened from theluggage compartment. To do so, press the re-

lease lever down, in the direction of the ar-row, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 164.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 165 In the luggage compartment: fasten-ing rings

In the front and rear part of the luggage com-partment there are fastening rings to securethe luggage ››› Fig. 165.

In order to use the front fastening rings, theymust be lifted beforehand.

WARNING

If unsuitable or damaged belts or retainingstraps are used, they could break in the eventof braking or an accident. Objects could thenbe launched across the passenger compart-ment and cause serious or fatal injuries.

● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

● Belts and retaining straps should be se-curely fastened to the fastening rings.

● Objects in the luggage compartment thatare unsecured could move suddenly and mod-ify the handling of the vehicle.

● Secure all objects, little and large.

● Never exceed the maximum tensile load ofthe fastening ring when securing objects.

● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note

● The maximum tensile load that the fasten-ing rings can support is 3.5 kN.

● Belts and securing systems for the appro-priate load can be obtained from specialiseddealerships. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership for this.

● The fastening rings are rendered unusablefor versions with a spare wheel.

165

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Retaining hooks

Fig. 166 In the luggage compartment: retain-ing hooks

At the rear of the luggage compartment, onthe left and right, there are fixed retaininghooks ››› Fig. 166.

The retaining hooks have been designed tosecure light shopping bags.

WARNING

Never use the retaining hooks as fasteningrings. In case of sudden braking or an acci-dent, the hooks could break.

CAUTION

Each hook is designed for a maximum load of2.5 kg.

Net bag*

Fig. 167 In the luggage compartment: netbag hooked to the ground.

Fig. 168 In the luggage compartment: rings1 and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag.

The luggage compartment prevents light lug-gage from moving. The net bag has a zip andcan be used to store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the luggagecompartment in different ways.

Hooking the net bag into the luggage com-partment floor

● As applicable, lift the front fastening rings››› Fig. 167 2 .

● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings2 ››› . The bag zip should be facing up-

wards.

● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings1 .

Hook the net bag next to the load threshold

● Secure the short net hooks to the fasteningrings ››› Fig. 168 1 ››› . The bag zip shouldbe facing upwards.

● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag

The hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Remove the hooks and the net bag strapsfrom the fastening rings and from the baghooks.

● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-ment.

WARNING

To secure the elastic net bag on the fasteningrings it must be stretched out. Once hookedup it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or un-hooked incorrectly the hooks could cause in-juries.

166


● Always secure the net hooks properly sothat they do not suddenly release from thefastening rings when hooking or unhookingthem.

● On hooking or unhooking them, protectyour eyes and face in case the hooks are re-leased suddenly.

● Always hook up the net bag hooks in thedescribed order. If a hook is unexpectedly re-leased the risk of injury is increased.

Luggage compartment variable floor

Fig. 169 Luggage compartment variablefloor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 170 Luggage compartment variablefloor: sloped position.

Variable floor in the high position

● To move from the low position to the highposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 169 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .

● Move the floor forward over the supports asfar as the rear seat backrest and then lowerthe floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in the low position

● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 169 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .

● Now let the front part fall to the floor andslide the floor forwards as far as the rear seatbackrest; lower the floor at the same timewith the handle 1 . »

167

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

● Lift the variable floor in the high positionusing the handle 1 ››› Fig. 169, pull it upand push it towards the backrest of the rearseats until the floor folds along the hinge lineand the movable part of the floor is restingon itself.

● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 170(arrows).

Variable floor with folded seats

● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 169 1 and pull it back a little.

● Push the variable floor towards the foldedrear seats with the handle 1 using somedownward pressure so that the moving partof the floor is flush with the backs of the rearseats.

WARNING

During a sudden driving or braking manoeu-vre, or in the event of an accident, objectscould be flung though the interior and causeserious or fatal injuries.

● Always secure objects, even when the lug-gage compartment floor is properly lifted.

● Only objects that do not protrude morethan 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-

ried between the rear seat and the raised lug-gage compartment floor.

● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-proximately 7.5 kg may be carried betweenthe rear seat and the raised luggage compart-ment floor.

CAUTION

● The maximum weight that can be loaded onthe luggage compartment variable floor inthe top position is 150 kg.

● Do not let the luggage compartment floorfall when closing it. Always carefully guide itdownwards in a controlled manner. Other-wise, the lining and the floor of the luggagecompartment could be damaged.

Note

SEAT recommends the use of straps to secureobjects to retaining rings.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, crossbars or conventional roof carrier systems can-not be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-proved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri-er system should be disassembled.

● When they are not used.

● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.

● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING

When heavy or bulky loads are transportedon the roof carrier system, car driving per-formance is affected, as the centre of gravityshifts and there is greater wind resistance.

● Always secure the load properly using beltsor retaining straps that are suitable and in agood condition.

● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg-ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre ofgravity and driving performance.

● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-fic conditions.

CAUTION

● Remove the cross bars and the roof carriersystem before entering a car wash.

168


● Vehicle height is increased by the installa-tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system andthe load secured on them. For this purpose,check that your vehicle's height does not sur-pass the headspace limit, for example, for un-derpasses or for entering garage doors.

● Cross bars, the roof carrier system and theload secured on them should not interferewith the roof aerial or hamper the path of thepanoramic sun roof and the rear lid.

● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.


When cross bars and a roof carrier system areinstalled, the increased air resistance meansthat the vehicle uses more fuel.

Attach the cross bars and the roof car-rier system

Fig. 171 Attachment points for the roof rail-ings for the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,special fixtures must be used to safely trans-port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards orboats on the roof. Suitable accessories canbe acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof car-rier system properly. Always take the assem-bly instructions that come with the crossbarsand the roof carrier system in question intoaccount.

The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-ings. The distance between crossbars››› Fig. 171 A should be between 70 and 90cm and the distance between the crossbars

and the brackets of the roof railings B mustbe 15 cm.

WARNING

Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roof andcause an accident and injuries.

● Always take the manufacturer assembly in-structions into account.

● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys-tem when they are in perfect condition andare properly secured.

● Secure the crossbars and the roof carriersystem properly.

● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them afteryou have travelled a short distance. Whenmaking long trips, check the threaded jointswhenever you stop for a rest.

● Always fit the special roof carrier systemscorrectly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.

● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

Note

Always read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carriersystem carefully and keep them in the vehi-cle.

169

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› .

Maximum authorised roof load

The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.This figure comes from the combined weightof the roof carrier, the cross bars and the loaditself on the roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not beable to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load

Distribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachments

Once the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-

ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-cy.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof loadcan result in accidents and considerable vehi-cle damage.

● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the vehi-cle's maximum authorised weight.

● Never exceed the load capacity of the crossbars and the roof carrier system, even if themaximum authorised roof load has not beenreached.

● Secure heavy items as far forward as possi-ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.

WARNING

If the load is loose or not secured, it could fallfrom the roof carrier system or cause acci-dents and injuries.

● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

● Secure the load properly.

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and cool-ing

Introduction


Viewing Climatronic information

On the screen of Climatronic control unit andon the screen of the factory-fitted Easy Con-nect system, the theoretical values of thetemperature zones are shown.

The unit of temperature measurement can bechanged in the Easy Connect system.

Dust and pollen filter

The dust and pollen filter with its activatedcharcoal cartridge serves as a barrier againstimpurities in the air taken into the vehicle in-terior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changedregularly so that air conditioner performanceis not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely dueto use in areas with very high levels of airpollution, the filter must be changed morefrequently than stated in the Service Sched-ule.

170

Air conditioning

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.

● Always ensure that all windows are free ofice and snow, and that they are not fogged,so as to maintain good visibility of everythingoutside.

● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature. Only drive whenyou have good visibility.

● Always ensure that you use the heatingsystem, fresh air system, air conditioner andthe heated rear window to maintain good visi-bility to the outside.

● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation modeswitched on, the windows can mist over veryquickly, considerably limiting visibility.

● Switch air recirculation mode off when it isnot required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re-duce driver concentration possibly resultingin a serious accident.

● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will not berefreshed.

CAUTION

● To replace the pollen filter, always visit aservice centre.

● Switch the air conditioner off if you think itmay be broken. This will avoid additionaldamage. Have the air conditioner checked bya specialised workshop.

● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.

Note

● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried. Toprevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recom-mends leaving the cooling system (compres-sor) turned on. To do this, press the button . The button lamp should light up.

● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature.

● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-sure heating and cooling are not impaired,and to prevent the windows from mistingover.

Operating the Climatronic through theEasy Connect system*

3 Applies to vehicles with a Media SystemTouch/Colour.

Fig. 172 Easy Connect screen: air conditionermenu.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possibleto perform various adjustments to the Clima-tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu

● Press the button on the Climatroniccontrol panel.

● OR: press the button in Easy Connect.With the rotating switch select the air con-ditioner menu and open it.

On the touch screen you can see and changethe current settings, for example, the temper-ature set for the driver and passenger sides,the air distribution and the fan speed. »

171

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

To switch a function on or off, or to select asubmenu, you must press the correspondingfunction button.

Function button: Function

OFF Switch off and switch on the Climatronic.

SYNC Synchronise driver and front passengertemperatures.

SETTINGS

The air conditioning settings submenu isopened. The following settings can alsobe adjusted:

Air conditioning profile.: Adjustthe power of the fan in AUTO mode. Youcan choose between low, medium andhigh.

Automatic air recirculation:Switching automatic air recirculation onand off ››› page 174.

BACK : Close the submenu.

* The auxiliary heater submenu opens.

*It enables manual switching on or off ofthe windscreen heater.

It enables activation and deactivation ofthe PureAir and opens the submenu.

Operating the Climatronic through theEasy Connect system*

3 Applies to vehicles with Media System Plus / NaviSystem / Navi System Plus.

Fig. 173 Easy Connect screen: air conditionermenu.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possibleto perform various adjustments to the Clima-tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu

● Press the button on the Climatroniccontrol panel.

On the top of the screen you can see andchange the current settings, such as, for ex-ample, the temperature set for the driver sideand for that of passenger. Temperatures upto +22°C (+72°F) are shown with blue arrows,and temperatures over +22°C (+72°F) withred arrows.

To switch a function on or off, or to select asubmenu, you must press the correspondingfunction button.


OFF Climatronic is switched off.

ON Climatronic is switched on.

SYNC Synchronise driver and front passengertemperatures.

SETTINGS

The air conditioning settings submenu isopened. The following settings can alsobe adjusted:

Automatic supplementary heater:to activate/deactivate the automatic acti-vation of the auxiliary heating for coldercountries (only for engines with auxiliaryheating). With the option deactivated, de-pending on the outside temperature theheating may need more time than normalto reach a comfortable temperature.

Automatic windscreen heating*: toswitch the automatic windscreen heatingon and off ››› page 175.

Automatic air recirculation: toswitch automatic air recirculation on andoff ››› page 174.

BACK : to close the submenu.

* The auxiliary heater submenu opens.

*It enables manual switching on or off ofthe windscreen heater.

172

Air conditioning


It enables activation and deactivation ofthe PureAir and opens the submenu.

Air conditioning user instructions

The interior cooling system only works whenthe engine is running and fan is switched on.

The air conditioner operates most effectivelywith the windows and the panoramic slidingsunroof closed. However, if the vehicle hasheated up after standing in the sun for sometime, the air inside can be cooled more quick-ly by opening the windows and the panoram-ic sliding sunroof briefly.

Climatronic: change the temperature unit onthe screen of the radio or on the factory-fit-ted navigation system

Changing the temperature display from Cel-sius to Fahrenheit on radio or on the factory-

fitted navigation system is done using themenu on the instrument panel››› page 36.

The cooling system cannot be activated

If the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on, this may be caused by the fol-lowing:

● The engine is not running.

● The fan is switched off.

● The air conditioner fuse has blown.

● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3°C (+38°F).

● The air conditioner compressor has beentemporarily switched off because the enginecoolant temperature is too high.

● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.


If the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle. This isnormal and does not indicate a leak!

Note

After starting the engine, any residual humid-ity in the air conditioner could mist over thewindscreen. Switch on the defrost function assoon as possible to clear the windscreen ofcondensation.

173

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Air outlets

Fig. 174 On the dash panel: air vents

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, air vents››› Fig. 174 1 should remain open.

● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel (de-tail) in the required direction to open andclose the air vents. When the thumbwheel isin the position, the corresponding air ventis closed.

● Change the air direction using the ventila-tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable airvents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwelland in the rear area of the interior.

Note

Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi-tive objects should never be placed in front ofthe air outlets as they may be damaged ormade unsuitable for use by the air comingfrom the air vents.

Air recirculation mode

Basic points

Air recirculation:

Manual recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high,selecting manual air recirculation mode for ashort period refreshes the vehicle interiormore quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode isswitched off when the button is press-ed or the air distributor turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculation modeon and off

To switch system on: press the button un-til the warning lamp lights up.

To switch system off: press the button un-til the warning lamp goes off.

174

Air conditioning

Functioning mode of automatic air recircula-tion (air conditioning menu)

With the automatic air recirculation mode ac-tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabininterior is enabled. If the system detects ahigh concentration of hazardous substancesin the ambient air, air recirculation mode isswitched on automatically. When the level ofimpurities drops to within a normal range, re-circulation mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasantsmells.

The air recirculation will not connect auto-matically in versions without humidity sensorand in the following external conditions:

● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C(+38°F).

● The cooling system is switched off and theoutside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).

● The cooling system is switched off, the out-side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) andthe windscreen wipers are switched on.

Activation/deactivation of automatic air recir-culation is done in the air conditioner menu,under Configuration.

WARNING


● If the cooling system is switched off and airrecirculation mode switched on, the windowscan mist over very quickly, considerably limit-ing visibility.

● Switch air recirculation mode off when it isnot required.

CAUTION

Do not smoke when air recirculation isswitched on in vehicles with an air condition-er. The smoke taken in could lie on the cool-ing system vaporiser and on the activatedcharcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen fil-ter, leading to a permanently unpleasantsmell.

Note

Climatronic: air recirculation mode is activa-ted to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasantodours from entering the vehicle interiorwhen it is in reverse and while the automaticwindscreen wiper is working.

Heated windscreen*

Fig. 175 Windscreen humidity and tempera-ture sensor.

The heated windscreen is comprised of a setof heated wires placed between the layers ofthe windscreen which, when electric currentis supplied to them, heat up and cause thetemperature of the glass to rise.

Its function is to assist the air-conditioningsystem to prevent the windscreen from mist-ing up or to demist it faster if it does mist up.

The system can be switched on manually orautomatically.

Manual activation

● Press the button in the Climatroniccontrol panel.

● Press the function button to switch thewindscreen heating on or off. »

175

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Automatic activation

To facilitate use of the heated windscreen itcan turn on automatically.

The Climatronic control panel can detect thedanger of the windscreen misting thanks toits temperature and humidity sensors,switching the system on or off accordingly››› Fig. 175. Moreover, it will also be activatedautomatically when the button ispressed on the Climatronic control panel.

Adjust it as follows for it to switch on auto-matically:


● Press the SETTINGS function button on theinfotainment system.

● Switch the function on or off by pressingthe Automatic windscreen heating function but-ton.

176

Air conditioning

Auxiliary heater (additionalheater)*

Introduction

The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the ve-hicle's tank and can be used while you aredriving and when the vehicle is stationary.

The auxiliary heater can be switched on usingthe fast heating button of the air condition-ing controls, with the remote control or bypreviously programming a departure time inthe auxiliary heater menu of the infotainmentsystem.

In winter, with the auxiliary heater switchedon, you can defog the windscreen and leaveit free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be-fore you start driving.

If the outside temperature is very high, thevehicle interior can be ventilated with the en-gine off using the auxiliary heater.

WARNING

Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diameteror any other button battery can cause seriousand even fatal injuries within a very shorttime.

● Always keep the remote control, keyringswith batteries, the spare batteries, buttonbatteries and all other batteries over 20 mmout of reach of children.

● If you suspect that someone may haveswallowed a battery, seek immediate medicalattention.

WARNING

The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes containcarbon monoxide, an odourless and colour-less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can causepeople to lose consciousness. It can alsocause death.

● Never switch on the auxiliary heater orleave it running in enclosed spaces or areaswith no ventilation.

● Never programme the auxiliary heater sothat it switches itself on and is running in anenclosed space or an area with no ventila-tion.

WARNING

The components of the auxiliary heater areextremely hot and could cause a fire.

● Always park your vehicle so that no part ofthe exhaust system can come in contact witheasily flammable materials that might be be-low the vehicle, such as dried grass.

CAUTION

Never place food, medicines or other temper-ature-sensitive objects close to the air vents.Food, medicines and other objects sensitiveto heat or cold may be damaged or made un-

suitable for use by the air coming from thevents.

Note

After switching the engine on with a 12-voltbattery that is heavily discharged or newlychanged or after a jump start some systemsettings (such as the time, the date, the per-sonalised comfort settings and the program-ming) might be altered or deleted. Check andcorrect these settings once the battery is suf-ficiently charged.

Switching on and off the auxiliaryheater

Switching the auxiliary heater on:

Manually with the fast heating button of the airconditioner controls. The control lamp of thebutton will light up ››› page 170.

Manually with the remote control ››› page 178.

Automatically by programming and activating adeparture time ››› page 179.

Switching the auxiliary heater off:

Manually with the fast heating button of the airconditioner controls. The control lamp of thebutton goes off ››› page 170.

Manually with the remote control ››› page 178. »177

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Switching the auxiliary heater off:

Automatically once the programmed departuretime has arrived or after the programmed oper-ating time has elapsed ››› page 179.

Automatically when the control lamp (fuellevel indicator) ››› page 292 lights up.

Automatically when the 12-volt battery chargeis too low ››› page 305.

Special feature

Once switched off, the auxiliary heater willcontinue to operate for a short period of timein order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys-tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes.

Remote control

Fig. 176 Auxiliary heater: remote control.

Fig. 176 Meaning

Switch the auxiliary heater on

Switch the auxiliary heater off

1 Control lamp

If the buttons of the remote control are press-ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxil-iary heater involuntarily, even when it is outof range or when the control lamp is flashing.

Control lamp on the remote control

When the buttons are pressed, the controllamp on the remote control provides the userwith different information:

Control lamp 1 Meaning

It will light for about 2 sec-onds in green.

The auxiliary heater hasbeen switched on usingthe button.

It will light for about 2 sec-onds in red.

The auxiliary heater hasbeen switched off usingthe button.

It flashes green slowly forapproximately 2 seconds(approximately 4 times persecond).

No ona) signal has beenreceived.

Control lamp 1 Meaning

It flashes green quickly forapproximately 2 seconds(approximately 10 timesper second).

The auxiliary heater islocked.Possible causes: The fueltank is almost empty, the12-volt battery charge istoo low or there is a fault.

It flashes orange for ap-proximately 2 seconds(approximately 4 times persecond).

No offa) signal has beenreceived.

It will light for about 2 sec-onds in orange, thengreen or red.

The remote control batteryis almost flat. However,the on or off signal hasbeen received.

It will light for about 2 sec-onds in orange, then itflashes green or red.

The remote control batteryis almost flat. No on or offsignal has been received.

It flashes orange for ap-proximately 5 seconds.

The remote control batteryis flat. No on or off signalhas been received.

a) The remote control is out of range. In this case it will be nec-essary to get closer to the vehicle and press the correspondingbutton again.

Replacing the remote control battery

If, when pressing the buttons of the remotecontrol, control lamp 1 flashes orange forapproximately 5 seconds or it does notswitch on, the remote control battery willneed replacing.

178

Air conditioning

The battery is located beneath a cover on theback of the remote control.

● To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot-tom and slide it down.

● Remove the old battery.

● Insert the new battery. When doing so, takeinto account the polarity and use batteries ofthe same type ››› .

● Replace the battery cover by inserting thetabs at the top and pressing the bottom.

Range

The receiver is inside the vehicle. The remotecontrol, when fitted with new batteries, has arange of several hundred metres. Obstaclesbetween the remote control and the vehicle,bad weather conditions and discharged bat-teries can considerably reduce the range ofthe remote control.

CAUTION

● The radio frequency remote control con-tains electronic components. Therefore, avoidgetting it wet and exposing it to knocks or di-rect sunlight.

● The use of inappropriate batteries maydamage the radio frequency remote control.For this reason, always replace the used bat-tery with another of the same voltage, sizeand specifications.


● Please dispose of your used batteries cor-rectly and with respect for the environment.

● The remote control battery may containperchlorate. Observe the legal provisions re-garding disposal.

● Care should be taken so as not to operatethe remote control unintentionally so as toprevent the auxiliary heater being switchedon accidentally.

Programming the auxiliary heater

Before programming it, check that the vehi-cle's date and time are set correctly ››› .

The auxiliary heater is programmed in theAuxiliary heater menu of the infotain-ment system.

Open the Auxiliary heater menu.


● Press the function button.

Function button: function

Switch off : The auxiliary heater is immediately switchedoff.

Function button: function

Heat , Ventilate : Set to heat or ventilate the vehicle interi-or when the auxiliary heater is switched on. By pressingthe function button , you can select the desiredmode.

Set : Opens the Auxiliary heater menu.

Departure time 1 , Departure time 2 , Departure time 3 :Three different departure times (hh.mm) may beprogrammed. If the auxiliary heater should onlybe switched on a certain day of the week, this canalso be selected.

Duration : The duration determines the operatingtime of the auxiliary heater when switched on us-ing the fast heating button on the air condi-tioning controls. The duration is also used to cal-culate the departure time for the manual air con-ditioner. It can be set between 10 and 60 mi-nutes at 10-minute intervals.

This returns to the main menu.

The programmed departure time determinesthe approximate time it should take to reachthe temperature set in the vehicle. The startof the heating operation is determined auto-matically depending on the outside tempera-ture.

Checking the programming

When a departure time is activated and theignition is switched off the control lamp ofthe fast heating button lights up for ap-proximately 10 seconds. »

179

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

Never programme the auxiliary heater so thatit switches itself on and is running in an en-closed space or an area with no ventilation.The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes containcarbon monoxide, an odourless and colour-less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can causepeople to lose consciousness. It can alsocause death.

Operating instructions

The auxiliary heater exhaust system locatedbelow the vehicle must be kept clear of snow,mud and other objects. The exhaust fumesmust be able to exit freely. The emissionsgenerated by the auxiliary heater are re-moved via an exhaust pipe fitted underneaththe vehicle.

On heating the vehicle interior, depending onthe outside temperature, the warm air is firstdirected at the windscreen and then to therest of the vehicle interior through the airvents. Directing the diffusers – towards thewindows for example – can affect air distribu-tion.

When will the auxiliary heater not be activa-ted?

● The auxiliary heater requires about asmuch power as the dipped beam headlights.If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the

auxiliary heater switches off automaticallyand cannot be switched on. This avoids prob-lems when starting the engine.

● The heating must be activated every timeyou want to set off. Similarly, the departuretime must reactivate each time.

● The control lamp (fuel level indicator)lights up.

Note

● Noises will be heard while the auxiliaryheater is running.

● When the air humidity is high and the in-side temperature low, condensation from theheating and ventilating system may evapo-rate when the auxiliary heater is switched on.In this case, steam may be released from un-derneath the vehicle. This does not meanthat there is a vehicle malfunction.

● If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on aslope, the operation of the auxiliary heatermay be restricted if the fuel tank level is low(just above the reserve level).

● If the auxiliary heater is used a number oftimes for a long period of time, the 12-voltbattery will lose its charge. To recharge thebattery, the vehicle must be driven for a num-ber of kilometres from time to time. As aguideline: The journey should last approxi-mately as long as the heater was connected.

● At temperatures below +5°C (+41°F), theauxiliary heater may switch itself on automat-ically when the engine is switched on. The

auxiliary heater is switched off again after acertain time.

180

Driving

Driving

Starting and stopping the en-gine

Switching the ignition on and startingthe engine with the key

Fig. 177 Ignition key positions.


Diesel engines can take a few seconds longerthan usual to start on cold days. Thereforethe clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or thebrake pedal (automatic gearbox) must re-main pressed until the engine starts up. Dur-ing preheating, the warning lamp remainslit.

The preheating time depends on the coolantand exterior temperatures. With the engine at

operating temperature, or at outside temper-atures above +8°C, the warning lamp willlight up for about one second. This meansthat the engine starts immediately.

If the engine does not immediately start up,interrupt the starting process and try againafter 30 seconds. To start the engine again,return the key to position 1 .

Start-Stop System*

If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stopsystem* switches off the engine, the ignitionremains switched on.

Automatic gearbox: before leaving the vehi-cle, make sure that the ignition is switchedoff and the selector lever is in position P.

Driver messages on the instrument paneldisplay

Press the clutchThis message appears on vehicles with amanual gearbox if the driver tries to start theengine without having the clutch pedalpressed. The engine will only start if youpress the clutch pedal.

Press the brakeThis message appears on vehicles with anautomatic gearbox if the driver tries to startthe engine without having the brake pedalpressed.

Select N or PThis message appears if you try to start orstop the engine when the selector lever ofthe automatic gearbox is not in position P orN. The engine can only start or stop in certainpositions.

Engage position P; the vehiclecan move; doors can only close inposition P.For safety reasons, this driver message ap-pears and an audible warning sounds if theselector lever of the automatic gearbox is notin position P after you switch off the ignition.Put the selector lever in position P, otherwisethe vehicle could roll away.

Gear change: selector lever inthe drive position!This driver message is displayed when theselector lever is not in the position P whenthe driver door is opened. Additionally, abuzzer will sound. Put the selector lever inposition P, otherwise the vehicle could rollaway.

Ignition is switched onThis driver message is displayed and a buz-zer is sounded when the driver door isopened with the ignition switched on. »

181

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

● Never run the engine in confined spaces, asthe exhaust gases are poisonous.

CAUTION

Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle andextreme load conditions until the engine hasreached its normal operating temperature,otherwise this can damage the engine.


Do not warm up the engine by idling it. Youshould drive off as soon as you start the en-gine. This will help avoid unnecessary ex-haust emissions.

Note

● If it is difficult to turn the ignition key tothe position 2 , turn the steering wheel toboth sides to release the steering lock.

● When starting from cold, the engine may bea little noisy for the first few seconds until oilpressure has built up in the hydraulic valvelifters. This is quite normal, and no cause forconcern.

● If the vehicle battery is disconnected andreconnected, the key must remain in the posi-tion 1 for around 5 seconds before startingup.

● Vehicles with automatic gearbox: depend-ing on the country, after switching off the ig-nition, you can only remove the ignition key if

the selector lever is in position “P” (parkinglock). Next, the selector lever is locked.

Switching off the engine with the key

Switching off the engine

– Stop the vehicle.

– Turn the ignition key to position 1

››› Fig. 177.

Engaging the steering wheel lock

In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni-tion key can only be removed when the selec-tor lever is in position P.

– Remove the key from the ignition in posi-tion 1 ››› Fig. 177 ››› .

– Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en-gage.

Possible vehicle theft is prevented with thesteering lock engaged.

WARNING

● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The brake servo and powersteering functions will not be completely cov-ered under warranty. More force may also beneeded to turn the steering wheel or to brake.As you cannot steer and brake in the normalmanner, there is a greater risk of accidentsand serious injury.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-ing could suddenly lock, making it impossibleto steer the vehicle: risk of accident!

● Always take the key with you when youleave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-tant if there are children in the vehicle, asthey might otherwise be able to start the en-gine or use power-operated equipment (e.g.the electric windows), which could cause in-juries.

CAUTION

If the engine has been running under highload for a long time, there is a risk of heatbuilding up in the engine compartment afterit has been switched off; this could cause en-gine damage. For this reason, you should idlethe engine for approximately 2 minutes be-fore you switch it off.

Note

After the engine is switched off the radiatorfan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even ifthe ignition is switched off. It is also possiblethat the fan turns itself on once more if thecoolant temperature increases due to theheat accumulated in the engine compartmentor due to its prolonged exposure to solar ra-diation.

182

Driving

Starter button*

Fig. 178 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: starter button.

Fig. 179 On the right of the steering column:emergency start.

The vehicle engine can be started with astarter button (Press & Drive). To do so, theremust be a valid key inside the vehicle in thearea of the front or rear seats.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access››› page 125 system, the engine can also bestarted with the key in the luggage compart-ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manually

Briefly push the starter button without touch-ing the brake or clutch pedal ››› .

For vehicles with both manual and automatictransmission, the starter button textSTART ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat

when the system is preset for switching theignition on and off.

Automatic ignition switch-off

If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-hicle key with them but leaving the ignitionon, the ignition is not switched off automati-cally. The ignition is switched off automati-cally by pressing the lock button on the re-mote control or manually by pressing thesensor surface on the door lever ››› Fig. 132

Emergency starting function

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-

ample, the battery of the vehicle key buttonis very low or flat:

● Immediately after pushing the starter but-ton, keep the vehicle key next to the righttrim of the steering column ››› Fig. 179, asclose as possible to the Kessy logo.

● The ignition connects and the engine startsautomatically.

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not switch off after brieflypressing the starter button, an emergencydisconnect will be required:

● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-ond ››› .

● The engine turns off automatically.

Engine restart feature

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicleafter the engine stops, you will only have 5seconds to restart it. A warning will displayon the dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible tostart the engine without a valid key insidethe vehicle. »

183

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve-hicles with the Start-Stop system

The ignition is switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle is stopped and the auto-matic engine shutdown is active, if:

● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,

● the driver does not step on any pedal,

● the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, ifthe dipped beam is on, the side light re-mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locksthe vehicle or manually turns off the light, theside light goes out.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle couldresult in serious injury.

● When switching on the ignition, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwisethe engine could start immediately.

WARNING

If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.

● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor-ised person could lock the vehicle, start theengine or connect the ignition and, in this

way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. thewindows).

Note

● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon-nect the ignition manually and, if appropri-ate, take into account the instructions on thescreen of the dash panel.

● If the vehicle is stationary for a long timewith the ignition on, the vehicle batterymight be discharged and it might not be pos-sible to start the engine.

● In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay inthe engine starting if it requires preheating.

● If during the STOP phase you press theSTART ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes.

● If the indication “Start-Stop system deacti-vated: Start the engine manually” is dis-played on the dash panel display, theSTART ENGINE STOP button will blink.

Starting the engine3 Valid for vehicles: with Keyless Access

StepStarting the engine with the starterbutton ››› page 183 (Press & Drive).

1.Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5is performed.

StepStarting the engine with the starterbutton ››› page 183 (Press & Drive).

1a.In vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressand hold the clutch down until the enginestarts.

2.Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selec-tor lever in position P or N.

3.

Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 178without pressing the accelerator. For the en-gine to start there must be a valid key in thevehicle.After starting the engine, the light of theSTART ENGINE STOP button changes to a fixed

light indicating that the engine has started.

4.

If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor approx. 1 minute before trying again. Ifnecessary, perform an emergency start››› page 183.

5.Disconnect the electronic parking brakewhen you are about to start driving››› page 186.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle with the engine run-ning, especially if a gear or gear range is en-gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly moveor something strange could happen thatwould cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause asudden increase in the engine speed.

184

Driving

● Never use sprays to cold start the engine.

CAUTION

● The starter motor or the engine may bedamaged if you try to start the engine whiledriving or if you restart it immediately afterswitching it off.

● If the engine is cold, avoid high enginespeeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap-id acceleration.

● Do not start the engine by pushing the ve-hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enterthe catalytic converter and damage it.

Note

● Do not wait until the engine warms up withthe vehicle stationary; if you have good visi-bility through the windows, start driving im-mediately. This helps the engine reach oper-ating temperature faster and reduces emis-sions.

● Electrical components with a high powerconsumption are switched off temporarilywhen the engine starts.

● When starting with a cold engine, noiselevels may briefly increase. This is quite nor-mal, and no cause for concern.

● When the outside temperature is below+5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, somesmoke may appear under the vehicle whenthe fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Stopping the engine3 Valid for vehicles: with Keyless Access

StepSwitch off the engine with the starterbutton ››› page 183.

1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› .

2.Press and hold the brake pedal until the step4 is performed.

3.If you are driving an automatic vehicle, placethe selector lever in position P.

4.Connect the electronic parking brake››› page 186.

5.

Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 178.The START ENGINE STOP button blinks again. Ifthe engine fails to switch off, perform anemergency disconnect ››› page 183.

6.If the vehicle is equipped with a manualgearbox, put it into 1st or reverse.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehicleis moving. This could cause loss of control ofthe vehicle, accidents and serious injury.

● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.

● The brake servo does not work with the en-gine off. Therefore, you need to press thebreak pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

● Power steering does not work when the en-gine is not running. You need more strengthto steer when the engine is switched off.

● If the ignition is switched off, the steeringcolumn could be locked, making it impossibleto control the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the engine is made to work hard for a longtime, it may overheat after being switchedoff. To prevent damage to the engine beforeswitching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi-nutes in neutral.

Note

After switching off the engine, the cooling fanmay continue to operate in the engine com-partment for a few more minutes, even withthe ignition off. The radiator fan is automati-cally switched off.

“My Beat” Function

For vehicles with a convenience key there isthe “My Beat” function. This feature providesan additional indication of the vehicle igni-tion system.

When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by openingthe doors with the remote control, theSTART ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling at-

tention to the relevant starter system button. »185

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Upon switching the ignition on/off, the lightof the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. Withthe engine switched off, after a few seconds,the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashingand goes out.

With the engine running, theSTART ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi-

cating that the engine is running. The timethat lapses between the moment the userstarts the engine with the START ENGINE STOP

button and the lighting changes from flash-ing to fixed will depend on specific enginesize characteristics. Upon switching the igni-tion off with the START ENGINE STOP button, itstarts flashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the“My Beat” function also offers additional in-formation:

● When the engine stops during the Stopphase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but-ton stays on, since, even though the engineis off, the Start-Stop system is active.

● When the engine cannot be stated againwith the Start-Stop system, ››› page 208, andneeds to be started manually, theSTART ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate

this fact.

Braking and parking

Electronic parking brake

Fig. 180 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: electronic parking brake button.

The electronic parking brake replaces thehandbrake.

Activating the electronic parking brake

The electronic parking brake can be activatedwhenever the vehicle is at a standstill, evenwhen the ignition is switched off. Activate itwhenever you leave or park the vehicle.

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 180 button.

● The parking brake is activated when thecontrol light of the ››› Fig. 180 button (arrow)and the red control light of the display inthe dash panel are on.

● Release the button.

Releasing the electronic parking brake


● Press the button ››› Fig. 180. At the sametime step hard on the brake pedal or, if theengine is running, press the accelerator ped-al slightly.

● The control light of the ››› Fig. 180 button(arrow) and the red control light of the dis-play in the dash panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic parkingbrake on starting the engine

The electronic parking brake is automaticallyswitched off when starting if, after the driv-er's door is closed and the driver's seat beltfastened, any of the following situations takeplace:

● On vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Agear range is engaged or the vehicle isswitched to another one and the acceleratorpedal is lightly pressed.

● In vehicles with a manual gearbox: Theclutch pedal is pressed fully before startingoff and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-ed.

● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there areexceptions that allow the automatic parkingbrake to be released without the driver's seatbelt being fastened.

The parking brake can be prevented from be-ing automatically released by continuously

186

Driving

pulling up the ››› Fig. 180 switch whenstarting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon-nected until the button is released. Thiscan facilitate starting off when a heavy loadis towed ››› page 273.

Automatic activation of the electronic park-ing brake when exiting the vehicle incorrect-ly

In vehicles with automatic transmission, theelectronic parking brake is activated auto-matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectlyif:

● The selector lever is in the D/S or R posi-tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate.

● AND: the vehicle is stationary.

● AND: the driver door is open.

Emergency braking function

Only use the emergency brake function if youare unable to stop the vehicle with the footbrake ››› .

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 180 button inthis position to forcefully stop the vehicle. Atthe same time, an acoustic warning can beheard.

● To stop the braking process, release thebutton or press the accelerator.

WARNING

The improper use of the electronic parkingbrake can cause accidents and serious injury.

● Never use the electronic parking brake tostop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.Braking distances can be considerably lon-ger, since, under certain circumstances, onlythe rear wheels brake. Always use the footbrake.

● Never accelerate from the engine when agear range or a gear is engaged and the en-gine is running. The vehicle could move, evenif the electronic parking brake is activated.

CAUTION

To prevent the vehicle from unintentionallymoving when parking it, first apply the elec-tronic parking brake and then remove yourfoot from the brake pedal.

Note

● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, releas-ing the clutch and accelerating at the sametime automatically disconnects the electronicparking brake.

● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not bepossible to disconnect the electronic parkingbrake. Use the jump-start ››› page 69.

● When the electronic parking brake is ap-plied or released, noises may be heard.

● The system performs automatic and audi-ble tests sporadically in the parked vehicle if

some time elapses without the electronicparking brake being used.

Parking

The electronic parking brake should alwaysbe applied when the vehicle is parked.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

– Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

– Apply the electronic parking brake.

– Put it in 1st gear.

– Switch the engine off and remove the keyfrom the ignition. Turn the steering wheelslightly to engage the steering lock.

– Never leave a vehicle key in the vehicle.

Additional notes on parking the vehicle ongradients:

Turn the steering wheel so that the vehiclerolls against the kerb if it started to roll.

● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill,turn the front wheels so that they point to-wards the kerb.

● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turnthe front wheels so that they point away fromthe kerb. »

187

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying theelectronic parking brake firmly and putting itin 1st gear.

WARNING

● Take measures to reduce the risk of injurywhen you leave your vehicle unattended.

● Never park where the hot exhaust systemcould ignite inflammable materials, such asdry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.

● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain inthe vehicle when it is locked. They would beunable to open the vehicle from the inside,and could become trapped in the vehicle inan emergency. In the event of an emergency,locked doors will delay assistance to vehicleoccupants.

● Never leave children alone in the vehicle.They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-ample, by releasing the electronic parkingbrake or the gearshift lever, which wouldcause the vehicle to move, but uncontrolla-bly.

● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside the vehi-cle. This can be fatal.

Information on the brakes

New brake pads

For the first 400 km (250 miles), new brakepads have not yet reached their maximumbraking capacity, and need to be “run in”

first. However, you can compensate for theslightly reduced braking effect by applyingmore pressure on the brake pedal. Avoidoverloading the brakes while running themin.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. This isa particular problem in urban traffic andshort stretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking forceand the environmental conditions (for exam-ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.)noises may be produced on braking.

Wet roads or road salt

In certain situations (for example, on drivingthrough flooded areas, in severe downpoursor after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-tion could be delayed if the discs and padsare damp, or frozen in winter. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wip-ers activated, the brake pads will brieflytouch the brake discs. This takes place, al-though unnoticeable to the driver, at regularintervals to improve the response time of thebrakes when they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is drivenfor some distance without using the brakeswhen there is a lot of salt on the road in win-ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on thediscs and pads can be removed by gently ap-plying the brakes a few times.

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or ifrust has formed on the disks, it is advisableto clean off the pads and disks by brakingfirmly a few times at a moderately high speed››› .

Fault in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediatelyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the fault repaired. Drive there slowlyand remember that you will have to applymore pressure on the brake pedal and allowfor longer stopping distances.

188

Driving

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake flu-id level is monitored electronically.

Brake servo

The brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

WARNING

● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brakesystem only in a suitable traffic situation. Donot put other road users in danger: there isrisk of causing an accident.

● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Failureto follow this instruction could result in anaccident.

● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and issubjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles canform in the brake system. This reduces the ef-ficiency of the brakes.

CAUTION

● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving yourfoot on the pedal when it is not necessary tobrake. This overheats the brakes, resulting inlonger stopping distances and greater wear.

● Before driving down a long, steep gradient,it is advisable to reduce speed and select alower gear. This makes use of engine braking

and relieves the brakes. If you still have touse the brakes, it is better to brake firmly atintervals than to apply the brakes continu-ously.

Note

● If the brake servo is out of action, for exam-ple when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal to make up for the lack ofservo assistance.

● If you wish to equip the vehicle with acces-sories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers,it is important that the flow of air to the frontwheels is not obstructed, otherwise thebrakes can overheat.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

Electronic stability control (ESC)

The ESC helps to improve safety. It reducesthe tendency to skid and improves the stabil-ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asvehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspinon the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehi-cle by braking individual wheels or by reduc-ing the engine torque. The warning lamp willflash on the instrument panel when the ESCis intervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the

traction control system (ASR), electronic dif-ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control(XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by chang-ing the torque.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-der braking until the vehicle has reached avirtual standstill. You can continue to steerthe vehicle even when the brakes are on full.Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do notpump the brakes. You will feel the brake ped-al pulsate while the ABS is working.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)

The brake assist system can reduce the re-quired braking distance. The braking force isautomatically boosted if you press the brakepedal quickly in an emergency. You mustkeep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR)

In the event of wheelspin, the traction controlsystem reduces the engine torque to matchthe amount of grip available. This helps thecar to start moving, accelerate or climb a gra-dient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakesthe spinning wheel and directs the power to »

189

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

the other driven wheel. This function is activeup to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheelfrom overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switchon again automatically when the brake hascooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*

If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will controlthe following: Tractor-trailers tend to sway.When the swaying of the trailer is felt by thevehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-matically brake the towing vehicle within thelimits of the system and mitigate the sway.Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not availablein all countries.

Electronic torque management (XDS)

When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turnat a higher speed than the inner wheel. Inthis way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-er wheel) receives less drive torque than theinner wheel. This may mean that in certainsituations the torque delivered to the innerwheel is too high, causing the wheels tospin. On the other hand, the outer wheel isreceiving a lower drive torque than it couldtransmit. This causes an overall loss of lateralgrip on the front axle, resulting in understeeror “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS system can detect and correct thiseffect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the driver'sdesired trajectory is much more precise.

The XDS system works in combination withthe ESC and is always active, even when ASRtraction control is disconnected, or the ESC inSport mode or disconnected.

Multi-collision brake

In an accident, the multi-collision brake canhelp the driver by braking to avoid the risk ofskidding during the accident, which couldlead to further collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, sideor rear accidents, when the airbag controlunit records its activation level and the acci-dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes thevehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-board network

The following actions control automatic brak-ing during the accident:

● When the driver presses the accelerator,the automatic braking does not take place.

● When the braking pressure through press-ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-

tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brakeautomatically.

● Multi-collision braking will not be availableif ESC is malfunctioning.

WARNING

● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electronictorque control system cannot exceed the lim-its imposed by the laws of physics. Alwaysbear this in mind, especially on wet or slip-pery roads. If you notice the systems cuttingin, you should reduce your speed immediate-ly to suit the road and traffic conditions. Donot be encouraged to take risks by the pres-ence of more safety systems. If you do, an ac-cident may occur.

● Please remember that the accident risk al-ways increases if you drive fast, especially incorners or on a slippery road, or if you followtoo close behind the vehicle in front of you.The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS and the elec-tronic torque control system cannot preventaccidents: risk of accidents!

● Accelerate with caution on slippery surfa-ces (for example, icy or snow-covered). De-spite the control systems, the driven wheelscould spin, affecting the stability of the vehi-cle: risk of accident!

Note

● The ABS and ASR will only operate correctlyif the four wheels have identical tyres. Anydifferences in the rolling radius of the tyres

190

Driving

can cause the system to reduce engine powerwhen this is not desired.

● The regulating processes of the systemscan make noises when they intervene.

● If the warning lamp lights up, or alter-natively, there could be a fault ››› page 119.

Switching on/off the ESC and ASR

The ESC is switched on automatically whenthe engine is started, and only works whenthe engine is running and includes the ABS,EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR function should only be switched offin situations in which traction is insufficient,including:

● When driving in deep snow or on surfacesthat are not very firm.

● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.

Then switch the ASR function back on.

Depending on the finishes and versions,there is the possibility of disconnecting onlythe ASR or activating the ESC Sport mode.

Disable ASR

The Easy Connect system menu is used toswitch off the ASR ››› page 120. The tractioncontrol system will be disabled.

The control lamp lights up. For vehicleswith a driver information system* the driverwill be informed that ASR is disabled.

Activate ASR

The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 120is used to switch on the ASR. The tractioncontrol system will be enabled.

The control lamp switches off. For vehicleswith a driver information system* the driverwill be informed that ASR is enabled.

ESC in “Sport” mode

Sport mode can be connected via the EasyConnect ››› page 120 system menu. In front-wheel drive vehicles, the interventions by theESC and the ASR are limited. In four-wheeldrive vehicles, the interventions by the ESCare limited and the ASR is switched off com-pletely ››› .

The control lamp lights up. For vehicleswith a driver information system* the driverwill be informed that:

Electronic Stability Control(ESC): sport. Warning! Limitedstability

Disable ESC “Sport” mode

Through the Easy Connect system menu››› page 120. The warning lamp will switchoff. For vehicles with a driver information sys-tem* the driver will be informed that:

Electronic Stability Control(ESC): On

ESC in “Offroad”1) mode

Turn the Driving Experience button to selectthe Offroad mode and connect it››› page 243. The interventions of the ESC, aswell as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt toirregular terrain.

In the following exceptional situations it maymake sense to activate the Offroad mode toallow the wheels to spin:

● When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un-stuck.

● Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.

● When driving on rough terrain with much ofthe car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axlearticulation). »

1) Only for 4Drive models.191

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Steep descents with braking on unpavedterrain.

For your safety we recommend that you turnoff the Offroad mode when it is not absolute-ly necessary.

Disable the ESC Offroad mode

Turn the Driving Experience button to select adifferent driving mode ››› page 243.

ESC in “Snow” mode1)

Turn the Driving Experience button to selectthe “Snow” mode and connect it.››› page 243 Traction control system (ASR) in-terventions adjust to the adhesion of snowyroads.

Disable the ESC “Snow” mode

Turn the Driving Experience button to select adifferent driving mode ››› page 243.

WARNING

The ESC Sport mode should be activated onlywhen traffic conditions and the ability of thedriver allow it. Danger of skidding!

● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilisingfunction will be limited to allow for a sportierdrive. The driving wheels could spin and thevehicle could skid.

WARNING

You should only activate the Offroad Mode ordisable the ASR if the experience of the driverand traffic conditions allow it. Danger of skid-ding!

● With the Offroad mode activated, the stabi-lisation function is limited. In particular, ifthe road is too smooth and slippery, the driv-ing wheels could spin and the vehicle couldskid.

Note

If the ASR or the ESC is disconnected or theSport mode is selected, cruise control* willbe switched off.

Manual gearbox

Changing gear


In some countries the clutch pedal must befully pressed down for the engine to start.

Selecting reverse gear

● Engage reverse gear only when the vehicleis stopped.

Changing down gears

While driving, changing down a gear must al-ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-rectly below and when the engine speed isnot too high ››› . Changing down while by-passing one or various gears at high speedsor at high engine speeds can damage theclutch and the gearbox, even if the clutchpedal remains depressed ››› .

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle willstart to move as soon as a gear is engagedand the clutch released. This is also the casewith the electronic parking brake switchedon.

● Never engage reverse gear when the vehi-cle is moving.

WARNING

If the gear is changed down inappropriatelyby selecting a gear that is too low, you maylose control of the vehicle, causing an acci-dent and serious injuries.

CAUTION

When travelling at high speeds or at high en-gine speeds, selecting a gear that is too lowcan cause considerable damage to the clutchand the gearbox. This can also occur if the


Driving

clutch pedal is pressed and held and it doesnot engage.

CAUTION

To prevent damage and avoid prematurewear, please observe the following:

● Do not rest your hand on the gear leverwhile driving. The pressure applied by yourhand is transmitted to the gearbox selectorforks.

● Always ensure that the vehicle is complete-ly stopped before engaging the reverse gear.

● Always press the clutch to the floor whenchanging gears.

● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” onhills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox/DSG auto-matic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-mitted via two independent clutches. They re-place the torque converter found on conven-tional automatic gearboxes and allow forsmooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-hicle.

The tiptronic system allows the driver tochange gears manually if desired››› page 195, Engaging gears with the trip-tonic mode*.

Selector lever positions


The selector lever position engaged is high-lighted on the display in the instrument clus-ter. With the selector lever in the manualgearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engagedgear is also indicated on the display.

P – Parking lock

When the selector lever is in this position,the driven wheels are locked mechanically.The parking lock must be engaged only whenthe vehicle is stationary ››› .

The interlock button (the button on the selec-tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si-multaneously the brake pedal must be de-pressed before moving the selector lever ei-ther in or out of position P.

R – Reverse gear

Reverse gear must be engaged only when thevehicle is stationary and the engine is idling››› .

To move the selector lever to position R, theinterlock button must be pressed in and atthe same time the brake pedal must be de-pressed. The reverse lights come on whenthe selector lever is in the R position with theignition on.

N – Neutral (idling)

With the selector lever in this position, thegear is in neutral.

D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position

The selector lever in the D/S position enablesthe gears to be controlled in normal mode (D)or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S), movethe selector lever backwards. Moving the lev-er again will select normal mode (D). The se-lected driving mode is shown on the instru-ment panel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical-ly selects the best gear ratio. This dependson the engine load, the road speed and thedynamic gear control programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sportydriving style. This setting makes use of theengine's maximum power output. When ac-celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal to move the selectorlever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)››› . »

193

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv-ing in mountains) it can be advantageous toswitch temporarily to tiptronic mode››› page 195, in order to manually select gearratios to suit the driving conditions.

WARNING

● Take care not to accidentally press the ac-celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped.The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-mediately (in some cases even if the parkingbrake is engaged) resulting in the risk of anaccident.

● Never move the selector lever to R or Pwhen driving. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.

● With selector lever in any position (exceptP) the vehicle must always be held with thefoot brake when the engine is running. This isbecause an automatic gearbox still transmitspower even at idling speed, and the vehicletends to “creep”. The accelerator pedal muston no account be pressed inadvertently whena gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary.The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-mediately (in some cases even if the parkingbrake is engaged) resulting in the risk of anaccident.

● While you are selecting a gear and the vehi-cle is stopped with the engine running, donot accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc-tion could result in an accident.

● As a driver you should never leave your ve-hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en-

gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle whilethe engine is running, you must apply thehandbrake and engage the parking lock (P).

● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrakeand put the selector lever in position P beforeopening the bonnet and working on the vehi-cle with the engine running. Please alwaysobserve the important safety warnings››› page 298, Working in the engine compart-ment.

Note

● If the selector lever is moved accidentallyto N when driving, release the accelerator andlet the engine speed drop to idling before se-lecting gear range D or S again.

● Should the power supply to the selectorlever be interrupted in position P, the selectorlever will be locked. If this should happen themanual release can be used ››› page 49.

Selector lever lock

Fig. 181 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock prevents gears frombeing engaged inadvertently, so that the ve-hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

– Switch the ignition on.

– Press the brake pedal and, at the sametime, hold the lock button in the directionof the arrow ››› Fig. 181.

Automatic selector lever lock

With the ignition switched on, the selectorlever is locked in the positions P and N. Thebrake pedal must be pressed to release thelever while pressing the release button if theselector lever is in the position P. As a re-minder for the driver, with the lever in posi-tions P or N the following message will beshown on the display:

194

Driving

When stationary, apply footbrakewhile selecting a gear.

Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h(3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph)the lever lock is automatically deactivated inposition N.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if theselector lever is moved quickly through posi-tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). Thismakes it possible, for instance, to rock thevehicle “backwards and forwards” if it isstuck. The selector lever lock engages auto-matically if the brake pedal is not depressedand the lever is in position N for more thanabout two seconds.

Interlock button

The interlock button on the selector leverhandle prevents the driver from inadvertentlyengaging certain gears. Press the button into disengage the selector lever lock.

Safety interlock for ignition key

Depending on the country, once the ignitionhas been turned off, the key may be removedonly if the gear selector is in position P. Whilethe key is not in the ignition, the selector lev-er is locked in position P.

Note

● If the selector lever lock does not engage,there is a fault. The transmission is interrup-ted to prevent the vehicle from accidentallymoving. Follow the procedure below in orderfor the selector lever lock to engage again:

– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brakepedal and release it again.

– With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brakepedal. Move the selector lever to posi-tion P or N and subsequently engage agear.

● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicledoes not move forwards or back. Proceed tothe next mode:

– When the vehicle does not move in therequired direction, the system may nothave the gear range correctly engaged.Press the brake pedal and engage thegear range again.

– If the vehicle still does not move in therequired direction, there is a system mal-function. Seek specialist assistance andhave the system checked.

Engaging gears with the triptonicmode*

Fig. 182 Centre console: changing gear withtiptronic

Fig. 183 Steering wheel: automatic gearboxlevers

The tiptronic gives the driver the option tochange gears manually. »

195

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Changing gear manually with the selectorlever

It is possible to change to tiptronic mode,both when the vehicle is stopped and whiledriving.

– To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se-lector lever from position D/S to the right.As soon as the change is made the selectorlevel will be shown in the position M on theinstrument panel display (for example M4means that the fourth gear is engaged).

– Move the selector lever forwards + to se-lect a higher gear ››› Fig. 182.

– Move the selector lever backwards – toselect a lower gear.

Changing gear manually with the gearshiftpaddles*

The gearshift paddles can be used when theselector lever is in the position D/S or M.

– Press the gearshift paddle + to select ahigher gear ››› Fig. 183.

– Press the gearshift paddle – to select alower gear.

– With the selector lever in position D/S, if nopaddle is operated during a short period oftime, the gearbox control system switchesback to automatic mode. To switch to per-manent manual gear change using thegearshift paddles, move the selector leverfrom position D/S to the right.

When accelerating, the gearbox automatical-ly shifts up into the next gear shortly beforethe maximum engine speed is reached.

If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear-box will not shift down until there is no risk ofover-revving the engine.

When the kick-down feature is used, thegearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend-ing on road speed and engine speed.

Driving tips

The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-ly as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selectorlever in position P or N. At low temperatures,below -10°C (50°F), the engine can only startwith the selector lever in position P.

Starting the vehicle

– Press and hold the brake pedal.

– Press and hold the interlock button (thebutton on the selector lever handle), movethe selector lever to the desired position,for instance D ››› page 193, and release theinterlock button.

– Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (aslight movement can be felt).

– Release the brake and press the accelerator››› .

Stopping briefly

– Apply the foot brake to hold the vehiclebriefly when stationary (for instance at traf-fic lights). Do not press the accelerator.

Stopping/Parking

If the driver door is opened and the selectorlever is not in position P, the vehicle couldmove. The driver message will be: Gearchange: selector lever in thedrive position!. Additionally, a buzzerwill sound.

– Press and hold the brake pedal ››› .

– Apply the handbrake.

– Move the selector lever to position P.

Holding the car on a hill

– Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from “moving backwards;if necessary, apply the handbrake” ››› .Do not try to stop the vehicle “rolling back”by increasing the engine speed when agear is engaged (pressing the accelerator)››› .

Starting off uphill

– Apply the handbrake.

– Once you have engaged a gear press theaccelerator carefully and disengage thehandbrake.

196

Driving

Driving down hills: in some situations (onmountain roads or when towing a trailer orcaravan) it can be advantageous to switchtemporarily to the manual gearbox pro-gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-ted manually to suit the driving conditions››› .

On level ground it is sufficient to move theselector lever to position P. On slopes, firstengage the parking brake and then put theselection lever into the P position. Thisavoids overloading the locking mechanismand it will be easier to move the selector lev-er from position P.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selectorlever positions on page 194.

● Never allow the brake to rub and do not usethe brake pedal too often or for long periods.Constant braking causes overheating in thebrakes. This could significantly reduce brak-ing power, increase braking distance or evenresult in the total failure of the brake system.

● To avoid rolling back on gradients alwayshold the vehicle with the footbrake or hand-brake if you have to stop.

CAUTION

● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do notattempt to stop it from rolling by depressingthe accelerator when a gear has been selec-ted. This could cause overheating and dam-

age the automatic gearbox. Apply the hand-brake firmly or press the brake pedal in orderto prevent the vehicle from rolling back.

● If you allow the car to roll with the selectorlever in position N with the engine switchedoff, the automatic gearbox will be damagedas it will not be lubricated.

● In certain driving situations or traffic condi-tions, such as frequently starting, prolonged“creeping” of the vehicle or traffic jams withcontinuous stoppages, the gearbox couldoverheat causing damage! If the warninglamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible and wait for the gearbox to cool››› page 200.

Kick-down feature

The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration to be reached.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown past the point of resistance at full throt-tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lowergear, depending on road speed and enginespeed. The upshift to the next higher gear isdelayed until the engine reaches maximumrpm.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature could

cause the driving wheels to spin, which couldresult in skidding.

Launch control program3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-SpeedDSG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet-rol engines superior to 140 kW.

The Launch control programme enables maxi-mum acceleration.

Important: the engine must have reached op-erating temperature and the steering wheelmust not be turned.

The engine speed for launch-control is differ-ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use thelaunch-control you must disconnect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-nect system menu ››› page 120. The warninglamp will stay switched on or will flashslowly depending on whether or not the vehi-cle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently andthe corresponding text message Stabilitycontrol deactivated (temporary) ap-pears on the instrument panel to indicate thedeactivation status. »

197

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

– When the engine is running, switch off thetraction control (ASR)1).

– Turn the selector lever to the position “S”or tiptronic, or else select the sport driv-ing mode from the SEAT Drive Profile*››› page 242.

– Press the brake pedal firmly with your leftfoot and hold it down for at least one sec-ond.

– With your right foot, press the acceleratordown to the full throttle or kick-down posi-tion. The engine speed will stabilise atabout 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about2,000 rpm (diesel engine).

– Take your left foot off the brake pedal.

WARNING

● Always adapt your driving style to the traf-fic conditions.

● Only use the launch control programmewhen road and traffic conditions permit, andmake sure your manner of driving and accel-erating the vehicle does not inconvenience orendanger other road users.

● Make sure that the ESC remains switchedon. Please note that when the ASR and ESCare deactivated, the wheels may start to spin,

causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci-dent!

● After putting the vehicle into gear, the“sport” mode of the ESC should be deactiva-ted again by briefly pressing the OFF but-ton.

Note

● After using the Launch control programme,the temperature in the gearbox may have in-creased considerably. In this case, the pro-gramme could be disabled for several mi-nutes. The programme can be used again af-ter the cooling phase.

● Accelerating with the Launch control pro-gramme places a heavy load on all parts ofthe vehicle. This can result in increased wearand tear.

Downhill speed control*

The downhill speed control function helpsthe driver when driving down steep gradi-ents.

Downhill speed control is activated when theselector lever is in D/S and the driver appliesthe foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-matically engages a lower gear that is suita-

ble for the slope. The downhill speed controlfunction attempts to maintain the speed atwhich the vehicle was travelling when thefoot brake was applied (subject to the laws ofphysics and technical drive limitations). Itmay be necessary to adjust the speed againusing the foot brake in certain situations. Giv-en that the downhill speed control can onlychange down to 3rd gear, on very steep de-scents the tiptronic mode may be required. Inthis case, manually reduce the tiptronic to2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake andreduce the charge on the brakes.

Downhill speed control is deactivated assoon as the road levels out again or youpress the accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*››› page 212, downhill speed control is acti-vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING

The downhill speed control cannot defy thelaws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot bemaintained constant in all situations. Alwaysbe prepared to use the brakes!

1) Vehicles without driver information system: thewarning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver in-formation system: the warning lamp stays on.

198

Driving

Inertia mode

The inertia mode enables the kinetic energyof the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer-tain stretches to be driven without using theaccelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll”before, for example, arriving in a town.

Switching on inertia mode

Important: selector lever must be in positionD, gradients below 12 %.

– Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode››› page 242.

– Take your foot off the accelerator.

The driver message Inertia will be dis-played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12mph), the gearbox will automatically disen-gage and the vehicle will roll freely, withoutthe effect of the engine brake. While the vehi-cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode

– Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To make use of the braking force and switchoff the engine again, simply press the brakepedal briefly.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolongedsection with less energy) and the switchingoff using inertia (= shorter section without

the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuelconsumption and emission balance.

WARNING

● If the inertia mode has been switched on,take into account, when approaching an ob-stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal,that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu-al manner: risk of accident!

● When using inertia mode while travellingdown hills, the vehicle can increase speed:risk of accident!

● If other users drive your vehicle, warn themabout inertia mode.

Note

● Inertia mode is only available in eco (SEATDrive Profile*) driving mode.

● The driver message Inertia is only dis-played with the current consumption. In iner-tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed(for example “E” will appear instead of “E7”).

● On downhill sections with gradients above15 %, the inertia mode will automatically beswitched off temporarily.

Emergency program

A backup programme is in place if a faultshould occur in the control system.

If all the positions of the selector lever areshown over a light background on the instru-ment panel display, there is a system faultand the automatic gearbox will operate inwith the backup programme. When the back-up programme is activated, it is possible todrive the vehicle, however, at low speeds andwithin a selected range of gears. In some ca-ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi-ble.

CAUTION

If the gearbox operates with the backup pro-gramme, take the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop and have the fault repaired withoutdelay.

Clutch

Clutch overheating! Pleasestop!

The clutch has overheated and could be dam-aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear-box to cool with the engine at idling speedand the selector lever in position P. When thewarning lamp and the driver message switchoff, have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay. If the warning lampand the driver message do not switch off, donot continue driving. Seek specialist assis-tance.

199

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Gearbox malfunctions

Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve-hicle and place the lever in theposition P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! Youmay continue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! Youcan continue driving with re-strictions. Reverse gear disa‐bled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! Youcan continue driving in D untilswitching off the engine

Stop the vehicle in a safe place well awayfrom moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. Whenthe warning lamp switches off, you can con-tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake andengage a gear again.

If the fault was caused by a gearbox with ahigh temperature, this driver message will bedisplayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

Address

Electromechanical steering

Electro-mechanical power steering assiststhe driver when steering.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand turning angle.

If the power steering should fail at any timeor the engine is switched off (for instancewhen being towed), the car can still besteered. However, more effort than normalwill be required to turn the steering wheel.

Driver warning lamps and messages

(in red) Faulty steering! Topark the vehicle

If the warning lamp remains on and the driverindication appears, the power steering couldbe faulty.

Do not continue driving. Seek specialist as-sistance.

(in yellow) Steering: Systemfault! You may continue driving.

If the warning lamp comes on, the steeringcould react with more difficultly or more sen-sitivity than normal. In addition, when drivingin a straight line the steering wheel may beoff-centre.

Drive slowly to a specialised workshop andhave the fault repaired.

(in yellow) Steering lock:fault! Go to an Official Service

The electronic steering lock is malfunction-ing.

Go to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible and have the fault repaired.

WARNING

Take it immediately to a specialised work-shop and have the fault repaired: risk of acci-dent!

Note

If the lamp (in red) or else (in yellow)lights up briefly, you may continue driving.

200

Driving

Run-in and economical driving

Running in the engine

A new vehicle should be run in over a dis-tance of 1500 km (1000 miles). For the first1,000 km the engine speed should not ex-ceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible enginespeed. In doing so, do not accelerate at fullthrottle and do not drive with a trailer! From1000 to 1500 km (600 to 1000 miles) youcan gradually increase the engine rpm androad speed.

During its first few hours of running, the in-ternal friction in the engine is greater thanlater on when all the moving parts have bed-ded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500km influences the future engine perform-ance. Subsequently, also drive at a moderaterate, especially when the engine is still cold:this will lead to less engine wear and tearand will prolong its useful life.

You should also avoid driving with the enginespeed too low. Change down to a lower gearwhen the engine no longer runs “smoothly”.If the engine revs too much, cut fuel injectionto protect the engine.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage recy-cling

● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling.

● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling.

● Increased use of single-grade materials.

● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials

● Use of recycled materials.

● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.

● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.

● Reduction of volatile components, includ-ing odour, in plastic materials.

● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-valent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.

● Use of plastic film as protection during ve-hicle transport.

● Use of solvent-free adhesives.

● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.

● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).

● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).

● The use of water-soluble paints.

Economical and environmentally-friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de-pends largely on driving style. Fuel consump-tion can be reduced by 10-15% with an eco-nomical driving style and proper anticipationof traffic conditions. The following sectiongives you some tips on lessening the impacton the environment and reducing your oper-ating costs at the same time. »

201

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Active cylinder management (ACT®)*

Depending on vehicle equipment, the activecylinder management (ACT®) may automati-cally deactivate some of the engine cylindersif the driving situation does not require toomuch power. When it is switched off, no fuelis injected into these cylinders, hence totalfuel consumption may be reduced. The num-ber of active cylinders can be seen on the in-strument panel display ››› page 37.

Foresight when driving

Acceleration causes the vehicle to consumemore fuel. If you think ahead when driving,you will need to brake less and thus acceler-ate less. Wherever possible, let the car rollslowly to a stop, with a gear engaged (for in-stance when you can see that the next trafficlights are red). This takes advantage of theengine braking effect, reducing wear on thebrakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel con-sumption will drop to zero due to the overrunfuel cut-off.

Changing gear to save energy

An effective way of saving is to change in ad-vance to a higher gear. Running the engine athigh rpm in the lower gears uses an unneces-sary amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: shift up from first to secondgear as soon as possible. In any case, we rec-ommend that you change to a higher gearupon reaching 2,000 rpm. Choosing the right

gear enables fuel savings. Select the highestpossible gear appropriate for the driving sit-uation (the engine should continue function-ing with cyclical regularity).

Automatic gearbox: accelerate gradually andwithout reaching the “kick-down” position.

Avoid driving at high speed

Avoid travelling at top speed, whenever pos-sible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmfulgases and noise pollution multiply dispropor-tionately as speed is increased. Driving atmoderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling time

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idlingis automatically reduced. In vehicles withoutthe Start-Stop system it is worth switching offthe engine, for example, at level crossingsand at traffic lights that remain red for longperiods of time. When an engine has reachedoperating temperature, and depending onthe cylinder capacity, keeping it switched offfor a minimum of about 5 seconds alreadysaves more than the amount of fuel necessa-ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high dur-ing this initial warm-up phase. It is thereforebest to drive off immediately after starting

the engine. Avoid running the engine at highspeed.

Regular maintenance

Regular servicing helps in saving fuel evenbefore the engine is started. A well-servicedengine gives you the benefit of improved fuelefficiency as well as maximum reliability andan enhanced resale value. A badly servicedengine can consume up to 10% more fuelthan necessary.

Avoid short journeys

The engine and catalytic converter need toreach their optimal operating temperature inorder to minimise fuel consumption andemissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionateamount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-ing temperature after about four kilometres(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re-turn to a normal level.

Check tyre pressure

Always make sure the tyres are inflated to thecorrect pressures ››› page 308 to save fuel. Ifthe pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greaterrolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as theyincrease fuel consumption by up to 10%.

202

Driving

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisableto always check the luggage compartment tomake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aerody-namic drag of the vehicle, you should removeit when not needed. At speeds of 100-120km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel.

Save electrical energy

The engine drives the alternator, thereby gen-erating electricity. This implies that any in-crease in power consumption also increasesfuel consumption! For this reason, switch offany unneeded electrical devices. Devices thatuse a lot of electricity includes the blower ata high setting, the rear window heating orthe seat heating*.

Power management

This system helps to ensure reliablestarting

The power management controls the distribu-tion of electrical energy and thus helps to en-sure that there is always enough power avail-able to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-tem is left parked for a long time, the batterywill gradually lose its charge because certainelectrical devices, such as the electronicgearbox lock continues to draw current evenwhen the ignition is off. In some cases theremay not be enough power available to startthe engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy. This signifi-cantly improves reliability when starting theengine, and also prolongs the useful life ofthe battery.

The main functions incorporated in the powermanagement system are battery diagnosis,residual current management and dynamicpower management.

Battery diagnosis

The battery diagnosis function constantlyregisters the condition of the battery. Sen-sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur-rent and battery temperature. This enablesthe system to calculate the current power lev-el and charge condition of the battery.

Residual current management

The residual current management reducespower consumption while the vehicle isparked. It controls the supply of power to thevarious electrical devices while the ignition is

switched off. The system takes the battery di-agnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery,switch off the individual electrical devicesone after the other to prevent the batteryfrom losing too much charge and to ensurethat the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power management

While the vehicle is moving, this function dis-tributes the available power to the variouselectrical devices and systems according totheir requirements. The power managementensures that on-board systems do not con-sume more electrical power than the alterna-tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-mum possible battery power level.

Note

● Neither is the power management systemable to overcome the given physical limits.Please remember that the power and usefullife of the battery are limited.

● When there is a risk that the vehicle willnot start, the alternator power failure or lowbattery charge level warning lamp will beshown ››› page 119.

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority. »

203

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Short trips, city traffic and low temperaturesall place a heavy load on the battery. In theseconditions a large amount of power is con-sumed, but only a small amount is supplied.The situation is also critical if electrical devi-ces are in use when the engine is not run-ning. In this case power is consumed whennone is being generated.

In these situations you will be aware that thepower management system is intervening tocontrol the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long periods

If you do not drive your vehicle for a period ofseveral days or weeks, the power manage-ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-vices one by one or reduce the amount of cur-rent they are using. This limits the amount ofpower consumed and helps to ensure relia-ble starting even after a long period. Someconvenience functions, such as remote vehi-cle opening, may not be available under cer-tain circumstances. These functions will berestored when you switch on the ignition andstart the engine.

With the engine switched off

For example, if you listen to the sound sys-tem with the engine switched off the batterywill run down.

If the energy consumption means there is arisk that the engine will not start, a text will

appear in vehicles with a driver informationsystem*.

This driver indicator tells you that you muststart the engine so that the battery can re-charge.

When the engine is running

Although the alternator generates electricalpower, the battery can still become dis-charged while the vehicle is being driven.This can occur when a lot of power is beingconsumed but only a small amount supplied,especially if the battery is not fully chargedinitially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, thesystem will then temporarily shut off the elec-trical devices that are using a lot of power, orreduce the current they are consuming. Heat-ing systems in particular use a large amountof electrical power. If you notice, for instance,that the seat heating* or the rear windowheater is not working, they may have beentemporarily switched off or regulated to alower heat output. These systems will beavailable again as soon as sufficient electri-cal power is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at aslightly faster idling speed when necessary.This is quite normal, and no cause for con-cern. The increased idling speed allows thealternator to meet the greater power require-

ment and charge the battery at the sametime.

Engine management and ex-haust gas purification system

Introduction

WARNING

● Because of the high temperatures whichcan occur in the exhaust purification system(catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-haust can come into contact with flammablematerials under the car (e.g. on grass or atthe forest edge). Fire hazard!

● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Note

While the control lamps , , or re-main lit, there may be engine problems, fuelconsumption may increase and the enginemay lose power.

204

Driving

Catalytic converter3 Applies to vehicles with petrol engine

The vehicle must only be used with unleadedpetrol, otherwise the catalytic converter willbe irreparably damaged.

Never drive until the tank is empty; an irregu-lar supply of fuel can cause faulty combus-tion. In these cases, unburned fuel reachesthe exhaust system, which can overheat anddamage the catalytic converter.

Diesel particulate filter3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminatesmost of the soot from the exhaust gas sys-tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil-ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter iscleaned automatically without need for indi-cation by the warning lamp . This may benoticed because the engine idle speed in-creases and an odour may be detected.

If automatic filter purification cannot be car-ried out (because only short trips are taken,for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-ter and the Diesel particulate filter warninglamp will switch on.

Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-ess by driving in the following manner: drivefor approximately 15 minutes at a minimumspeed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear

(automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en-gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. Therise in temperature causes the soot on the fil-ter to burn. On completion of the cleaningthe warning lamp will switch off. If the warn-ing lamp does not switch off, go immediatelyto a specialised workshop to rectify the prob-lem.

Engine management*

This warning lamp monitors the engine man-agement system for petrol engines.

The warning lamp (Electronic Power Con-trol) lights up when the ignition is switchedon while system operation is being verified. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

If there is a fault in the electronic enginemanagement system while you are driving,this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi-cle to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible and have the engine checked.

Emission control system*

Control lamp flashes:

When there is misfiring that can damage thecatalytic converter. Reduce speed and drivecarefully to the nearest specialised workshopto have the engine checked.

The control lamp lights up:

If a fault has developed during driving whichhas reduced the quality of the exhaust gas(e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed anddrive carefully to the nearest specialisedworkshop to have the engine checked.

Engine pre-heating/fault system*

The warning lamp lights up to show that theglow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.

The control lamp lights up

If the control lamp lights up when the en-gine is started it means that the glow plugsare preheating. The engine can be startedstraight away when the lamp switches off.

Control lamp flashes

If a fault develops in the engine managementsystem while you are driving, the glow plugsystem lamp will flash . Take the vehicle toa specialised workshop as soon as possibleand have the engine checked.

205

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Driving tips

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-ing through water, for example, along a floo-ded road, please observe the following:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.

● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING

After driving through water, mud, sludge,etc., the braking effect can be delayed slight-ly due to moisture build-up on the discs andbrake pads. Applying the brakes carefullyseveral times will remove the moisture andrestore the full braking effect.

CAUTION

● Driving through flooded areas may severelydamage vehicle components such as the en-gine, transmission, running gear or electricalsystem.

● Whenever driving through water, the Start-Stop system* must be switched off››› page 208.

Note

● Check the depth of the water before enter-ing the flooded zone.

● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, orstop the engine in any situation.

● Note that vehicles travelling in the oppositedirection may splash water that could exceedthe maximum permitted water height for yourvehicle.

● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion).

Four-wheel drive3 Valid for vehicles: with four-wheel drive

On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow-er is distributed to all four wheels

General notes

On four-wheel drive vehicles, the enginepower is distributed to all four wheels. Thedistribution of power is controlled automati-cally according to your driving style and theroad conditions. Also see ››› page 189.

The four-wheel drive is specially designed tocomplement the superior engine power. Thiscombination gives the vehicle exceptionalhandling and performance capabilities, bothon normal roads and in more difficult condi-tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-haps especially for this reason), it is impor-tant to observe certain safety points ››› .

Winter tyres

Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle willhave plenty of traction in winter conditions,even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,we still recommend that winter tyres or all-season tyres be fitted on all four wheels togive even better braking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains are mandatory,this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive››› page 67.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all fourtyres must have the same rolling circumfer-ence. Also avoid using tyres with varyingtread depths ››› page 309.

Off-roader?

Your SEAT is not an off-road vehicle: it doesnot have enough ground clearance to beused as such. It is therefore best to avoidrough tracks and uneven terrain as much aspossible.

WARNING

● Even with four-wheel drive, you should al-ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-tions. Do not let the extra safety featurestempt you into taking any risks when driving.Risk of accident!

206

Driving

● The braking capability of your vehicle islimited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore nodifferent from a car without four-wheel drive.So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firmor slippery roads just because the vehiclestill has good acceleration in these condi-tions. Risk of accident!

● On wet roads bear in mind that the frontwheels may start to “aquaplane” and losecontact with the road if the car is driven toofast. If this should happen, there will be nosudden increase in engine speed to warn thedriver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car.For this reason you should always choose adriving speed suitable for the road condi-tions. Risk of accident!

207

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Driver assistance systems

Start-Stop System*


The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re-duce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-cally switch off when the vehicle stops or isstopping; for example when stopping at traf-fic lights. The ignition remains switched onduring the stopping phase. The engine auto-matically switches back on when required. Inthis situation, the light of theSTART ENGINE STOP button stays on1).

As soon as the ignition is switched on, theStart-Stop function is automatically activa-ted.

Further information about the Start-Stop sys-tem can be found in the Easy Connect sys-tem: by pressing the button in the Vehi-cle status menu.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode

● The driver door must be closed.

● The driver must have their seat belt fas-tened.

● The bonnet must be closed.

● The engine must have reached a minimumservice temperature.

● The reverse gear must not be engaged.

● The vehicle must not be on a very steepslope.

WARNING

● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The brake servo and powersteering functions will not be completely cov-ered under warranty. More force may also beneeded to turn the steering wheel or to brake.As you cannot steer and brake in the normalmanner, there is a greater risk of accidentsand serious injury.

● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer-ing could lock making it impossible to steerthe vehicle.

● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-Stop system is switched off when working inthe engine compartment ››› page 210.

CAUTION

The Start-Stop system must always beswitched off when driving through floodedareas ››› page 210.

Stopping/Starting the engine

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

– Before stopping the vehicle or when it isstopped, put it into neutral and release theclutch pedal. The engine will switch off. Thewarning lamp will appear on the instru-ment panel display. The engine may stopbefore the vehicle comes to a halt in thedeceleration phase (at 7 km/h).

– When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-gine will start up again. The warning lampwill switch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

– Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to astop and keep the brake pedal presseddown with your foot. The engine will switchoff. The warning lamp will appear in thedisplay. The engine may stop before the ve-hicle comes to a halt in the decelerationphase (at 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending onthe vehicle’s gearbox).

– When you take your foot off the brake pedalthe engine will start up again. The warninglamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Au-to Hold* system, when the system is active,the engine will not start if you remove yourfoot from the brake pedal. The car startswhen you press the accelerator pedal.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.208


Additional information related to the auto-matic gearbox

The engine stops when the selector lever is inthe positions P, D, N and S, in addition towhen in manual mode. With the selector lev-er in position P, the engine will also remainswitched off when you take your foot off thebrake pedal. In order to start the engine upagain the accelerator must be pressed, or an-other gear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in position Rduring the stopping phase, the engine willstart up again.

Change from position D to P to prevent theengine from accidentally starting whenchanging and passing by position R.

Additional information about vehicles withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

In vehicles with ACC function, the engine willstart up again in certain operating conditionsif the radar sensor detects that the vehicleahead drives off again.

Note

● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, youcan control whether the engine should switchoff or not by reducing or increasing the brakeforce applied. While the vehicle remains stop-ped, the engine will not stop if the brake ped-al is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with fre-quent stopping and starting for example. As

soon as strong pressure is applied to thebrake pedal, the engine will stop.

● In vehicles with manual gearbox, duringthe stopping phases the brake pedal must re-main depressed to prevent the vehicle frommoving.

● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with man-ual gearbox, it can be directly started upagain by immediately pressing the clutchpedal.

General notes

The system can interrupt the Start-Stop modefrequently for different reasons.

The engine does not switch off

Before the stopping phase, the system veri-fies whether certain conditions are met. Theengine does not switch off, in the followingsituations for example:

● The engine has not yet reached the mini-mum required temperature for the Start-Stopmode.

● The interior temperature selected for the airconditioner has not yet been reached.

● The interior temperature is very high/low.

● Defrost function button activated››› page 51.

● The parking aid* is switched on.

● The battery is very low.

● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-ing turned.

● If there is a danger of misting.

● After engaging reverse gear.

● In case of a very steep gradient.

The indication is shown on the instrumentpanel display, and in addition, the driver in-formation system* shows, .

The engine starts by itself

During a stopping phase the normal Start-Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow-ing situations: The engine restarts by itselfwithout involvement from the driver.

● The interior temperature differs from thevalue selected on the air conditioner.

● Defrost function button activated››› page 51.

● The brake has been pressed several timesconsecutively.

● The battery is too low.

● High power consumption.

Note

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if theselector lever is placed in position D, N or Safter engaging reverse gear, the vehicle mustbe driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6 »

209

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

mph) for the system to return to conditions inwhich the engine can be stopped.

Manually switching on/off the Start-Stop system

Fig. 184 Centre console: Start-Stop systembutton.

If you do not wish to use the system, you canswitch it off manually.

– To manually switch on/off the Start-Stopsystem, press the button. The buttonsymbol remains lit up yellow when the sys-tem is switched off.

Note

The system is automatically switched on eachtime the engine is deliberately stopped dur-ing a stopping phase. The engine will startautomatically.

Driver messages on the instrumentpanel display

Start-Stop system deactivated.Start the engine manuallyThis driver message is displayed when cer-tain conditions are not met during the stop-ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannotrestart the engine. The engine must be star-ted manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Func-tion not availableThere is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Takethe vehicle to a workshop to have the faultrepaired.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

Description and operation3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive

Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steepdescents by automatically braking all fourwheels, both when moving forward and in re-verse. As the anti-lock brake system remainsactive, it prevents the wheels from locking. Invehicles with manual transmission, the HillDescent Control adapts the theoretical speedwithout slowing the engine below its idlingspeed.

After starting the descent of a slope below30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a min-imum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, thedriver may increase or decrease the speedwithin the limit by pressing the accelerator orthe brake. At this point the function is inter-rupted and, if necessary, it is then reactiva-ted.

Even so, it is imperative that the surfaceguarantees sufficient adhesion. For this rea-son, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil itsfunction when, for example, descending aslope with a frozen or slippery surface.

Hill Descent Control is available when thedash panel display shows the message .

Hill Descent Control automatically intervenesif the following conditions are met:

● The vehicle engine is running.

● The Offroad driving profile has been selec-ted ››› page 242. Driving at a speed below 30km/h (18 mph) (the message is shown onthe dash panel display).

● The slope of the descent is at least 10%when driving forward and 9% when driving inreverse.

● The brake and the accelerator are notpressed.

Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press-ing the brake and the accelerator or if theslope is below 5%. The function may be

210


disconnected manually in the Easy Connectsystem by pressing the button and theHDC function button ››› Fig. 42.

Control lamps

››› in Warning and control lamps onpage 119.

It lights up white

Hill Descent Control is active.

It lights up grey

Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switchedon, but is not adjusting.

Some warning and control lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.

WARNING


WARNING

Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an acci-dent could occur and cause injury.

● Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliarysystem that in some situations may not suffi-ciently brake the vehicle when going down aslope.

● The speed of the vehicle may increase de-spite the intervention of Hill Descent Control.

Auto Hold Function


Fig. 185 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: Auto Hold function button.

The control light of the ››› Fig. 185 buttonremains on when the Auto Hold function isconnected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-od of time with the engine running, for exam-ple, when going up a slope, when stopped attraffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-tent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold function au-tomatically prevents the vehicle from rollingwhen stationary without pressing the brakepedal.

After detecting that the vehicle is stationaryand the brake pedal has been released, theAuto Hold function holds the vehicle. Thedriver can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the accelerator ped-al or accelerates slightly to continue driving,the Auto Hold function releases the brake.The vehicle moves according to the slope ofthe road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-ditions required by the Auto Hold function isimpaired, it disconnects itself and the but-ton's control light goes out ››› Fig. 185. Theelectronic parking brake connects automati-cally, if necessary, to park the vehicle safe-ly ››› .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle stationarywith the Auto Hold function

● The driver door must be closed.

● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.

● The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on and off

Press the button ››› . The control lamp onthe button goes out when the Auto Hold func-tion is switched off. »

211

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Automatically engaging and disengaging theAuto Hold function

If the Auto Hold function was switched onwith the button before disengaging the ig-nition, the function will remain on after theignition is re-engaged.

If the Auto Hold function was not switchedon, it will automatically remain off next timethe ignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function is automaticallyswitched on if the following conditions aremet:

All conditions must be met at the same time››› :

Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake ped-al on a flat surface or on a slope.

2. The engine rotates “correctly”.

Upon pressing theclutch and acceleratingat the same time, thebrake releases gradu-ally.

Upon accelerating, thebrake releases gradu-ally.

The Auto Hold function is automaticallyturned off if the following conditions aremet:

Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

1.

If any of the conditions mentioned on››› page 211, Conditions for keeping the vehicle

stationary with the Auto Hold function are no lon-ger met.

2.If the engine is running irregularly or an anomaly

is detected.

3.If the engine is turned

off or stalls.If the engine is switch-

ed off.

4.The clutch and the ac-

celerator are pressed atthe same time.

If the accelerator ispressed.

5.

If any of the tyres hasonly minimal contact

with the ground, e.g. inthe case of axle articu-

lation.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into theAuto Hold function cannot defy the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. The greater convenience provided bythe Auto Hold function should never temptyou to take any risk that may compromisesafety.

● Never leave the vehicle running and withthe Auto Hold function switched on.

● The Auto Hold function cannot always keepthe vehicle stationary uphill or downhill orstop it sufficiently, for example, on slipperyor frozen surfaces.

Note

Before entering a car wash, always switch offthe Auto Hold function, because if the elec-tronic parking brake is automatically connec-ted, it may cause damage.

Cruise control system (CCS)*

Operation

Fig. 186 Instrument panel display: CCS statusindications.

212



The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas-ing to accelerate, not by actively braking thevehicle ››› .

Control lamp

When the warning lamp is lit, cruise con-trol is active.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

Displayed on the CCS screen

Status Fig. 186:

CCS temporarily switched off. The setspeed is displayed in small or darkenedfigures.

System error. Contact a specialised work-shop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory isempty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed isdisplayed in large figures.

A

B

C

D

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause acci-dents and severe injuries if it is not possibleto drive at a constant speed maintaining thesafety distance.

● Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf-fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front isinsufficient, on steep roads, with severalbends or in slippery circumstances (snow,ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

● Never use the CCS when driving off-road oron unpaved roads.

● Always adapt your speed and the distanceto the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,weather conditions, the condition of the roadand the traffic situation.

● To avoid unexpected operation of the cruisecontrol system, turn it off every time you fin-ish using it.

● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for the prevailing road, traffic orweather conditions.

● When travelling down hills, the CCS cannotmaintain a constant speed. The vehicle tendsto accelerate under its own weight. Select alower gear or use the foot brake to slow thevehicle.

WARNING


Operating the cruise control system*


The value indicated in the table in brackets(in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru-ment panels with indications in miles.

Changing gear in CCS mode

The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutchpedal is pressed, intervening again automati-cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannotmaintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicledown using the brake pedal and reducegears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switchedoff automatically or temporarily:

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.

● If you press and maintain the acceleratorpedal for a certain time, driving faster thanthe stored speed.

● If the dynamic driving control systems in-tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC).

● If the airbag is triggered.

213

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Speed limiter

Display messages and warning andcontrol lamp

Fig. 187 On the instrument panel display:messages on the status of the speed limiter.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding aspeed individually programmed upwards ofapproximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving inforwards gears ›››

Display messages on the speed limiter

Status ››› Fig. 187:

The speed limiter is active. The lastspeed set is displayed in large figures.

The speed limiter is not active. The lastspeed set is displayed in small or dark-ened figures.

A

B

The speed limiter is switched off. The to-tal mileage is displayed.

Warning and control lamp

Lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been exceeded.

Lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the speed limiterare active.


WARNING

After use, always switch off the speed limiterto prevent the speed being regulated againstyour wishes.

● The speed limiter does not relieve the driv-er of their responsibility to drive at the appro-priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if notnecessary.

● Using the speed limiter with adverseweather conditions is dangerous and cancause serious accidents, e.g. because of

C aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. Youshould use the speed limiter function onlywhen traffic, road and weather conditions al-low it to be used safely.

● When driving downhill, the speed limitercannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed willincrease due to its own weight. In this case,select a lower gear or use the foot brake toslow the vehicle.

WARNING


Note

● Different versions of the instrument panelare available and therefore the versions andinstructions on the display may vary.

● If when switching the ignition off, thecruise control system (CCS), the adaptivecruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter wereswitched on, then the cruise control systemor the adaptive cruise control will automati-cally switch themselves on when the ignitionis back on. However, no speed will be stored.The last set speed of the speed limiter will bestored.

214


Operate the speed limiter

Fig. 188 On the left of the steering column:control and buttons to operate the speed lim-iter.

Fig. 189 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the speed limiter.

FunctionPosition of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 188 or the third lever››› Fig. 189

Effect

Switching on the speed limiterMove controller 1 of the turn signal lever to the position and press but-ton 2 or move the third lever forward and press button 2 .

The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed lim-iter is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching between the speed limiter andcruise control (CCS) or the adaptive cruisecontrol (ACC) (with the speed limiterswitched on)

Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third leverIt switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or theadaptive cruise control (ACC).

Activating the speed limiter Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or button 1 on the third lever.The current speed is stored as the maximum speed and thelimiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speed limit-er limitation

Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position or move the thirdlever into position .

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will bestored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiterlimitation pressing down the accelerator(kick-down)

Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to over-take). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off temporarily.

The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will bestored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after return-ing to less than the set speed. »

215

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

FunctionPosition of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 188 or the third lever››› Fig. 189

Effect

Switching the speed limiter on againPress button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into posi-tion .

The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the speedyou are driving at is lower than the speed set as maximum.

Increasing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or movethe third lever into position to increase the speed in small incre-ments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set valuePress on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or holddown to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph)and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the limiter

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or press 1 on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h(1 mph) and set it.

The speed is limited to the set valuePress on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area or holddown to reduce the speed continuously in increments of 10 km/h(5 mph) and set it.

Switching off the speed limiterMove control 1 of the turn signal lever into position or the third leverinto position .

The system switches off

The values shown in the table in brackets, inmph, are displayed only in instrument panelswith indications in miles.

Going down slopes with the speed limiter

If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee-ded while driving downhill, soon afterwardsthe warning and control lamps flash

››› page 214 and an acoustic warning maysound. In this case, use the foot brake toslow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low-er gear.

Switching off temporarily

If you wish to temporarily switch off thespeed limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control

››› Fig. 188 1 of the turn signal lever into po-sition or the third lever into pressurepoint or press button 2 on any lever.

After overtaking, the speed limiter can beswitched on with the previously set speed bypressing button 3 on the turn signal lever inthe area or by moving the third lever in-to pressure point.

216


Switch the speed limiter off temporarily bypressing down the accelerator (kick-down)

If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-down) and the set speed is exceeded be-cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter istemporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acousticsignal sound once. While the limiter is off,the warning and control lamp flashes.

When the accelerator is no longer presseddown and the speed is reduced below the setvalue, the limiter switches on again. The con-trol lamp will light up and remain lit.

Automatic off

The speed limiter is automatically switchedoff:

● If the system detects a fault that could neg-atively affect the working order of the limiter.

● If the airbag is triggered.

CAUTION

For automatic switching off due to systemfailures, for security reasons, the limiter isonly completely switched off when the driverstops pressing the accelerator at some pointor consciously switches off the system.

Emergency brake assist system(Front Assist)*

Topic introduction

Fig. 190 On the instrument panel display:pre-warning messages.

The objective of the emergency brake assistsystem is to prevent head-on collisionsagainst objects that may be in the vehicle’spath or minimise the consequences of suchimpacts.

Within the limitations imposed by the envi-ronmental conditions and by the system it-self, the function acts in staggered fashion,depending on how critical the situation is. In-itially it warns the driver, and if the driver’sreaction does not occur or is insufficient, itactivates an independent emergency brak-ing.

The function is intended to prevent collisionswith parked vehicles or vehicles in the samelane travelling in the same direction, or withpedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path. Itmay fail to activate in other danger situa-tions.

The Front Assist function is active within arange of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph)and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending onspeed, traffic conditions and driver behav-iour, some of the sub-functions described be-low are omitted in order to optimise the sys-tem’s general behaviour.

The Front Assist is a driving assistance func-tion that can never replace the driver’s atten-tion.

Safety distance warning

If the system detects a situation of dangerbecause the vehicle is too close to the vehi-cle ahead, it will warn the driver by means ofan indication on the instrument panel display.

The timing of the warning varies dependingon driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it may alert the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel display››› Fig. 190. »

217

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› .

Critical warning

If the driver fails to react to the pre-warning(advance warning), the system may activelyintervene in the brakes and generate a briefjolt to warn the driver of the imminent dangerof a collision.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the criticalwarning, the system may initiate independ-ent emergency braking by progressively in-creasing the braking effect in accordancewith how critical the situation is.

Driver emergency brake assist system

Faced with an imminent collision, the systemmay detect that the driver is not braking hardenough to avoid the collision. In this case, itwill automatically increase the braking effect.

Due to certain driving circumstances and thelimitations of its operation, there are somecases in which the system cannot prevent acollision, although it can significantly mini-mise the consequences by reducing thespeed and the force of the impact.

WARNING


WARNING

The Front Assist system cannot change thelaws of physics or replace the driver in termsof keeping control of the vehicle and reactingto a possible emergency situation.

WARNING

Following a Front Assist emergency warning,pay immediate attention to the situation andtry to avoid the collision by braking or bydodging the obstacle, as applicable.

● If the Front Assist does not work as descri-bed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly inter-venes unnecessarily), switch it off.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to thevehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-dents and serious injuries.

● In complex driving situations, occasionallythe Front Assist may issue warnings and in-tervene in braking unnecessarily, for exampleat traffic islands.

● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra-dar sensor has lost its settings, the systemmay issue unnecessary warnings and inter-vene inopportunely in the braking.

● The Front Assist does not react to animalsor vehicles crossing your path or approachinghead-on down the same lane.

● The Front Assist does not react to pedes-trians walking in the same direction or ap-proaching head-on down the same lane.

● The driver must always be ready to takeover the control of the vehicle.

● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.

● Automatic interventions by the Front Assiston the brakes may be interrupted by pressingthe clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.

Note

● When the Front Assist is connected, the in-dications on the instrument panel screen maybe concealed by warnings from other func-tions, such as an incoming call.

● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.

● Automatic interventions by the Front Assiston the brakes may be interrupted by pressingthe clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel.

● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle untilit stops completely. However, the brake sys-tem does not halt the vehicle permanently.Use the foot brake!

● If the Front Assist does not work as descri-bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes severaltimes unnecessarily), switch it off. Have thesystem checked by a specialised workshop.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

218


Radar sensor

Fig. 191 On the front behind the SEAT badge:radar sensor.

On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radarsensor has been installed to capture the traf-fic situation ››› Fig. 191.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, theFront Assist does not work. The instrumentpanel displays the following message:Front Assist: No sensor vision! Ifnecessary clean the radar sensor ››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the Front Assist will automati-cally be available again. The message willdisappear from the instrument panel display.

Front Assist operation may be affected by astrong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-cur, for example, in a closed car park or due

to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. railson the road or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sen-sor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, for example if the suspension is low-ered, Front Assist operation may be affected.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealershipfor this purpose.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos-sible dangerous situations caused by a sys-tem malfunction. If this occurs have it adjus-ted.

● The sensor may become damaged or loseits settings when knocked, for example, dur-ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.

● Repairs to the radar sensor require special-ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-pose.

● Clean away the snow with a brush and theice preferably with a solvent-free de-icerspray.

Operating the Emergency braking as-sistance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 192 On the instrument panel display:Front Assist switched off message.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so tooare the advance warning function (pre warn-ing) and the distance warning.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 220,Switching the Front Assist off temporarily inthe following situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and off

With the ignition switched on, the Front As-sist can be switched on and off as follows:

● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assistance sys-tems ››› page 36. »

219

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● OR: switch the system on and off in EasyConnect using the button and theSETTINGS and Driver assistance function but-

tons ››› page 33.

When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-ment panel will inform that it has beenswitched off with the following indicator ››› Fig. 192.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning(advance warning)

The pre-warning function (advance warning)can be switched on or off in the Easy Connectsystem with the button and the SETTINGS

and Driver assistance function buttons››› page 33.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warningfunction switched on at all times.

Depending on the infotainment system in-stalled in the vehicle, the advance warningfunction may be adjusted as follows:

● Advance

● Medium

● Delayed

● Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the functionin “Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and off

If the safe distance with regard to the vehiclein front is exceeded, the relevant warning willappear on the instrument panel display. In this case, increase the safe dis-tance.

The distance warning can be switched on andoff in the Easy Connect system using the button and the SETTINGS andDriver assistance function buttons

››› page 33.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distancewarning switched on at all times.

Switching the Front Assist off tempo-rarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assistshould be deactivated due to the system'slimitations:

● When the vehicle is to be towed.

● If the vehicle is on a test bed.

● When the radar sensor is damaged.

● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, forexample in a rear collision.

● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

● If the radar sensor is covered temporarilywith some kind of accessory, such as an ad-ditional headlight or the like.

● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,ferry or train.

System limitations

The Front Assist has certain physical limita-tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certaincircumstances, some of the system's reac-tions may be inopportune from the driver'sstandpoint. So pay attention in order to inter-vene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the FrontAssist not to react or to do so too late:

● In the first few instants of driving afterswitching on the ignition, due to the system’sinitial auto-calibration.

● On taking tight bends or complex paths.

● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.

● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-aged.

● If the ASR has been disconnected or theESC activated in Sport mode manually››› page 191.

● If the ESC is controlling.

● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.

220


● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.

● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on theroad or sheets used in road works.

● If the vehicle is reversing.

● If the vehicle over-accelerates.

● In case of snow or heavy rain.

● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-bikes.

● Misaligned vehicles.

● Vehicles crossing the other's path.

● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-tion.

● Special loads and accessories of other ve-hicles that jut out over the sides, backwardsor over the top.

Adaptive Cruise Control ACC*

Related video

Fig. 193 Autonomousdriving

Introduction

Fig. 194 Detection area.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an exten-sion of the normal cruise control system(CCS) ››› .

The ACC function allows the driver to programa cruise speed of between 30 and 210 km/h(18 and 150 mph) and to select the distancerequired with regard to the vehicle in front.

The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise speedat all times, maintaining a safe distance withthe vehicle in front based on its speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, theACC function reduces speed until it is thesame as that of the vehicle ahead and main-tains the set distance between the vehicles.If the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptivecruise control also accelerates, going nohigher than the target speed programmed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automaticgearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle untilit stops completely if a vehicle in front of itstops.

The distance programmed should be in-creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention prompt

During driving, the ACC is subject to certainlimitations inherent in the system. In otherwords, in certain circumstances the driver willhave to adjust speed him or herself, as wellas the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen willwarn you to intervene by applying the brakeand a warning tone will be heard››› page 223.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the ACC cannotovercome the system's inherent limitationsor change the laws of physics. If used negli-gently or involuntarily, it may cause seriousaccidents and injuries. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.


● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad,on steep roads, with several bends or in slip-pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain orloose gravel, or on flooded roads. »

221

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● Never use the ACC when driving off-road oron unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-signed for use on paved roads only.

● The ACC does not react on approaching afixed obstacle, such as the tail of a trafficjam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stoppedat the traffic lights.

● The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes-trian monitoring system is available. In addi-tion, the system does not react to animals orvehicles crossing your path or approachinghead-on down the same lane.

● If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient-ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applyingthe pedal.

● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automatically switchoff during the journey. Switch off the systemwhen starting off.

● If the vehicle continues to move involuntar-ily after a driver intervention prompt, brakethe vehicle by applying the pedal.

● If the dash panel displays a driver interven-tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself.

● The driver should be ready to accelerate orbrake by him/herself at all times.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-sor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This willavoid possible damage. If this occurs have itadjusted.


Note

● If the ACC system does not work as descri-bed in this chapter, do not use it until it hasbeen checked by a specialised workshop.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealershipfor this purpose.

● Maximum speed with the ACC activated islimited to 210 km/h (150 mph).

● When the ACC is switched on, strangenoises may be heard during automatic brak-ing cause by the braking system.

Indications on the display, warningand control lamps

Fig. 195 On the instrument panel display: (A)ACC inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active.

Status display

Indications on the display ››› Fig. 195:

Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not activeand is not regulating your speed.

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC isnot active and is not regulating your dis-tance.

1

2

222


Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active andis regulating your speed.

Distance level 2 set by the driver.

ACC is active and is regulating your dis-tance based on speed.

Warning and control lamps

››› in Warning and control lamps onpage 119.

The speed reduction by the ACC tomaintain the distance from the vehi-cle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.

The ACC is not currently available.a)

With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine andstart it up again. Check the SEAT badge area on the front››› Fig. 196 (in case it is dirty or icy or it has been hit). Ifit is still unavailable, refer to a specialised workshop tohave the system inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is incolour.

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speedremains constant.

3

4

5

If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac-tive.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjustsspeed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inactive(Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

It lights up green

The ACC is active.


WARNING


Note

When the ACC is connected, the indicationson the instrument panel screen may be con-cealed by warnings from other functions,such as an incoming call.

Radar sensor

Fig. 196 On the front behind the SEAT badge:radar sensor.

On the front behind the SEAT badge, a radarsensor has been installed to capture the traf-fic situation ››› Fig. 196.

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-fluences such as rain or mist. In this case theadaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work.The instrument panel displays the followingmessage: ACC: No sensor vision! Ifnecessary, clean the SEAT badge area ››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the ACC will automatically beavailable again. The message on the instru-ment panel screen will switch off and the ACCwill be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex-ample, in a closed car park or due to the »

223

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on theroad or sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radar sen-sor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, for example, if the suspension is low-ered, ACC operation may be affected. In thisscenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership.

CAUTION

If you have the sensation that the radar sen-sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-connect the ACC. This will avoid possibledamage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

● The sensor may become damaged or loseits settings when knocked, for example, dur-ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.


● Clean away the snow with a brush and theice preferably with a solvent-free de-icerspray.

Operating the Adaptive Cruise ControlACC

Fig. 197 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the Adaptive CruiseControl.

Fig. 198 On the left of the steering column:third lever for operating the Adaptive CruiseControl.

When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) isconnected, the green control lamp willlight up on the instrument panel, and the

programmed speed and ACC status will bedisplayed ››› Fig. 195.

What ACC settings are possible?

● Setting your speed ››› page 224.

● Setting your distance ››› page 225.

● Connecting and activating the ACC››› page 225.

● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC››› page 225.

● Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journey ››› page 225.

● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 225.

● Conditions in which the ACC does not react››› page 225.

Setting speed

To set your speed, move the third lever loca-ted in position 1 upwards or downwards un-til the desired speed is shown on the instru-ment panel display. The speed adjustment ismade at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.

Once you are driving, if you wish to set thecurrent speed as the vehicle’s cruise speedand activate the ACC, press the button››› Fig. 198. If you wish to increase or reducespeed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6 mph),move the lever to position 2 ››› Fig. 197 orpress the button, respectively.

The set speed can be changed when the ve-hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like.

224


Any modification to the programmed speedwill be shown on the bottom left part of theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 195.

Setting your distance level

To increase/reduce the distance level, pressthe rocker switch towards the left/right››› Fig. 198 A .

The instrument panel display shows the mod-ification of the distance level. There are 5 dis-tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-mends level 3. The set distance can bechanged when the vehicle is stopped or dur-ing driving, as you like ››› .

Connecting and activating the ACC

To connect and activate the ACC, the positionof the gearbox selector lever, the vehiclespeed and the position of the third level ofthe ACC must all be taken into account.

● With a manual gearbox, the gearbox selec-tor lever must be in any gear except first, andspeed must be greater than approximately 30km/h. With an automatic gearbox, the gear-box selector lever must be in position D or S.

● To activate the ACC, with the third lever inposition 1 press the button or move thethird lever of the ACC to position 2

››› Fig. 197. At this point, the image of theACC on the instrument panel display willswitch to Active mode ››› Fig. 195.

When the ACC function is active, the vehicletravels at a set speed and distance from thevehicle ahead. Both speed and distance canbe changed at any time.

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC

To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the0 position ››› Fig. 197 (engaged). An ACCdeactivated message appears and thefunction is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, justto switch it temporarily to inactive mode(Standby), move the third lever to position 3

››› Fig. 197 or press the brake pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)if the vehicle is stopped and the driver dooris opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journey.

In wet road conditions, you should always seta larger distance with regard to the vehicle infront than when driving in dry conditions.

The following distances can be preselected:

● Very short

● Short

● Media

● Long

● Very long

In the Easy Connect system you can adjustthe distance level that will be applied whenthe ACC is connected using the buttonand the SETTINGS and Driver assistance functionbuttons ››› page 33.

Changing the driving profile

In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the drivingprofile selected can have an influence on theACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour››› page 242.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-haviour of the ACC can also be affected by se-lecting any of the following drive profiles inthe Easy Connect system:

● Normal

● Sport

● Eco

● Convenience

In this case, you should access the ACC set-tings using the button and the SETTINGS >Driver assistance > ACC function buttons

››› page 33.

The following conditions may lead the ACCnot to react:

● If the accelerator is pressed.

● If there is no gear engaged.

● If the ESC is controlling. »

225

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● If the driver is not wearing his/her seatbelt.

● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.

● If the vehicle is reversing.

● Driving faster than 210 km/h (150 mph).

Driver messages

ACC not availableThe system can no longer continue to guar-antee safe vehicle detection and will be de-activated. The sensor has lost its setting or isdamaged. Take the vehicle to a specialisedworkshop and have the fault repaired.

ACC and Front Assist: cur-rently not available. No sensorvision

This message will be displayed to the driver ifthe radar sensor's vision is impaired due, forexample, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.Clean the SEAT badge ››› Fig. 196.

ACC: currently not available.Gradient too steep

The maximum road slope has been excee-ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot beguaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on.

ACC: only available in D, Sor M

Select the D/S or M position on the selectorlever.

ACC: parking brake appliedThe ACC is deactivated if the parking brake isapplied. The ACC is available once again afterthe parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available.Intervention of stability con-trol

The message for the driver is displayed whenthe electronic stability control (ESC) inter-venes. In this case, the ACC is automaticallyswitched off.

ACC: Take action!The message for the driver is displayed if,when the vehicle starts up on a hill with amild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al-though the ACC is activated. Apply the braketo stop the vehicle from moving/collidingwith another vehicle.

ACC: speed limitThe message for the driver is displayed if, invehicles with manual gearbox, the currentspeed is too low for the ACC mode.

The speed to be stored must be at least30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiterswitches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h(12 mph).

ACC: available as of the 2ndgear

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear(manual gearbox).

ACC: engine speedThe message for the driver is displayed if,when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driv-er does not shift up or down a gear in time,which means exceeding or not reaching thepermissible engine speed. The ACC switchesitself off. A buzzer warning is heard.

ACC: clutch pressedVehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing theclutch pedal for longer abandons controlmode.

Door openVehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACCcannot be activated with the vehicle station-ary and the door open.

WARNING

There is a danger of rear collision when theminimum distance to the vehicle in front isexceeded and the speed difference betweenboth vehicles is so great that a speed reduc-tion by the ACC will not suffice. In this casethe brake pedal should be applied immedi-ately.

● The ACC may not be able to detect all situa-tions properly.

● “Stepping” on the accelerator may causethe ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver

226


braking will have priority over intervention bythe speed control or adaptive cruise control.

● Always be ready to use the brakes!

● Observe country-specific provisions gov-erning obligatory minimum distances be-tween vehicles.

Note

● The programmed speed is erased once theignition or the ACC are switched off.

● When the traction control system (ASR) isdeactivated during acceleration or else theESC is activated in Sport* Mode(››› page 120), the ACC switches off automati-cally.

● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, theengine switches off automatically during theACC stopping phase and restarts automatical-ly to begin driving.

Function for preventing overtaking inan inside lane

Fig. 199 On the instrument panel display:ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a func-tion that helps avoid overtaking while drivingin inside lanes at certain speeds.

If another vehicle is detected travelling at aslower speed in an outer lane, it is displayedon the multifunction display ››› Fig. 199.

To avoid overtaking while driving in an insidelane the system will gently brake, and in ac-cordance with the speed will prevent the carfrom overtaking. The driver can override thisfunction at any time by pressing the accelera-tor pedal. At low speeds the function is inac-tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or incity traffic.

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con-trol ACC temporarily in certain situa-tions

In the following situations the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) should be deactivateddue to the system's limitations ››› :

● When changing lanes, on tight bends androundabouts, in acceleration and decelera-tion lanes on motorways or in sections withroad works to prevent involuntary accelera-tion to reach the programmed speed.

● When going through a tunnel, as operationcould be affected.

● On roads with several lanes, when other ve-hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak-ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will beovertaken on the right.

● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as thevehicle in front might not be detected proper-ly or, in certain circumstances, might not bedetected at all.

WARNING

If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-tions described, serious accidents and inju-ries may occur.

● Always switch off the ACC in critical situa-tions. »

227

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore-mentioned situations, you may commit a le-gal offence.

Special driving situations

Fig. 200 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy-clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 201 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) Onevehicle turning and another stationary.

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certainphysical limitations inherent in the system.For example, certain reactions of the ACC, incertain circumstances, may be unexpected orcome late from the driver's point of view. Sopay attention in order to intervene if necessa-ry.

For example, the following traffic situationscall for the utmost attention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase (onlyvehicles with automatic gearbox)

After a stopping phase, the ACC may begindriving automatically when the vehicle infront drives off ››› .

When the ACC halts the vehicle (e.g. trafficjam), the instrument panel display shows theACC ready to start message. If the ve-hicle ahead drives off again, the ACC will alsodo so automatically.

If the vehicle ahead does not drive off again,the vehicle can be kept indefinitely in theACC ready to start status by operatingthe third lever repeatedly towards position

2 ››› Fig. 197 or by pressing the brake pedal.If the Press the brake message is shownon the instrument panel, press the brake. Ifyou do not, an acoustic warning will be heardand the ACC will switch to inactive mode(Standby). At this point, the vehicle may be-gin to move towards the stopped vehicleahead ››› .

Overtaking

When the turn signal lights up before the ve-hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, theACC accelerates the vehicle automaticallyand thus reduces the distance from the vehi-cle in front.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane,if the ACC does not detect another vehicle infront, it accelerates until it reaches the pro-grammed speed and maintains it.

System acceleration can be interrupted atany time by pressing the brake or moving thethird lever backwards ››› page 224.

228


Driving through a bend

On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen-sor may no longer determine the vehicle infront or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane››› Fig. 200 A. In these situations the vehiclemay brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re-act to the vehicle in front. In this case, thedriver has to intervene by accelerating or in-terrupting the braking process by applyingthe brake or pushing the third lever back-wards ››› page 224.

Driving in tunnels

When driving through tunnels the radar sen-sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehicles

The radar sensor can only detect narrow ormisaligned vehicles when they are withinrange ››› Fig. 200 B. This applies particularlyto narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. Inthese cases, you should brake as necessary.

Vehicles with special loads and accessories

Special loads and accessories of other vehi-cles that jut out over the sides, backwards orover the top may be out of the ACC's range.

Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-cles with special loads and accessories orwhen overtaking them. In these cases, youshould brake as necessary.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles changing lanes a short distanceaway from your own can only be detectedwhen they are within range of the sensors.Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-act ››› Fig. 201 C. In these cases, you shouldbrake as necessary.

Stationary vehicles

The ACC does not detect stationary objectswhile driving, such as traffic tails or damagedvehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns ormoves over and there is a stationary vehiclein front of it, the ACC will not react to it››› Fig. 201 D. In these cases, you shouldbrake as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite directionand vehicles crossing your path

The ACC does not react to vehicles approach-ing from the opposite direction or vehiclescrossing your path.

Metal objects

Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheetsused in road works, can confuse the radarsensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radar sensoroperates

If laser sensor operation is impaired, due toheavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC isdeactivated temporarily. The relevant textmessage will appear in the dash panel dis-play. If necessary clean the SEATbadge ››› Fig. 196.

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the ACC will automatically beavailable again. The message on the instru-ment panel screen will switch off and the ACCwill be reactivated again.

ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-dar reverse reflection, for example in a closedcar park.

Trailer mode

When driving with trailer the ACC controlsless dynamically.

Overheated brakes

If the brakes overheat, for example afterabrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. Therelevant text message will appear in the dashpanel display. In this case, adaptive cruisecontrol cannot be activated.

Adaptive cruise control can be reactivatedonce brake temperature has cooled suffi-ciently. The message will disappear from theinstrument panel display. If the message ACC »

229

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

not available remains on for quite a longtime it means that there is a fault. Contact aspecialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-iting a SEAT dealership.

WARNING

If you do not heed the Press the brakemessage, the vehicle may initiate an involun-tary movement and could crash into the vehi-cle ahead. In any event, before driving off,check that the road is clear. The radar sensormay not detect obstacles on the road. Thiscould cause an accident and serious injuries.If necessary, apply the brake.

Lane Assist system*

Introduction

Fig. 202 In the windscreen: field of vision ofthe Lane Assist system camera.

Using the camera located in the windscreen,the Lane Assist system detects the possiblelines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in-voluntarily approaches a dividing line it hasdetected, the system notifies the driver witha corrective steering movement. The purposeis not only to warn the driver, but also tokeep the vehicle inside the lane. This move-ment can be over-regulated at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signalsactivated, given that the Lane Assist systemunderstands that a lane change is required.

Indications on the display and lamps

Fig. 203 On the instrument panel display: In-dication on the Lane Assist system display(example 1).

230


Fig. 204 On the instrument panel display: In-dication on the Lane Assist system display(example 2).

Status display

The system is active, but not available,either because the minimum speed hasnot been reached or because the lanelines are not recognised ››› Fig. 203 A.

The system is active and available, bothlane lines are recognised. The steeringangle is not being corrected at this mo-ment ››› Fig. 203 B.

–

–

The system is operational, the highligh-ted line A indicates that there was arisk of involuntarily crossing the laneline and that the steering is being adjus-ted to correct the angle ››› Fig. 204 C.

The two highlighted lines A light up si-multaneously when both lane lines arerecognised and the Lane Assist functionis active ››› Fig. 204 D.

Control lamps

It lights up yellow: Lane Assist activebut not available.

The system can not accurately recognise the lane.Please see page 232, the Lane Assist system is notavailable (the control lamp is lit up yellow).

It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

WARNING


Operating mode

Steering wheel vibration

The following situations can cause vibrationin the steering wheel and require the driverto take active control of driving:

–

–

● When the steering angle assist value re-quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is high-er than the system’s maximum operating val-ue.

● If the system ceases to display the lanelines while assisting with steering.

Switching the Lane Assist system on or off

Through the Easy Connect system

● Press the Easy Connect button

● Press the SETTINGS function button

● Press the function button Driver assistance toopen the menu.

OR: Using the Driving Assist button onthe turn signal lever* ››› page 37.

Lane Assist with lane centring guide

The Lane Centring Guide function is in-tended to keep the vehicle in the centre ofthe lane.

If the driver has a tendency to veer slightly offcentre in the lane, the system adapts to driv-er preferences.

The Lane Centring Guide function is ac-tivated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys-tem using the button and the SETTINGS

function button ››› page 120. »

231

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Self-deactivation: the Lane Assist system canbe automatically deactivated if there is a sys-tem malfunction. The control lampdisappears.

Hands-Off Function

In the absence of steering wheel activity thesystem alerts the driver with acoustic signalsand a text message on the dash panel askingto actively take over the steering.

If the driver does not react to this, the systemalso alerts the driver with a little shaking mo-tion through the brakes and, if the vehiclehas it, activates the Emergency Assist func-tion ››› page 234.

In vehicles without Emergency Assist, theadaptive lane guidance function will be disa-bled after the corresponding warnings to thedriver.

The lane assist system is active but it is notavailable (the control lamp is lit up yellow)

● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38mph).

● When the Lane Assist system does not de-tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-ple, in the event warnings indicating roadworks, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflec-tions.

● When the radius of a curve is too small.

● When no road markings can be seen.

● When the distance to the next marking totoo great.

● When the system does not detect any clearand active steering movement during a longperiod of time.

● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamicdriving styles.

● If a turn signal is activated.

● With the stability control system (ESC) inSport mode or switched off.

BSD Plus (Lane Assist with Blind Spot Detec-tor)*

The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat-ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions››› page 237. In this case, the Lane Assistfunction expands its functions in the follow-ing way:

If the driver tries to change lane and there isa vehicle in the blind spot:

● The lamp flashes in the correspondingrear-view mirror even though the turn signalhas not been activated.

● The steering wheel vibrates to warn thedriver of the risk of collision.

● torque is applied to correct the steeringand return the vehicle to its lane.

Switching off the Lane Assist system in thefollowing situations

Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,switch it off in the following situations:

● When more attention is required of thedriver

● When driving in a sporty style

● In unfavourable weather conditions

● On roads in poor condition

● In areas of road works

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the Lane Assistsystem cannot change the limits imposed bythe laws of physics and by the very nature ofthe system. Careless or uncontrolled use ofthe Lane Assist system may cause accidentsand injury. The system is not a replacementfor driver awareness.

● Always adapt your speed and the distanceto the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,weather conditions, the condition of the roadand the traffic situation.

● Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel so it can be turned at any time.

● The Lane Assist system does not detect allroad markings. The road surfaces, road struc-tures or objects in poor condition can be in-correctly detected as road markings undercertain circumstances by the Lane Assist sys-tem. In such situations, switch the Lane As-sist system off immediately.

232


● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.

● When the area of vision of the camera be-comes dirty, covered or is damaged, the LaneAssist system function can be affected.

CAUTION

In order to avoid influencing the operation ofthe system, the following points must be tak-en into account:

● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.

● Do not cover the area of vision of the cam-era.

● Check that the area of vision of the wind-screen camera is not damaged.

Note

● The lane departure warning system hasbeen exclusively developed for driving onpaved roads only.

● If the Lane Assist system does not work asdescribed in this chapter, do not use it andcontact a specialised workshop.

● Before starting a journey, verify that thefield of vision of the camera is not covered››› Fig. 202.

● Always keep the field of vision of the cam-era clean.

● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Traffic Jam Assist

Related video



Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep thecar within its lane and to move in convoy incase of traffic congestion or slow traffic.

Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function ofLane Assist ››› page 230 and combines LaneAssist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ››› page 221. Therefore, it is essentialthat you read these two chapters carefullyand note the limitations of the systems andthe information about them.

Operation of Traffic Jam Assist

At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), TrafficJam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis-tance preset by the driver with respect to thevehicle ahead and help stay within the lane››› .

To do this, the system automatically controlsthe accelerator, brakes and steering, andslows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces-sary, when faced with a vehicle in front thathas stopped. It automatically moves off againwhen the vehicle ahead moves.

Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use onmotorways and wide roads. Therefore, neveruse it in city traffic.

Technical requirements for using Traffic JamAssist

● Lane departure warning must be activated: button > SETTINGS > Driver as-sistance > Lane departure warning(Lane Assist) ››› page 33.

● The Lane Centring Guide must be activated: button > SETTINGS > Driver as-sistance > Lane departure warning(Lane Assist)● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be con-nected and active ››› page 224.

● The speed must be below 60 km/h(38 mph). »

233

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane As-sist control light turns yellow)

● If any of the conditions mentioned onpage 233, Technical requirements for usingTraffic Jam Assist are no longer met.

● If any of the conditions required for opera-tion of the Lane Assist are not met››› page 230.

● If any of the conditions necessary for theadaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are nolonger fulfilled ››› page 221.

Situations in which Traffic Jam Assist mustbe switched off

Due to the limitations of the system, TrafficJam Assist must always be switched off in thefollowing situations:

● When more attention is required by thedriver.

● When driving in a very sporty style.

● In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in caseof snow or heavy rain.

● When driving on roads in poor condition.

● In sections with roadworks.

● In city journeys.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into Traf-fic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of phys-ics; it only works within the limits of the sys-

tem. Accidents and severe injury may occur ifTraffic Jam Assist is used negligently or invol-untarily. The system is not a replacement fordriver awareness.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to thevehicle in front of you at all times to suit thevisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.

● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour-neys.

● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is poorvisibility, for example, in case of snow, ice,rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slipperysections or flooded roads.

● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or onroads where the surface is not firm. TrafficJam Assist has been designed for use onpaved roads only.

● Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peopleor animals or vehicles crossing your path orthat approach you head-on down the samelane.

● If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce speedsufficiently, brake the vehicle immediately byapplying the pedal.

● If the vehicle continues to move when youwish it to stop after a driver interventionprompt, brake the vehicle by applying thepedal.

● If driver intervention is requested on thedash panel display, immediately resume con-trol of the vehicle.

● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering at any

time. The driver is always responsible forkeeping the vehicle in its own lane.

● Always be prepared to take charge of driv-ing (accelerating or braking) yourself.

Note

● If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter, stop using it and con-tact a specialised workshop.

● If the system is faulty, take it to a special-ised workshop and have it checked.

Emergency Assist


Emergency Assist detects whether there is in-activity by the driver and can automaticallykeep the car within the lane and stop it alto-gether if necessary. This way the system canactively help avoid an accident.

Emergency Assist is an additional function ofLane Assist ››› page 230 and combines LaneAssist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ››› page 221. Therefore, it is essentialthat you read these two chapters carefullyand note the limitations of the systems andthe information about them.

234


Operation of Emergency Assist

Emergency Assist detects when the driverceases to perform any activity and repeatedlyrequests that he/she regain active control ofthe vehicle, through the use of optical andacoustic warnings and by applying thebrakes.

If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys-tem automatically takes over the accelerator,brakes and steering in order to brake the ve-hicle and keep it in its lane ››› . When theEmergency Assist is actively adjusting, thehazard warning lights come on ››› page 149and the vehicle makes slight zigzag move-ments in the lane in order to warn other driv-ers.

If the remaining braking distance is suffi-cient, if necessary the system slows down thevehicle until it stops completely and auto-matically switches on the electronic parkingbrake ››› page 186.

Switching the Emergency Assist on and off

The Emergency Assist is switched on auto-matically when the Lane Assist is switched on››› page 230.

Technical requirements for using the Emer-gency Assist

● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must beswitched on ››› page 221.

● The Lane Assist must be switched on››› page 230.

● The selector lever must be in the D/S posi-tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate.

● The system must have detected a lane sep-aration line on both sides of the vehicle››› Fig. 204.

The following conditions may cause theEmergency Assist not to react or to switch offautomatically:

● If the driver accelerates, brakes or movesthe steering wheel.

● If any of the conditions mentioned in››› page 235, Technical requirements for us-ing the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.

● If any of the conditions required for opera-tion of the Lane Assist are not met››› page 230.

● If any of the conditions necessary for theadaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are nolonger fulfilled ››› page 221.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into theEmergency Assist cannot overcome the limitsimposed by the laws of physics; it only workswithin the limits of the system. The driver isresponsible for driving the vehicle.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance to thevehicle in front of you at all times to suit the

visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.

● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering at anytime.

● The Emergency Assist alone cannot alwaysavoid accidents or serious injuries.

● If the operation of the Emergency Assist isimpaired, for example if the radar sensor ofthe adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the LaneAssist camera are covered or have lost theirsettings, the system may intervene inoppor-tunely in braking or in steering.

● The Emergency Assist does not react topeople or animal or vehicles crossing yourpath or which approach you head-on in thesame lane.

WARNING

If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-tunely, serious accidents and injuries may oc-cur.

● If the Emergency Assist does not operateproperly, switch off the Lane Assist››› page 230. Doing so will also switch off theEmergency Assist.

● Have the system checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this. »

235

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Note

● Automatic interventions by the EmergencyAssist on the brakes may be interrupted bypressing the accelerator or brake or by mov-ing the wheel.

● Hazard warning lights that come on auto-matically can be switched off by pressing theaccelerator or the break, moving the steeringwheel or pressing the hazard warning lightswitch.

● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist maydecelerate the vehicle until it comes to a com-plete stop.

● When the Emergency Assist is activated, itis only available again after the ignition hasbeen switched off and back on again.

236


Blind spot detector (BSD) withparking assistance (RCTA)*

Related video

Fig. 206 Smart solutions

Introduction

The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detectthe traffic situation behind the vehicle.

The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helpsthe driver when backing out of a parallelparking spot and in manoeuvring.

The blind spot detector has been developedfor driving on paved roads.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into theblind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis-tance (RCTA) included cannot overcome thelimits imposed by the laws of physics; it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Acci-dents and severe injury may occur if the blindspot detection system or the rear cross traffic

alert are used negligently or involuntarily.The system is not a replacement for driverawareness.


● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering at anytime.

● Pay attention to the control lamps that maycome on in the external rear view mirrors andon the instrument panel, and follow any in-structions they may give.

● The blind spot assistant could react to anyspecial constructions that might be presenton the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high or irreg-ular dividers. This may cause erroneous warn-ings.

● Never use the blind spot detector with rearcross traffic alert on unpaved roads. The blindspot detector with rear cross traffic alert hasbeen designed for use on paved roads.

● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.

● Never use the blind spot detector or theparking assistant if the radar sensors aredirty.

● The external rear view mirror control lampsmay have limited functionality due to solarradiation.

CAUTION

● The radar sensors on the rear bumper maybe damaged or shifted in the event of a colli-sion, for example, when entering or exiting aparking space. This may result in the systemdisconnecting itself, or at least possibly hav-ing its functionality diminished.

● In order to ensure that the radar sensorswork properly, keep the rear bumper free ofsnow and ice and do not cover it.

● The rear bumper should only be paintedwith paint authorised by SEAT. The blind spotdetector's functions may be limited or workincorrectly if other paints are used.

Note

If the blind spot detector with parking assis-tant does not work as described in this chap-ter, do not use it and contact a specialisedworkshop.

Control lamps

Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:

Lights up

Lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is activa-ted and ready to operate.

Lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehicle inthe blind spot. »

237

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Flashes

The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in theblind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in thedirection of the detected vehicle ››› .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist››› page 230, a warning to switch lanes will also appeareven though the turn signal has not been engaged(blind spot detector “Plus”).


If there are no indications from the controllamp in the external rear view mirror, thismeans that the blind spot detector has notdetected any other vehicles in the area ››› .

If the dipped beam is on, then the controllamps in the external rear view mirrors will bedimmed (night mode).

WARNING

If the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up, thevehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-dents and severe injuries.

● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-es.

● Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-sponding text messages when they light upmay result in damage to the vehicle.

Blind spot detector (BSD)

Fig. 207 In the exterior mirrors: indication ofthe blind spot detector.

Fig. 208 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sen-sor zones.

The blind spot detector uses radar sensors tomonitor the areas behind the vehicle››› Fig. 208. The system does this by measur-ing the vehicle's distance from other vehiclesand its speed differential. The blind spot de-tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-cal signals in the external rear view mirrors tonotify the driver.

Indication in the external rear view mirrors

The control lamp (expanded view) providesan indication in the corresponding externalmirror ››› Fig. 207 regarding the traffic situa-tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to becritical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation tothe left of the vehicle, and the control lamp ofthe right-hand external mirror indicates thetraffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

238


In the case of retrofitted tinted windows orwindows with tinted film, the indications ofthe external mirrors may not be seen clearlyor correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free ofsnow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-hesives or other similar materials.

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located on the left andright of the bumper and are not visible from

the outside ››› Fig. 208. The sensors monitorboth the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-hicle ››› Fig. 209, ››› Fig. 210. The range to thesides of the vehicle is a bit larger than thewidth of a lane.

The lane width is not detected individually,but is rather pre-configured in the system.Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-tween two lanes, the indications may be in-correct. Furthermore, the system can detectvehicles driving in the lane next to you (if

there are any), and can also detect stationaryobjects such as dividers, and thus give an in-correct indication.

239

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Driving situations

Fig. 209 Schematic diagram: Passing sit-uation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indi-cation from the blind spot detector in the left-hand external mirror.

Fig. 210 Schematic diagram: Situation ofpassing and then moving into the right-handlane. Indication from the blind spot detec-tor in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication willbe displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 209 (arrow) or ››› Fig. 210 (arrow):

● When being overtaken by another vehicle››› Fig. 209 .

● When overtaking another vehicle››› Fig. 210 with a speed differential of ap-prox. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is pass-

ing at a considerably higher speed, no indi-cation will be displayed.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooneran indication will be displayed in the externalmirror, because the blind spot detector takesinto account the speed differential with othervehicles. Thus even though the distance fromthe other vehicle is identical, the indicationwill appear sooner in some cases and later inothers.

Physical limitations inherent to the system

In some situations the blind spot detectormay not interpret the traffic situation correct-ly. E.g. in the following situations:

● on tight bends;

● in the case of lanes with different widths;

● at the top of slopes;

● in adverse weather conditions;

240


● in the case of special constructions to theside of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di-viders.

Parking assistant (RCTA)

Fig. 211 Schematic representation of the rearcross traffic alert: zone monitored around thevehicle exiting the parking space.

The parking assistant uses the radar sensorson the rear bumper ››› Fig. 208 to monitor thetraffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backsout of a parallel parking space or as it is be-ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi-bility conditions.

If the system detects that someone else onthe road is approaching the rear of the vehi-cle ››› Fig. 211, an acoustic alarm is heard.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver isalso informed by means of a visual signal onthe radio screen. This signal is displayed inthe form of a red strip at the back of the im-age of the vehicle on the radio screen. Thisstrip displays the side of the vehicle towardswhich traffic is approaching.1)

Automatic braking to reduce damages

If the rear cross traffic alert detects thatsomeone else on the road is approaching therear of the vehicle and the driver does notstep on the brake, the system will engage thebrakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-matically engaging the brakes to reduce anydamage. The system will brake automaticallyif the vehicle is reversing at a speed of ap-proximately 1-12 km (1-7 mph). Once it hasdetected that the vehicle has stopped, thesystem will keep the vehicle stopped for ap-prox. 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-age, the system will not be able to automati-cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking bystepping hard on the accelerator pedal or thebrake pedal in order to regain control of thevehicle.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into therear cross traffic alert cannot overcome thelimits imposed by the laws of physics; it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Theparking assistant function should not temptyou into taking any risks. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.

● The system should never be used in limitedvisibility conditions or complicated traffic,e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossingmultiple lanes.

● Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle'ssurroundings, since the system often fails todetect things such as bicycles or pedestrians.

● The rear cross traffic alert itself will notbrake the vehicle to a complete stop.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped witha parking system.

241

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Using the blind spot detector (BSD)with parking assistant (RCTA)

Activating and deactivating the blind spotdetector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA)

The blind spot detector with parking assis-tant can be switched on and off by accessingthe Assistance systems menu on thedash panel display using the steering wheelcontrols. If the vehicle is equipped with amultifunction camera, it can also be ac-cessed by means of the driver assistance sys-tems key located on the main beam head-light lever.

Open the Assistants menu.

● Blind spot

● Exit Assist

If the verification box on the control panel ischecked , the functionality will be automat-ically activated at ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op-erate, the indications in the external mirrorswill turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-ment in the system will remain active.

If the blind spot detector was automaticallydeactivated, it will only be possible to restartthe system after turning the vehicle off andrestarting it.

Automatic deactivation of the blind spot de-tector (BSD)

The radar sensors of the blind spot detectorwith rear cross traffic alert will be automati-cally deactivated when, among other rea-sons, one of the sensors is detected to bepermanently covered. This may be the case if,for example, there is a layer of snow or ice infront of one of the sensors.

The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display.

Trailer mode

The Blind spot detector and the rear crosstraffic alert will be automatically deactivatedand it will be impossible to activate them ifthe tow hitch is electrically connected to atrailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with atrailer connected electrically to the vehicle, amessage will appear on the instrument paneldisplay indicating that the blind spot detec-tor and the rear cross traffic alert are deacti-vated. Once the trailer has been unhitchedfrom the vehicle, if you want to use the blindspot detector and the rear cross traffic alert,you will have to reactivate them in the corre-sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,then the blind spot detector and the rearcross traffic alert will have to be deactivatedmanually when driving with a trailer.

SEAT Drive Profile*

Related video


Introduction

The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver tochoose between four profiles or modes, Eco,Normal, Sport and Individual, thatmodify the behaviour of various vehicle func-tions, providing different driving experiences.

In addition, the 4Drive version features theOffroad and Snow profiles.

The Individual profile can be configuredaccording to personal preferences. The otherprofiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on thefollowing functions:

242


Engine

Depending on the profile selected, the en-gine responds more spontaneously or morein harmony with the movements of the accel-erator. Additionally, when the Eco profile isselected, the Start-Stop function is automati-cally activated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, thegear change points are modified to positionthem in lower or higher engine speed ranges.Additionally, the Eco profile activates the in-ertia function, enabling consumption to befurther reduced.

In manual gearbox vehicles, the Eco profilecauses the gear change recommendation in-dications that appear on the dash panel tovary, facilitating more efficient driving.

Address

The power steering varies its driving modesand adapts to the profile selected, thus offer-ing the best behaviour for each situation.

Air conditioning

In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operatein Eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-sumption.

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

The acceleration gradient of the adaptivecruise control varies according to the activedriving profile ››› page 221.

Electronic stability control (ESC)

In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles,the electronic stability Control (ESC)››› page 189 adjusts to adapt to the terrain.

In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti-vated in the Offroad profile ››› page 210.

Adjusting driving profile

Fig. 213 Centre console: Driving Experiencebutton.

You can select the Eco, Normal, Sport, In-dividual, Offroad1) and Snow1) profiles inthe following way:

● Turn the Driving Experience button until therequired profile lights up on the Easy Con-nect system display as well as on the DrivingExperience button ››› Fig. 213.

● OR: select the required profile on thetouch-screen of the Easy Connect system, inthe menu that opens up on turning theDriving Experience button.

The features of each profile can be seen bypressing the Profile information button of theEasy Connect system display.

In the Individual profile it is possible toconfigure the characteristics of the vehicleusing the Profile setup button of the EasyConnect system display.

An icon on the Easy Connect system displayprovides information about the active profileif it is different than Normal. The selectoridentifies the profile chosen by means of ared LED light. »


Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Drivingprofile

Characteristics

EcoPlaces the vehicle in a particularly lowstate of consumption, facilitating a fuel-saving driving style that is respectful tothe environment.

Normal Offers a balanced driving experience,suitable for everyday use.

SportProvides a complete dynamic perform-ance in the vehicle, enabling the user amore sporty driving style.

Individ-ual

It allows you to personalise the configura-tion. The functions that can be adjusteddepend on the equipment fitted in the ve-hicle.

Offroada) It adjusts the vehicle's parameters in or-der to maintain optimal off-road driving.

Snowa)It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour for driv-ing on slippery road surfaces, optimisinggrip and manoeuvrability.

a) Only for 4Drive models.

WARNING

When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten-tion to all traffic: doing otherwise could causean accident.

Note

● When the vehicle is switched off it will al-ways store the driving profile that was selec-ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev-

ertheless, when the engine is restarted, theengine and the gear will not restart in the set-ting selected. For engine and gear to revert tothe desired position, select the correspond-ing drive profile again or press the Easy Con-nect system button repeatedly.

● When the vehicle is restarted after usingthe Offroad or Snow settings, the system isalways activated in the Normal profile.

● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and trafficconditions.

● The Eco profile is not recommended whentowing a vehicle.

Kick-down

The Kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration to be reached.

If the Eco* profile has been selected in theSEAT Drive Profile ››› page 243 and theaccelerator is pressed beyond a hard point,the engine power is automatically controlledto give your vehicle maximum acceleration.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, which couldresult in skidding.

244


Traffic sign detection system*1)

Introduction

The traffic sign detection system records thestandard traffic signs in front of the vehiclewith a camera located on the base of the in-terior mirror and provides information aboutspeed limits and overtaking prohibitions.Within its limitations, the system also dis-plays additional signals, such as time-specif-ic prohibitions, signs for vehicles towing trail-ers ››› page 273 or limitations that only applyin the event of rain. Even on journeys withoutsigns, the system may display any applicablespeed limits.

In Germany, on motorways and vehicle roads,besides speed limits and overtaking provi-sions the system also displays the end ofprohibition signs. The valid speed limit at thetime in other countries is always shown.

WARNING

The technology in the traffic sign detectionsystem cannot change the limits imposed bythe laws of physics and only works within thesystem's limits. Do not let the extra conven-ience afforded by the traffic sign detectionsystem tempt you into taking any risks whendriving. The system is not a replacement fordriver awareness.

● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.

● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fogmay lead to the system failing to display traf-fic signs or not displaying them correctly.

● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-ered or damaged, system operation may beimpaired.

WARNING

The driving recommendations and traffic indi-cations shown on the traffic sign detectionsystem may differ from the actual currenttraffic situation.

● The system may not detect or correctlyshow all the traffic signs.

● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the system.

Note

In order not to compromise the system's op-eration, please take the following points intoaccount:

● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.

● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-era.

● Always replace damaged or worn bladeswhen required to avoid lines on the camera'sfield of vision.

● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the camera's field of vision.

Note

● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-tion system may cause the system to showtraffic signs incorrectly.

● In the waypoints mode of the navigationsystem, the traffic sign detection system isonly partly available.

1) System available depending on the country.245

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Indication on display

Fig. 214 On the instrument panel display: ex-amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi-tions with their respective additional signs.

The traffic signs detected by the system aredisplayed on the dash panel display››› Fig. 214 and, depending on the navigationsystem fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-ment system as well ››› page 33.

Traffic sign de-tection systemmessages

Cause and solution

There are notraffic signsavailable

The system is booting up.OR ELSE: the camera has not rec-ognised any obligation or pro-hibition signs.

Error: Detec-tion of trafficsigns

There is a fault in the system.Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Speed warningcurrently un-available.

The speed warning function ofthe traffic sign detection systemis faulty.Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Detection oftraffic signs:Clean the wind-screen!

The windscreen is dirty in thecamera area.Clean the windscreen.

Detection oftraffic signs:Limited at themoment

The navigation system is nottransmitting any data.Check that the navigation sys-tem's maps are up-to-date.OR ELSE: the vehicle is currentlyin a region that is not includedin the navigation system's map.

No data availa-ble

The traffic sign detection systemdoes not work in the currentcountry.

WARNING

If messages are ignored, the vehicle may stallin traffic and cause accidents and severe inju-ries.

● Never ignore the messages displayed.

● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

Note


Operation

The traffic sign detection system does notwork in all countries. Keep this in mind whentravelling abroad.

Activating and deactivating traffic sign dis-play on the instrument panel

The permanent display of traffic signs on theinstrument panel can be activated or deacti-vated in the infotainment system using the button and the SETTINGS andDriver Assistance function buttons.

Display of traffic signs

When the traffic sign detection system is con-nected, a camera located on the base of theinterior rear-view mirror records the traffic

246


signs in front of the vehicle. After checkingand evaluating the information from the cam-era, the navigation system and the currentvehicle data, up to three valid traffic signsare displayed ››› Fig. 214 B in conjunctionwith their corresponding additional signs.

The sign that is currently valid for thedriver is shown in the left side of thescreen For example, a maximum speedlimit of 130 km/h (100 mph)››› Fig. 214 A.

A sign valid only in certain circum-stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) isshown second, together with the addi-tional rain sign.

If the windscreen wiper isworking while you are driving, the signalwith the additional rain sign will beshown first, on the left, as it is the onethat is applicable at the time.

A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.No overtaking at certain times, will bedisplayed third ››› Fig. 214 C.

Speed warning

If the system detects that the permittedspeed is exceeded, it may warn the driverwith a “gong” and visually with a messageon the dash panel display.

The speed warning can be adjusted or deacti-vated completely in the infotainment systemusing the button and the SETTINGS and

First:

Second:

Additional sign:

Third:

Driver Assistance function buttons››› page 33. The speed is adjusted insteps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a range of be-tween 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph)above the maximum speed permitted.

Trailer mode

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory and a trailer that iselectrically connected to the vehicle, it is pos-sible to activate or deactivate the display ofspecific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-tions. Activation or deactivation is performedon the infotainment system using the button and the SETTINGS andDriver Assistance function buttons

››› page 33.

For trailer mode, the display of speed limitsapplicable to the type of trailer or to the legalprovisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within arange of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to aspeed greater than that which is permitted inthe country in question for driving with atrailer, the system automatically displays theusual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h(50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-vated, the system displays the speed limitsas if there were no trailer hitched.

Limited operation

The traffic sign detection system has certainlimitations. The following cases may lead thesystem to operate with limitations or not atall:

● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,rain, fog or intense mist.

● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-on traffic or by the sun.

● When driving at high speeds.

● If the camera is covered or dirty.

● If the traffic signs are out of the camera'sfield of vision.

● If the traffic signs are partially or totallycovered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other ve-hicles.

● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfilthe regulations.

● In the case of damaged or bent trafficsigns.

● In the case of variable messages on over-head or gantry signs (LED-based variable traf-fic signs or other lighting units).

● If the maps on the navigation system arenot up-to-date.

● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehiclesthat depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits onlorries.

247

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Fatigue detection (break rec-ommendation)*

Introduction

The Fatigue detection informs the driverwhen their driving behaviour shows signs offatigue.

WARNING

Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatiguedetection system tempt you into taking anyrisks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi-cient in length when making long journeys.

● The driver always assumes the responsibil-ity of driving to their full capacity.

● Never drive if you are tired.

● The system does not detect the tiredness ofthe driver in all circumstances. Consult the in-formation in the section ››› page 248, Systemlimitations.

● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu-vre as driver tiredness.

● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!

● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note

● Fatigue detection has been developed fordriving on motorways and well paved roadsonly.

● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Function and operation

Fig. 215 On the instrument panel display: fa-tigue detection symbol.

Fatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This isconstantly compared with the current drivingbehaviour. If the system detects that the driv-er is tired, an audible warning is given with asound and an optic warning is shown with asymbol and complementary message on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 215. Themessage on the instrument panel display is

shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-pending on the case, is repeated. The systemstores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel displaycan be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or thebutton on the multi function steeringwheel ››› page 36.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 36.

Conditions of operation

Driving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and off

Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-vated in the Easy Connect system with the button and the SETTINGS function button

››› page 33. A mark indicates that the ad-justment has been activated.

System limitations

The Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)

● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)

248


● When cornering

● On roads in poor condition

● In unfavourable weather conditions

● When a sporty driving style is employed

● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long pe-riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) thesystem automatically re-establishes the tired-ness calculation. When driving at a fasterspeed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-ted.

Park Assist*

Related video


Introduction

The Park Assist system is an additional func-tion of ParkPilot ››› page 257 and helps thedriver to:

● find a suitable parking space,

● select a parking mode,

● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-dicular and parallel spaces,

● park driving forwards in suitable perpen-dicular spaces,

● exit a parking space driving forwards froma parallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-tory radio the front, rear and side areas arerepresented, and the position of obstacles isshown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system and its userequires special attention by the driver ››› .

WARNING

The technology used in the park assist sys-tem involves a series of limitations inherentin the actual system and in the use of ultra-sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.

● Any accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.


● Certain surfaces of objects and garmentsdo not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor-rectly, these objects or people wearing suchclothes.

● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affectedby external sound sources. In certain circum-stances this may prevent them from detect-ing people or objects.

● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots inwhich obstacles and people are not regis-tered.

● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the ultrasound sensors do notdetect small children, animals or certain ob-jects in all situations.

WARNING

Quick turns of the steering wheel when park-ing or exiting a parking space with Park As-sist can cause serious injury.

● Do not hold the steering wheel during ma-noeuvres to park or exit a parking space untilthe system requests it. Doing so disables thesystem during the manoeuvre, resulting inthe parking being cancelled. »

249

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

CAUTION

● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonicsensors do not detect objects such as trailertongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, oran open (or opening) rear lid, which coulddamage the vehicle.

● Retrofitting of certain accessories to the ve-hicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interferewith the operation of the Park Assist systemand cause damage.

● The Park Assist system uses as a referenceparked vehicles, curbs and other objects.Make sure that the tyres and wheels are notdamaged while parking. If necessary, oppor-tunely interrupt the parking manoeuvre toavoid damaging the vehicle.

● The ultrasound sensors on the bumper maybe damaged or shifted in the event of a colli-sion, for example, when entering or exiting aparking space.

● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do notapply it directly unless very briefly and al-ways from a distance of more than 10 cm.

● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the regis-tration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:

– false detections,

– loss of sensor visibility.

– cancellation of the parking manoeuvre ordefective parking.

● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is damaged,the area corresponding to that group of sen-sors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannotbe activated until the fault is corrected. How-ever, you can still use the sensors of the oth-er bumper as per usual. If there is a fault inthe system, consult a specialist workshop.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealershipfor this.

Note

● In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of thebumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do notcover them with adhesives or other objects.

● Certain sources of noise, such as rough as-phalt or paving stones and the noise of othervehicles can induce the Park Assist system orParkPilot to give erroneous warnings.

● In order to become familiar with the systemand its functions, SEAT recommends that youpractice operating the Park Assist system inan area where there is not too much traffic orin a car park.

Description of the Park Assist system

Fig. 217 At the top of the centre console: but-ton to switch on the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist systemare the ultrasonic sensors located in the frontand rear bumpers, the button ››› Fig. 217to switch the system on and off and the mes-sages on the instrument panel display.

Prematurely stopping or automatically inter-rupting the manoeuvres for parking or exit-ing a parking space

Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres forparking or exiting a parking space in any ofthe following cases:

● Press the button.

● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h(4 mph).

● The driver takes hold of the steering wheel.

250


● The parking manoeuvre does not end with-in approximately 6 minutes following activa-tion of the automatic steering.

● There is a fault in the system (the system istemporarily unavailable).

● ASR is switched off.

● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.

● The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary thatnone of these things occur and that the button is pressed again.


The Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system. For exam-ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exita parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, abrief signal sounds to prompt the driver tochange between forward and reverse gears(depending on the case). In successive ma-noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver tochange gears, at the latest, when the contin-uous audible signal is given (object presentat a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer-ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-strument panel also displays the symbol .Keep the brake pedal depressed while thesymbol remains on the dash panel display toturn the wheels with the vehicle stopped.This way, the system will require fewer ma-noeuvres to complete the parking action.

Trailer mode

The Park Assist system cannot be switchedon if the factory-fitted towing bracket››› page 273 is electrically connected to atrailer.

After changing a wheel

If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stopsentering and exiting parking spaces correctly,the circumference of the new wheel may bedifferent and the system may need to adaptto it. The adaptation is automatic and takesplace during driving. Making turns slowly andin both directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) for afew minutes may contribute to this adapta-tion process ››› in Introduction onpage 249.

251

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 218 Overview of reduced displays for park-ing modes: Parallel parking in reverse. Per-pendicular parking in reverse. Perpendicularparking forwards.

Fig. 219 On the instrument panel display:displaying the Park Assist system with re-duced display.

Selecting a parking mode with Park Assistwith prior step in front of the space

After activating the Park Assist system andafter detecting a parking space, the displayon the instrument panel proposes a parkingmode. The Park Assist system selects theparking mode automatically. The selected

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis-play ››› Fig. 219. The reduced display of otherpossible parking modes is also shown››› Fig. 218. If the mode selected by the sys-tem does not correspond to the desiredmode, you can select another mode by press-ing the button ››› Fig. 217.

Action

1.The necessary conditions to park with Park Assisthave to be met ››› page 254.

2.

Press the button.

A control lamp on the button lights up whenthe system is switched on. Additionally, the se-lected parking mode is shown on the instrumentpanel display and the reduced display shows an-other parking mode it can be changed to.

Action

3.

Turn on the corresponding turn signal towardsthe side of the road where you are parking. Theinstrument panel displays the side correspond-ing to the road. By default, if the turn signal isnot on, it parks on the right in the direction oftraffic.

4.

If necessary, press the button again to changeto the next parking mode.

Once you have switched to all possible parkingmodes, if the button is pressed again, thesystem switches off.

5.Press the button again to switch the systemback on.

6.Follow the instructions displayed on the instru-ment panel while paying attention to traffic anddrive the vehicle past the parking space.

252


Special case of perpendicular parking spaceto park forwards without driving past first

Action

1.The necessary conditions to park with Park Assisthave to be met ››› page 254.

2.Drive forward towards the parking space whilepaying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle.

Action

3.

Press the button once.

A control lamp on the button lights up whenthe system is switched on. Additionally, the se-lected parking mode is shown on the instrumentpanel display without reduced display.

4.Release the steering wheel ››› in Introductionon page 249.

253

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Park with Park Assist

Fig. 220 On the instrument panel display: paral-lel parking. Finding a parking space. Park-ing position. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 221 On the instrument panel display: per-pendicular parking. Finding a parking space. Parking position. Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 220 and Fig. 221:

Message to move forwards

Your vehicle

Parked vehicle

Parking space detected

Message to park

Message to press the brake pedal

Progress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Progress bars

The progress bar››› Fig. 220 7 and ››› Fig. 221 7 on thescreen of the instrument panel displays therelative distance to be covered. The greaterthe distance, the fuller the progress bar.When driving forward, the content of the pro-gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-versing, it decreases downwards.

Necessary conditions to park with Park As-sist

For parallel parkingspaces

For perpendicularparking spaces

The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on››› page 191.

254


For parallel parkingspaces

For perpendicularparking spaces

Do not exceed approxi-mately 40 km/h (25 mph)

when driving past theparking space.

Do not exceed approxi-mately 20 km/h (12 mph)

when driving past theparking space.

Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when driv-ing past the parking space.

Length of the space:length of the vehicle +

0.8 metres

Width of the space: widthof the vehicle + 0.8 me-

tres

Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) whenparking.

Parking

Do the following:

1.The necessary conditions have to be met to parkwith Park Assist ››› page 254 and the parkingmode must be selected ››› page 252.

2.

Look at the display on the instrument panel tosee if the space has been detected as “appropri-ate” and if the correct position for parking hasbeen reached ››› Fig. 220 or ››› Fig. 221 .

The space is considered “appropriate” if the dis-play on the instrument panel shows the messageto park 5 .

3.Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, engagethe reverse gear.

4.Release the steering wheel ››› in Introductionon page 249.

Do the following:

5.

Please note the following message: Active au-tomatic steering. Watch out aroundyou.While you keep watch around you, carefully startaccelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).

During the parking manoeuvre, the system onlytakes charge of the steering. You, as the driver,have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa-ry, change gears and brake.

6.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal isheard.

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displaysthe message to go forwards ››› Fig. 220 or ››› Fig. 221 .

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displaysthe message Park Assist finished.

The progress bar 7 indicates the distance tocover ››› page 254.

7.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assistsystem has finished turning the steering wheel.

OR: until the symbol on the instrument paneldisplay switches off.

8. Select first gear.

Do the following:

9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signalis heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel displayshows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forwardand back until it centres it in the space ››› Fig. 220 or ››› Fig. 221 .

10.

For best results, wait at the end of each manoeu-vre until the Park Assist system has finished turn-ing the steering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre ends when a correspond-ing message is displayed on the instrument paneland, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.

Note

If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurelyduring parking, the result may not be thebest.

255

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Exiting a parking space with Park As-sist (only for parallel spaces)

Fig. 222 On the instrument panel display: ex-iting a parallel parking space.

Key to the Fig. 222:

Parked vehicle

Your vehicle in reverse gear

Progress bar to indicate the distance leftto cover

Message giving the proposed manoeuvreto exit the parking space

Necessary conditions to exit a parking spacewith Park Assist

● Only for parallel parking spaces

● The traction control system (ASR) must beturned on ››› page 191.

● Length of the space: length of the vehicle+ 0.5 metres

1

2

3

4

● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Exiting a parking space

Do the following:

For parallel parking spaces

1.The necessary conditions to exit a parking spacewith Park Assist have to be met ››› page 256.

2. Switch on the engine ››› page 181.

3.

Press the button ››› Fig. 217.

A control lamp on the button lights up whenthe system is switched on.

4.Turn on the corresponding turn signal towardsthe road you will enter when exiting the parkingspace.

5.Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever toposition R.

6.

Release the steering wheel ››› in Introductionon page 249.

Please note the following message: Activeautomatic steering. Watch out aroundyou.While you keep watch around you, carefully startaccelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).

When exiting the parking space, the system onlytakes charge of the steering. You, as the driver,have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa-ry, change gears and brake.

For parallel parking spaces

7.

Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal isheard.

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displayshows the message to go forward.

The progress bar ››› Fig. 222 3 indicates the dis-tance to cover ››› page 254.

8.

Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assistsystem has finished turning the steering wheel.

OR: press down the brake pedal until the sym-bol on the instrument panel display switches off.

9.

Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signalis heard.

OR: go forward until the instrument panel displayshows the message to reverse.

The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forwardand back until it can exit the space.

10.

The vehicle can exit the space when a corre-sponding message is displayed on the instru-ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic sig-nal sounds.

Take charge of the steering with the turning an-gle set by the Park Assist system.

11.Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parkingspace.

256


Automatic braking intervention byPark Assist

Park Assist helps the driver by automaticallybraking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for brakingin time ››› .

Automatic braking intervention to avoid ex-ceeding the speed limit

To avoid exceeding the speed limit of approx-imately 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering orleaving a parking space, the brakes may acti-vate automatically. After automatically acti-vating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter orexit a parking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activatedonce for each attempt to enter or exit a park-ing space. If the speed of approximately7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre-sponding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damages

Depending on certain conditions, the ParkAssist system can automatically brake the ve-hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac-tioning and holding down the brake ped-al ››› . Following this the driver must pressthe brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reducedamage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-ishing.

WARNING

The automatic braking intervention by ParkAssist should never tempt you to take anyrisk that may compromise safety. The systemis not a replacement for driver awareness.

● The Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system. In certainsituations, the automatic braking interven-tion may only work in a limited way or notwork at all.

● Always be ready to use the brakes yourself!

● The automatic braking intervention will endafter approximately 1.5 seconds. Followingthis, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking System Plus (ParkPi-lot)*

Description

Fig. 223 Represented area.

During parking, Parking System Plus assiststhe driver by visually and audibly warningthem about obstacles detected in front ofand behind the vehicle.

There are ultrasound sensors integrated inthe front and rear bumpers. When they detectan obstacle, you are alerted by audible warn-ings and visually on the Easy Connect sys-tem.

In the event of danger of a frontal collision,the audible warnings come from the front ofthe vehicle, and in the event of the danger ofa rear-end collision they come from the rear.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues and thelike, as this could affect the system's opera-tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 287.

The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 m

1.60 m

0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: do not continue tomove forward (or backward)!

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduce »

A

B

C

257

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

after four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

In order to view the entire periphery of the ve-hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me-tres forwards and backwards. Thus, the miss-ing areas are screened and obstacles at thesides of the vehicle are displayed››› Fig. 223 C .

Special features of ParkPilot with Area View

In the following situations the screened areaon the side of the vehicle is automaticallyhidden:

● When a vehicle door is opened.

● When the ASR is switched off.

● When there is ASR or ESC regulation.

● If the vehicle remains stationary for morethan approximately 3 minutes.

WARNING

● Always pay attention, also when lookingstraight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur-roundings. The assistance systems are not areplacement for driver awareness. When in-serting or removing the vehicle from a park-ing space, or when performing similar ma-noeuvres the driver always assumes the re-sponsibility.


● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots inwhich obstacles and people are not regis-tered. Pay special attention to children andanimals.

● Always keep visual control of the vehiclesurroundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTION

Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-fected by different factors that may lead todamage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-rounds:

● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:

– Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars,fences, posts and thin trees.

– Objects that are located above the sen-sors, such as protrusions in a wall.

– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and garmentsdo not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-nals. The system cannot detect these objectsor people wearing such clothes correctly.

● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affectedby external sound sources. In certain circum-stances this may prevent them from detect-ing people or objects.

● Please note that low obstacles detected bythe system may no longer be registered by

the sensors as the car moves closer, so thesystem will not give any further warning. Incertain circumstances, objects such as highkerbs that could damage the bottom of thevehicle are not detected either.

● If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig-nored, the vehicle could suffer considerabledamage.

● The knocks or damage on the radiatorgrille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under-body can adjust the orientation of the sen-sors. This can affect the parking aid function.In this case, have the function checked by aspecialised workshop.

● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the regis-tration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:

– false detections,

– loss of sensor visibility.

Note

● In certain situations, the system can give awarning even though there is no obstacle inthe detected area, e.g:

– with rough or cobbled floors or groundwith long grass;

– with external ultrasound sources, such ascleaning vehicles or other vehicles equip-ped with ultrasound systems;

– in downpours, intense snow, hail ordense exhaust gases,

258


– if the number plate is not perfectly se-cured to the bumper surface,

– or in locations such as the brow of a hill.

● In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, freeof snow or ice, and do not cover them withadhesives or other objects.

● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, applyit directly only very briefly and always from adistance of more than 10 cm.

● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with theoperation of the Parking Aid.

● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operation ofthe Park Assist.

● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-tem, it is advised that you practice parking inan area or car park that is free from traffic.There must be good weather and light condi-tions.

● The volume and tone of the warnings canbe modified, in addition to the indications››› page 265.

● In vehicles without an infotainment system,these parameters can be modified in a SEATOfficial Service or in a specialised workshop.

● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 265.

● The display on the Easy Connect screenshows a slight time delay.

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 224 Centre console: Park Assist button(depending on the version).

Manual connection of Parking Aid

● Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid

● Press the button again.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display(the audible sounds remain active)

● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.

● OR: press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid

● Engage reverse gear or turn the selectorlever to position R.

● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstaclethat is in its forwards path at a speed below

10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 260. The obstacleis detected as of a distance of approx. 95 cmif the automatic connection is activated inthe infotainment system. A reduced display isshown.

● OR: If the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid

● Move the selector lever to position P.

● OR: accelerate to more than approx.10 km/h (6 mph) forward.

Temporary suppression of sound in ParkingAid

● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view


● OR: press the car icon in reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image(Rear View Camera “RVC”)


● OR: Press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up yellow whenthe system is switched on.

259

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Automatic activation

Fig. 225 Miniature indication of automatic ac-tivation.

When the Parking System Plus is switched onautomatically, a miniature of the vehicle willbe displayed and the segments will beshown on the left side of the screen››› Fig. 225.

Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-proaching an obstacle located in front of thevehicle. It only operates every time the speedis reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6mph) for the first time.

If the parking aid is switched off using the button, the following actions must be carriedout in order for it to automatically switch on:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.

● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be-fore reducing speed below this numberagain.

● OR: place the selector lever in position Pand then move it from this position.

● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-tion in the Easy Connect system menu.

The automatic activation with parking aidminiature indication can be switched on andoff from the Easy Connect system menu››› page 33:


● Select: button > Settings > Parkingand manoeuvring.

● Select the Automatic activation op-tion. When the function button check box isactivated , the function is on.

If the system has been activated automatical-ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv-en when obstacles in front are at a distanceof less than 50 cm.

CAUTION

The automatic connection of the Parking Aidonly works when you are driving slowly. Ifdriving style is not adapted to the circum-stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 226 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

The distance of separation from the obstaclecan be estimated using the segments aroundthe vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

they are displayed whenthe obstacle is not within the vehicle'strajectory or the direction of travel is inthe opposite direction to its location,and also when the electronic parkingbrake is activated.

obstacles located in thevehicle's trajectory and which are morethan 30 cm away from the vehicle aredisplayed in yellow.

White segments:

Yellow segments:

260


obstacles that are less than30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-played in red.

Moreover, with the SEAT Media SystemPlus/Navi System/Navi System Plus radios, ayellow trail indicates the vehicle's expectedtrajectory based on the steering angle.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-cle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-stacles are represented in red, includingthose out of the path. Do not continue tomove forward (or backward) ››› in Descrip-tion on page 258, ››› in Description onpage 258 !

In the event the car is equipped with the TopView Camera system, Park Assist visual guid-ance will appear in accordance with the viewselected in the Top View Camera system.

Adjusting the display and audiblewarnings

The settings for the display and audiblewarnings are controlled via the Easy Con-nect*.

Red segments: Automatic activation

on – activates the Automatic activa-tion option ››› page 260.

off – deactivates the Automatic ac-tivation option ››› page 260.

Front volume*

Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the frontarea.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the reararea.

Adjust volume

With the parking aid switched on, the activeaudio/video source volume will be reducedto the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when itis switched on, if a message reporting a Park-

ing aid error is displayed on the instrumentpanel, there is a fault in the system.

If the fault does not disappear before discon-necting the ignition, the next time that theparking aid is engaged in reverse, no audiblesignal of the existence of a fault will be is-sued.

If there is a fault in the parking aid system amessage will appear on the instrument panelindicating the error. In addition the keyLED will blink.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the Easy Connect display infront of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor isfaulty, only the obstacles in area A are dis-played ››› Fig. 223. If a front sensor is faulty,only the obstacles in area B are displayed.


261

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Driving with a trailer

Fig. 227 ParkPilot display on the screen withtrailer attached.

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected electrically, the Parking Aid rearsensors will not be activated when reversegear is engaged, when the selector lever isturned to position R or when the button ispressed.

The distance to possible obstacles at the rearof the vehicle and at its sides will not be dis-played on the screen and will not be indica-ted by means of audible sound signals.

The Easy Connect system screen will only dis-play objects detected at the front, and the ve-hicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Braking while manoeuvring function*3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

As soon as an obstacle is detected while re-versing, the braking while manoeuvring func-tion activates the emergency braking. De-pending on the equipment, the braking whilemanoeuvring function can also activateemergency braking while moving forwards.

The emergency braking function is used tominimise collisions. Vehicle speed must notbe higher than 10 km/h.

The braked manoeuvre function is active orinactive when the parking light is lit or off, re-spectively. If an emergency braking is activa-ted, the function will remain inactive until thegear is changed.

The Parking System’s limitations apply.

The braking while manoeuvring function iscontrolled in the Easy Connect system withthe button and the SETTINGS andPark and manoeuvre function buttons.

● on – permits the use of the brakingwhile manoeuvring function.

● off – does not permit the use of thebraking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergency brak-ing

● When the function is deactivated with theBraking while manoeuvring button that appears

on the Parking System screen of the EasyConnect system.

● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid orbonnet are opened.

Parking aid (Park Pilot)*

Description

Assorted assistance systems – which varydepending on the equipment fitted in the car– will help you when parking or manoeu-vring.

The rear parking aid is an audible assistantthat warns of obstacles located behind thevehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When they detect an obstacle, youare alerted by audible warnings and visuallyon the Easy Connect system.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, the rearparking aid will issue an audible warningabout objects near the rear of the vehicle,and the Top View Camera* image will beavailable on the Easy Connect screen, givinga real image of the objects around the car.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues, dirt andthe like, as this could affect the system's op-eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 287.

262


The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

side area 0.60 m

central area 1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-val between the audible warnings will be re-duced. When you reach around 0.30 m thewarning will be constant: Do not continue tomove forward (or backward) ››› , ››› !

If you maintain separation from the obstacle,the volume of the warning begins to reduceafter four seconds (does not affect the toneof the constant warning).

Activating/Deactivating

When engaging reverse gear, the parking aidis automatically switched on. This is con-firmed with a short warning.

On disengaging reverse gear, the parking aidsystem is switched off.

WARNING

● Always pay attention, also when lookingstraight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur-roundings. The assistance systems are not areplacement for driver awareness. When in-serting or removing the vehicle from a park-ing space, or when performing similar ma-noeuvres the driver always assumes the re-sponsibility.


● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots inwhich obstacles and people are not regis-tered. Pay special attention to children andanimals.

● Always keep visual control of the vehiclesurroundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTION

Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-fected by different factors that may lead todamage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-rounds:

● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:

– Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars,fences, posts and thin trees.

– Objects that are located above the sen-sors, such as protrusions in a wall.

– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and garmentsdo not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-nals. The system cannot detect these objectsor people wearing such clothes correctly.

● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affectedby external sound sources. In certain circum-

stances this may prevent them from detect-ing people or objects.

● Please note that low obstacles detected bythe system may no longer be registered bythe sensors as the car moves closer, so thesystem will not give any further warning. Incertain circumstances, objects such as highkerbs that could damage the bottom of thevehicle are not detected either.

● If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig-nored, the vehicle could suffer considerabledamage.

● The knocks or damage on the radiatorgrille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under-body can adjust the orientation of the sen-sors. This can affect the parking aid function.In this case, have the function checked by aspecialised workshop.

Note

● In certain situations, the system can give awarning even though there is no obstacle inthe detected area, e.g:

– with rough or cobbled floors or groundwith long grass;

– with external ultrasound sources, such ascleaning vehicles or other vehicles equip-ped with ultrasound systems;

– in downpours, intense snow, hail ordense exhaust gases,

– if the number plate is not perfectly se-cured to the bumper surface, »

263

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

– or in locations such as the brow of a hill.

● In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, freeof snow or ice, and do not cover them withadhesives or other objects.

● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, applyit directly only very briefly and always from adistance of more than 10 cm.

● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with theoperation of the Parking Aid.

● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-tem, it is advised that you practice parking inan area or car park that is free from traffic.There must be good weather and light condi-tions.

● The volume and tone of the warnings canbe modified, in addition to the indications››› page 265.

● In vehicles without an infotainment system,these parameters can be modified in a SEATOfficial Service or in a specialised workshop.

● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 265.

● The display on the Easy Connect screenshows a slight time delay.

Parking Aid operation

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display(the audible sounds remain active)

● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.

● OR: press the BACK function button.

Parking Aid connection

● Engage reverse (for manual gears) or setthe selector lever to R (for automatic gears).

Parking Aid disconnection

● Place the selector level in position P, N or D(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re-verse (for manual gearboxes). If you set thelever to N or D, the system will remain activefor approximately 8 seconds before switchingoff, except with Top View Camera*, when itwill be switched off immediately after engag-ing reverse.

Temporary suppression of sound in ParkingAid

● Press the function button. If you have theTop View Camera* system installed, you can-not use the temporary suppression of soundin Parking Aid.

Switch from reduced to full-screen view if therear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera“RVC”)

● Press the car icon in the reduced view.

If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image(Rear View Camera “RVC”)


● OR: press the RVC function icon.

Segments of the visual indication

Fig. 228 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

The distance to the obstacles can be estima-ted with the help of the segments at the rearof the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

264


they are displayed if theobstacle is not in the vehicle's directionof travel, even when the electronic park-ing brake is activated.

obstacles located in thevehicle's trajectory and which are morethan 30 cm away from the vehicle aredisplayed in yellow.

obstacles that are less than30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-played in red.

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-cle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-stacles are represented in red, includingthose out of the path. Do not continue to re-verse ››› in Description on page 263, ››› in Description on page 263 !

If you are equipped with the Top ViewCamera*

Segments are not displayed when the vehicleis equipped with Top View Camera*.

The PDC system will issue an audible warningfor objects that are near the rear of the vehi-cle, and the Top View Camera* image will be

White segments:

Yellow segments:

Red segments:

available on the screen, giving a real imageof the objects around the car.

Adjusting the display and audiblewarnings

The settings for the display and audiblewarnings are controlled via the Easy Con-nect*.

Rear volume*

Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Frequency (tone) of the sound in the reararea.

Adjust volume

With the parking aid switched on, the activeaudio/video source volume will be reducedto the intensity of the selected setting.

Error messages

When the Parking Aid is activated or when itis switched on, if a message reporting a Park-ing aid error is displayed on the instrumentpanel, there is a fault in the system.

If the fault disappears before disconnectingthe ignition, the next time that the parking

aid is engaged in reverse, no audible signalof the existence of a fault will be issued.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the Easy Connect display.


Towing bracket

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected electrically, the Parking Aid rearsensors will not be activated when reversegear is engaged (manual gears) nor when theselector lever is turned to position R (auto-matic gears).

Top View Camera*

Related video


265

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Introduction

Using 4 cameras, the system generates a rep-resentation that is shown on the infotain-ment system display. The cameras are loca-ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrorsand the rear lid.

The functions and representations of theArea View system may vary depending onwhether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.

WARNING

The image from the cameras does not make itpossible to calculate the distance to the ob-stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) precisely, sousing them could cause serious accidentsand injury.

● The camera lenses augment and distort thevisual field and the objects on the screen areseen differently and imprecisely.

● Certain objects may not be shown or maynot be shown very clearly, for example, postsor thin rails, due to the screen resolution or iflight conditions are insufficient.

● The cameras have blind spots in which ob-stacles and people are not registered.

● The camera lens must be kept free, withoutsnow or ice, and should not be covered.

WARNING

The smart technology incorporated into theTop View Camera* system cannot overcome

the limits imposed by the laws of physics andit only works within the limits of the system.The greater convenience provided by the AreaView system should never tempt you to takeany risk that may compromise safety. If usednegligently or involuntarily, it may cause se-rious accidents and injuries. The system isnot a replacement for driver awareness.

● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.

● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.

● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the cameras do not capture smallchildren, animals and certain objects in allsituations.

● The use of a number plate may interfere inthe views shown on the screen, since thecameras' field of vision may be reduced.

● The system will probably be unable to rep-resent all areas clearly.

CAUTION

● The camera images are only two-dimen-sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, objectsthat jut out or holes on the road, for example,are more difficult to detect or may not beseen at all.

● In certain circumstances, the camera doesnot capture objects such as beams, fences,posts or thin trees, which could damage thevehicle.

● The system displays the auxiliary lines andboxes regardless of the vehicle's environ-ment, no objects are detected. The driver isresponsible for determining that the vehiclewill fit in the parking space.

CAUTION

In order to guarantee good system operation,keep the cameras clean, free of snow or ice,and do not cover them with adhesives or oth-er objects.

● Never use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lenses.

● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lenses. Doing socould damage the lenses.

Area View system

Fig. 230 Display of the Area View system: aer-ial view.

266


There are four different views to choose from:


Symbol Meaning

A Front camera area

B Right camera area

C Rear camera area

D Left camera area

Exit the current display.

Three-dimensional views

Depending on the equipment: connect-ing and disconnecting the ParkPilotsound.

Setting the display: brightness, contrastand colour.

The aerial view is generated by combiningthe images from all the cameras ››› Fig. 230. The aerial view can be selectedby pressing the vehicle in the area.

Select the corresponding view by pressingthe different areas ››› Fig. 230 A to D of theaerial view or the reduced aerial view.

Conditions necessary for the use of the AreaView system

● The doors and the rear lid must be closed.

● The image must be reliable and clear. Forthis reason, for example, the camera lensmust be clean.

● The area around the vehicle must be clearlyand totally visible.

● The area for parking or manoeuvringshould be a flat surface.

● The vehicle should not be loaded veryheavily at the rear.

● The driver must be used to the system.

● There should be no damage to the vehiclein the camera area. If the position or installa-tion angle of the cameras have beenchanged, e.g. after a rear-end collision, thesystem should be checked by a specialisedworkshop.

Camera image view

● Aerial view (bird's eye view): to obtain apanoramic view of the vehicle , three-di-mensional views, from different camera posi-tions.

● Front Camera (front view): to observe trafficahead of the vehicle (vehicles crossing) ,for front parallel parking , when approach-ing an obstacle and in off-road driving .

● Side cameras (side view): to view the areaclose to the sides of the vehicle, both on theleft and on the right , or a combination ofboth sides .

● Rear camera (rear view): To observe trafficbehind the vehicle (vehicles crossing) , forreverse perpendicular parking , for reverseparallel parking and for hitching a trailerto the vehicle .

The selected view is displayed on the rightside of the screen. The reduced aerial viewshown on the right side displays the viewframed in yellow. In addition, the right mar-gin of the screen displays the menu optionspossible and the views (the so-called“modes”) of the camera in question. The ac-tive view (mode) at the time is highlighted.

The reduced aerial view can be hidden bypressing the symbol to thus display the se-lected view full-screen.

267

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Instructions for use

Fig. 231 Centre console: button for activat-ing/deactivating the Area View system man-ually in combination with the parking aid sys-tem () or else with the rear ParkPilot system().

Connecting and disconnecting the Area Viewsystem

Manual con-nection of thedisplay:

Press the button ››› Fig. 231 once.

The infotainment system screen dis-plays the aerial view ››› Fig. 230. Ifyou press the button when drivingabove 15 km/h (9 mph), the imagewill not be displayed.

Automatic con-nection of thedisplay:

Engage reverse gear.OR: The vehicle moves backwards.

The view of the image of the vehicle'srear camera is shown in parallel park-ing mode with the reduced aerialview.

Connecting and disconnecting the Area Viewsystem

Manual discon-nection of thedisplay:

Press the button ››› Fig. 231again.

OR: press a button on the factory-equipped infotainment system, forexample the RADIO button.

OR: press the function button .

Automatic dis-connection ofthe display:

Drive forward at more than approx.15 km/h (9 mph).

OR: switch the ignition off. The AreaView system menu disappears imme-diately.

Special characteristics

Examples of optical illusions caused by thecameras:

The images on the area view system cameras are onlytwo-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, it is dif-ficult or impossible to make out on-screen any holesthere may be on the ground, objects jutting out from theground or parts protruding from other vehicles.

Situations in which the objects or other vehicles appearto be further away or closer than they really are:

– On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope.

– On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane.

– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

Examples of optical illusions caused by thecameras:

– If the vehicle approaches protruding objects. Theseobjects may be outside the cameras' angle of visibility.

Trailer mode

The Area View system conceals, in the rearcamera area, all the auxiliary guiding lineswhen the factory-fitted towing bracket is con-nected electrically to a trailer ››› page 273.

Note

In order to become familiar with the systemand its functions, SEAT recommends that youpractice handling the Area View system in anarea where there is not too much traffic or ina car park.

268


Top View Camera system menus (modes)

Fig. 232 Display on the Area View systemscreen: Front camera: off-road view Rearcamera: off-road view


Symbol Meaning

Depending on the equipment: connect-ing and disconnecting the ParkPilotsound.

Showing the reduced display.

Hiding the reduced display.

Exiting the Area View system screen:

Setting the display: brightness, contrastand colour.

Aerial views (bird's eye view)

View On-screen display of all cameras

Mainmode

The vehicle and its immediate vicinityseen from above are shown. Dependingon the equipment, the ParkPilot's pathmay also be displayed.

Three-di-mensional

views

The vehicle and its vicinity seenfrom above are shown.

The vehicle and its vicinity seenfrom above are shown oblique-ly.

The vehicle and its vicinity seenobliquely are shown.

Swipe the infotainment system display withyour finger in the direction of the arrows tochange the angle of vision in the three-di-mensional views of the vehicle and its vicini-ty.

Front camera views (front view)

ViewOn-screen display of the frontcamera

Cross trafficat the front

Left area of the screen: street to the left.

Central area of the screen: area directlyin front of the vehicle.

Right area of the screen: street to theright.

Parallel park-ing

The area in front of the vehicle isshown. Orientation lines are shown togive guidance.

Off-road

The area directly in front of the vehicleseen from above is shown. For example,on a slope, in order to see the area di-rectly in front of the vehicle. The red lineis shown at a distance of approx. 0.4 mfrom the vehicle. »

269

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Side camera views (side view)

ViewOn-screen display of the sidecameras

Right and leftsides

The areas located directly to the side ofthe vehicle seen from above are repre-sented in order to navigate possible ob-stacles more precisely. The orange aux-iliary lines are shown at a distance ofapprox. 0.4 m from the vehicle.

Left side

The area directly next to the vehicle, onthe driver's or front passenger's side, isdisplayed, and the blind spots all alongthe vehicle can be seen. The orangeauxiliary line is shown at a distance ofapprox. 0.4 m from the vehicle.

Right side

Rear camera views (rear view)

ViewOn-screen display of the rearcamera

Parallel park-ing

The area behind the vehicle is shown.Auxiliary lines are shown to give guid-ance.

Parallel park-ing

The vehicle's initial position on initiat-ing this function will be a decisive fac-tor in determining the place where themanoeuvre executed by the assistantwill end.

ViewOn-screen display of the rearcamera

Off-road orhitching a

trailer func-tion

The vehicle's rear is presented. The redauxiliary line establishes the safety dis-tance.

Green and red semicircular auxiliarylines are displayed in vehicles with afactory-fitted towing bracket. The auxili-ary lines indicate the distance from thetowing bracket. The distance betweenthe auxiliary lines (green and red) is ap-prox. 0.3 m. The orange auxiliary line in-dicates, depending on the turn of thesteering wheel, the pre-calculated di-rection of the towing bracket.

In vehicles with a factory-fitted towingbracket, the distance from the red auxil-iary line to the vehicle is approx. 0.4 m.No other auxiliary line is displayed.

Cross trafficat the rear

Left area of the screen: street to the left.

Central area of the screen: area directlybehind the vehicle.

Right area of the screen: street to theright.

Rear Assist (Rear View Cam-era)*

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING

● The Rear Assist does not make it possibleto precisely calculate the distance from ob-stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can itovercome the system's own limits, hence us-ing it may cause serious accidents and inju-ries if used negligently or without due care.The driver should be aware of his/her sur-roundings at all times to ensure safe driving.

● The camera lens expands and distorts thefield of vision and displays the objects on thescreen in a different, vague manner. The per-ception of distances is also distorted by thiseffect.

● Due to the screen resolution or insufficientlight conditions, some items may be dis-played in an unsatisfactory manner or not atall. Take special care with thin posts, fences,railings or trees that might not be displayedon screen and could damage the vehicle.

● The rear assist has blind spots where it isnot possible to represent people or objects(small children, animals and certain objectscannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon-itor the vehicle's surrounding area at alltimes.

● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice andsnow, and do not cover it.

270


● The system is not a replacement for driverawareness. Supervise the parking operationat all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-ing area. Adapt your speed and driving styleat all times to suit visibility, weather, roadand traffic conditions.

● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.

● The images on the rear assist screen areonly two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatialdepth, protruding parts or holes in the road,for example, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.

● Vehicle load modifies the representation ofthe orientation lines displayed. The widthrepresented by the lines diminishes with ve-hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi-cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve-hicle of the luggage compartment is carryinga heavy load.

● In the following situations, the objects orother vehicles shown in the navigation sys-tem display appear to be further away orcloser than they really are: Pay special atten-tion:

– On moving from a horizontal plane to aslope.

– On moving from a slope to a horizontalplane.

– If the vehicle is heavily loaded at therear.

– When the vehicle approaches objectsthat are not on the ground surface or arejutting out from it. These objects may al-

so be outside the camera's angle of vi-sion when reversing.

Note

● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if you are not yet familiarwith the system.

● Rear assist will not be available if the vehi-cle's rear lid is open.

Instructions for use

Fig. 233 In the rear lid handle: location of therear assist camera.

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as-sists the driver in reverse parking or manoeu-vring ››› Fig. 233. The camera image is viewedtogether with orientation lines projected bythe system on the Easy Connect systemscreen. The bottom of the screen displayspart of the bumper corresponding to the

number plate area that will be used as refer-ence by the driver.

Rear assist settings

Rear assist offers the user the possibility tochange the image's brightness, contrast andcolour settings.

To change these settings:

● Park the vehicle in a safe place.

● Apply the parking brake.


● If necessary, switch on the Easy Connectsystem.


● Press the function button displayed onthe right of the image.

● Make the desired adjustments on the menuby pressing the –/+ function buttons or bymoving the corresponding scroll button.

Necessary conditions for parking and ma-noeuvring with the rear assist

The system should not be used in the follow-ing cases:

● If the image displayed is not very reliable oris distorted, for example low visibility or dirtylens. »

271

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-played very clearly or is incomplete.

● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

● If the position and installation angle of thecamera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision. Have the system checked by aspecialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system

To familiarise yourself with the system, theorientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-ommends practising parking and manoeu-vring with the rear assist in a place withouttoo much traffic or in a car park when thereare good weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snowand ice:

● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-based glass cleaning product and clean thelens with a dry cloth.

● Remove snow using a small brush.

● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION

● Never use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lens.

● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lens. Doing so coulddamage the camera.

Parking and manoeuvring with therear assist

Fig. 234 Display on the Easy Connect systemscreen: orientation lines.

Switching the system on and off

● The rear assist will switch on when the igni-tion is on or the engine running, on engagingreverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-matic gearbox).

● The system switches off 8 seconds afterdisengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)or removing the selector lever from the R po-sition (automatic gearbox). The system willalso disconnect immediately after the igni-tion is switched off.

● The camera will stop transmitting imagesabove the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-verse engaged.

In combination with the Parking System Plus››› page 262, the camera image will cease tobe transmitted immediately when reversegear is disengaged or when the selector leveris moved from the R position, and the opticalinformation provided by the Parking Aid sys-tem will be displayed.

Also in combination with the system, the rearassist image can also be concealed:

● By pressing one of the Infotainment systembuttons on the display.

● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle thatappears on the left of the screen (whichswitches to the full-screen mode of the Park-ing System Plus's optical system).

If you wish to display the rear assist imageagain:

● Disengage reverse, or change the selectorlever's position, engage reverse again ormove the selector lever to position R.

272

Towing bracket device*

● OR: Press the RVC function button1)

Meaning of the orientation lines

››› Fig. 234

Side lines: extension of the vehicle (theapproximate width of the vehicle plus therear view mirrors) on the road surface.

End of the side lines: the area marked ingreen ends approximately 2 m behindthe vehicle on the road surface.

Intermediate line: indicates a distance ofapproximately 1 m behind the vehicle onthe road surface.

Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis-tance of approximately 40 cm at the rearof the vehicle on the road surface.

Parking manoeuvre

● Place the vehicle in front of the parkingspace and engage reverse gear (manualgearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-tion (automatic gearbox).

● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheelso that the side orientation lines lead to-wards the parking space.

1

2

3

4

● Guide the vehicle into the parking space sothat the side orientation lines run parallel toit.


Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula-tions about driving with a trailer and the useof a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily forcarrying people, although it can also be usedto tow a trailer if fitted with the correspond-ing technical equipment. This additional loadhas an effect on the useful life, fuel con-sumption and vehicle performance and insome cases can reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force fromthe vehicle, and thus more concentrationfrom the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted onboth the vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permissi-ble on the coupling

The maximum vertical load technically per-mitted from the trailer draw bar on the towingbracket's tow hitch is 80 kg. »

1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only be ac-tivated and available when the reverse gear is en-gaged or the selector lever is set to position R.

273

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Vehicles with the Start-Stop system

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towingbracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, theStart-Stop system operates as normal. Nospecial characteristics need to be taken intoaccount.

If the system does not recognise the trailer orthe trailer bracket has not been retrofitted bySEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-nected by pressing the corresponding buttonin the lower part of the centre console beforedriving with the trailer, and it should remainoff for the rest of the journey ››› .

Vehicles with driving profile selection

If you are going to be towing a trailer, the useof the Eco driving profile is not recommen-ded. You are advised to select another of theavailable driving profiles before beginning todrive with a trailer.

WARNING

Never use the trailer to transport people,since it would put their life in danger and isalso prohibited.

WARNING

Undue use of the towing bracket may causeinjury and accidents.

● Only use the towing bracket if it is in a per-fect state of repair and is properly secured.

● Never modify or repair the towing bracketin any way.

● In order to reduce the danger of injury inthe event of rear-end collisions and to avoidinjury to pedestrians and cyclists when park-ing the vehicle, cover or remove the tow hitchwhen you are not using a trailer.

● Never fit a towing bracket “with weight dis-tribution” or “load compensation”. The vehi-cle has not been designed for this type oftowing bracket. The towing bracket could failand the trailer could be released from the ve-hicle.

WARNING

Driving with a trailer and transporting heavyor large objects can affect driving propertiesand even cause an accident.

● Always secure the load properly using beltsor straps that are suitable and in good condi-tion.


● Trailers with a high centre of gravity aremore likely to overturn than those with a lowone.

● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

● Take great care when overtaking.

● Reduce speed immediately if you noticethat the trailer is swaying, however slightly.

● Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph)when towing a trailer (or at more than100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional circum-stances). This also applies in countries wheredriving at higher speeds is permitted. Takeinto account the speed limit for vehicles withtrailers in the corresponding country, as itcould be less than the speed limit for vehi-cles without a trailer.

● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNING

If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by anon-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop systemmust be disconnected manually wheneverdriving with a trailer. Otherwise the brakesystem could be damaged and could conse-quently cause a serious accident or injury.

● Always disconnect the Start-Stop systemmanually when using a towing bracket thathas not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note

● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm››› page 125. Otherwise, the tilt sensor couldcause the alarm to go off.

● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine'sfirst 1000 km ››› page 201.

● SEAT recommends that, if possible, the towhitch be disassembled or covered when it is

274


not going to be used. In the event of a rear-end collision, the damage to the vehiclecould be greater if the bracket is fitted.

● Some retrofitted towing brackets cover therear towing eye. In these cases, the towingeye should not be used for tow-starting or fortowing other vehicles. For this reason, if thevehicle has been retrofitted with a towingbracket, always keep the tow hitch in the ve-hicle when you disassemble it.

Control lamp

Lamp on button lights up

The tow hitch is not securely locked in position.Check that the towing bracket is locked ››› page 276.


WARNING

If the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up, thevehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-dents and severe injuries.

● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-es.

● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

CAUTION


Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-equipped with atowing bracket fulfil all the technical and le-gal requirements for driving with a trailer.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towingbracket, only a bracket that is authorised forthe maximum authorised load of the trailerthat is to be towed may be fitted. The towingbracket must be suitable for the vehicle andthe trailer and must be properly secured tothe vehicle's chassis. Only use a towingbracket that has been authorised by SEAT forthis vehicle. Always check and take into ac-count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-structions. Never fit a towing bracket “withweight distribution” or “load compensation”.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumper

Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or tothe area where the bumper is mounted. Thetowing bracket should not impair the bum-per's function. Do not make modifications orrepairs to the exhaust system or the brakesystem. Make regular checks to ensure thatthe towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling system

Driving with a trailer increases the load onthe engine and cooling system. The coolingsystem should have sufficient coolant and beprepared for the additional effort involved indriving with a trailer.

Trailer brakes

If the trailer has its own brake system, pleasetake the relevant legal requirements into ac-count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow rope

Always use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 278.

Trailer rear lights

The trailer's rear lights should comply withthe statutory safety regulations ››› page 278.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directlyto the vehicle's electric system. If you are notsure that the trailer's electrical connection iscorrect, have it checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

Exterior mirrors

If you cannot see the area behind the trailerwith the exterior mirrors of the towing vehi-cle, additional mirrors will have to be instal-led in accordance with the regulations of the »

275

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

country in question. The exterior mirrorsshould be adjusted before you start drivingand must provide a sufficient field of visionat the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Consumers Europe, Asia,Africa, SouthAmerica and

Central America

Australia

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts 108 Watts

Turn signal (on eachside)

42 Watts 54 Watts

Side lights (on eachside)

50 Watts 100 Watts

Reverse lights (intotal)

42 Watts 54 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts 54 Watts

Never exceed the values indicated!

WARNING

If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or isnot the right one, the trailer could becomedetached from the vehicle and cause seriousinjury.

CAUTION

● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.

● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur-rent, the vehicle's electronic system may bedamaged.

● Never connect the trailer's electric systemdirectly to the electrical connections of thetail lights or any other power sources. Onlyuse the connections intended for providingelectric current to the trailer.

Electrical unlocking tow hitch

Fig. 235 On the right side of the luggagecompartment: button for unlocking the towhitch.

The tow hitch is located in the bumper. Theelectrical unlocking tow hitch cannot be dis-assembled.

There should be no person, animal or objectin the path of the tow hitch ››› .

Unlock the tow hitch and remove it

● Stop the vehicle and connect the electronicparking brake ››› page 186.

● Switch off the engine.


● Pull the ››› Fig. 235 button briefly. The towhitch unlocks electrically and automaticallyturns outwards. The control lamp in the but-ton will flash ››› Fig. 235.

● Remove the tow hitch with your hand untilyou feel and see that it has engaged and thecontrol lamp on the button stays on.


Cover the tow hitch

● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronicparking brake.

● Switch off the engine.

● Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-cal connection between it and the vehicle. Ifyou are using an adapter, remove it from thetrailer's power socket.


● Pull the ››› Fig. 235 button briefly. The towhitch unlocks electrically.

276


● Turn the tow hitch under the bumper withyour hand until you feel and see that it en-gages and the control lamp on the ››› Fig. 235button stays on.


Meaning of control lamp

● If the warning light of the button ››› Fig. 235is flashing, this means that the tow hitch hasnot been attached properly or is damaged››› .

● If the warning lamp stays on with the rearlid open, the tow hitch is correctly in placeboth when engaged and when covered.

● The control lamp of the button will go offapprox. 1 minute after closing the rear lid.

WARNING

Undue use of the towing bracket may causeinjury and accidents.

● Only use the tow hitch if it is properly en-gaged.

● Always ensure that no person, animal orobject is to be found in the path of the towhitch.

● Never use a tool or instrument while thetow hitch is moving.

● Never press the ››› Fig. 235 button whenthere is a trailer hooked to the vehicle orwhen a carrier system or other accessoriesare mounted on the tow hitch.

● If the tow hitch is not attached properly, donot use it. Instead, go to a specialised work-shop and have the towing bracket checked.

● If you detect any fault in the electrical sys-tem or in the towing bracket, contact a speci-alised workshop and ask them to check it.

● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49mm at any one point, do not use the towingbracket under any circumstances.

CAUTION

If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure orsteam devices, do not point the jet directlytowards the retractable tow hitch or the trail-er power socket, as this may damage thejoints or remove the grease necessary for lu-brication.

Note

At extremely low temperatures, the tow hitchmay be impossible to use. In this case, placethe vehicle in a warmer location (for example,a garage).

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the retract-able tow hitch

The maximum allowed weight of the carriersystem, including the load, is 75 kg. The car-rier system should not protrude more than700 mm backwards from the spherical head.Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes

can be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicy-cles must be mounted as close to the vehicleas possible (tow hitch).

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bicy-cle rack mounted on the tow hitch can causeaccidents and injury.

● Never exceed the maximum weight or thelimits indicated above.

● The bicycle rack may not be mounted to theneck of the hitch below the ball because, dueto the shape of the neck and depending onthe rack model, the rack could be incorrectlymounted on the vehicle.

● Always read and take the manufacturer as-sembly instructions into account.

CAUTION

If the maximum weight and limits indicatedabove are exceeded, the vehicle may sufferconsiderable damage.

● Never exceed the values indicated!

Note

SEAT recommends removing, as far as possi-ble, all removable parts of the bicycles beforesetting off. These parts include, for example,baskets and saddlebags, child seats or bat-teries. This improves aerodynamics and thecentre of gravity of the rack system.

277

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

Hooking up and connecting a trailer

Fig. 236 Schematic diagram: assignment ofthe pins of the trailer's power socket.


Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10


Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Trailer power socket

The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the electrical connection betweenthe trailer and the vehicle. With the enginerunning, electrical devices on the trailer re-ceive power from the electrical connection(pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has beenconnected electrically, the electrical equip-ment on the trailer will receive voltagethrough this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin9 has a permanent live. This powers, for ex-ample, the trailer's interior lighting. Electricaldevices such as a fridge in a caravan only re-ceive electrical power if the engine is running(through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system,you cannot connect the ground wires of pin3, pin 11 or pin 13.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

Tow rope

The tow rope must always be securely fixedto the towing vehicle and loose enough sothat the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.However, make sure that the cable does notrub on the ground while driving.

Trailer rear lights

Always check the trailer's rear lights to en-sure they are working correctly and that theycomply with the relevant safety regulations.Make sure that the maximum permissiblepower that can be absorbed by the trailer isnot exceeded ››› page 276.

Connection to the anti-theft system

The trailer is included in the anti-theft systemif the following conditions are met:

● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with ananti-theft alarm and towing bracket.

● If the trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer powersocket.

● If the electrical systems of the vehicle andtrailer are in perfect condition and have nofaults or damage.

● If the vehicle is locked with the key and theanti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered if the electrical connection with thetrailer is cut off.

278


Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, alwaysturn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, thetilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED rear lights

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LEDrear lights cannot be connected to the anti-theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm doesnot go off when the electrical connection withthe trailer is cut if it has rear lights with light-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected whenhitching the trailer, this will automaticallyswitch to the Normal profile. If the systemcannot detect the attached trailer or if thetowing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-to repair shop other than SEAT, you mustmanually select the Normal profile before youstart driving with a trailer attached. To recon-nect the Eco profile once the trailer has beenunhitched, switch the ignition off and backon once.

WARNING

If the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, it may lead to an excessiveamount of current supplied to the trailer,which can cause abnormalities in the entirevehicle electronic system, as well as acci-dents and serious injuries.

● Ensure that any repairs that need to be car-ried out on the electrical system are carriedout by a specialised workshop.

● Never connect the trailer's electric systemdirectly to the electrical connections of thetail lights or any other power sources.

WARNING

Contact between the pins of the trailer powersocket can cause short circuits, overloadingof the electrical system or failure of the light-ing system, and consequently can cause acci-dents and serious injuries.

● Never connect the pins of the trailer powersocket to each other.

● Make sure any work on bent pins is carriedout by a specialised workshop.

CAUTION

Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehi-cle when parked; place it on its supportwheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises orfalls due, for example, to a variation of theload or a burst tyre, increased pressure willbe placed on the towing bracket and the trail-er, and both the vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

Note

● In case of malfunctioning of the electricalsystems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as of

the anti-theft system, have these checked outby a specialised workshop.

● If the trailer accessories consume energythrough the power socket to the trailer andthe engine is turned off, the battery will dis-charge.

● If the vehicle battery is running low, theelectrical connection with the trailer will beautomatically cut.

Loading a trailer

Technically permissible maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the coupling de-vice

The technically permissible maximum trailerweight is the weight that the vehicle can tow››› . The vertical load on the coupling loadis exerted vertically from above on the towhitch of the towing bracket ››› page 319.

The information on the maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the coupling de-vice contained in the type plate of the towingbracket are experimental values only. Thecorrect figures for your specific model, whichmay be lower than these figures, are given inthe vehicle documentation. The informationin the vehicle documentation takes prece-dence at all times. »

279

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-mends making the most of the maximum ver-tical load technically permissible on the cou-pling device ››› page 273. An insufficient ver-tical load has a negative influence on the be-haviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on therear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towing ve-hicle and trailer

The gross combination weight is the actualweight of the loaded vehicle plus the actualweight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified intodistinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-taining information from a specialised work-shop regarding which type of trailer is mostsuitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loading

The weight of the towing vehicle and trailermust be balanced. In order to do this, theload must be as close as possible to the max-imum vertical load technically permissible onthe coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-tributed between the back and front of thetrailer:

● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible orabove it.

● Secure the trailer load properly.

Tyre pressure

Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of thetowing vehicle with the maximum allowablepressure ››› page 308.

WARNING

If the maximum permissible axle weight, themaximum load technically permissible on thecoupling point, the maximum authorised ve-hicle weight or the gross combination weightof the towing vehicle and trailer are excee-ded, accidents and serious injuries may oc-cur.

● Never exceed the values indicated!

● The actual weight on the front and rearaxles must never exceed the maximum per-missible axle weight. The weight on the frontand rear axles must never exceed the maxi-mum permissible weight.

WARNING

A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabili-ty and security of the towing vehicle andtrailer, which could lead to accidents and se-rious injuries.

● Always load the trailer correctly.

● Always secure the load properly using beltsor straps that are suitable and in good condi-tion.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights

When towing a trailer, the front part of the ve-hicle could lift up, and if the dipped beamsare on, this could dazzle other drivers. Usethe headlight range control to lower the coneof light. If you do not have headlight rangecontrol, have the headlights adjusted by aspecialised workshop.

Special characteristics of driving with a trail-er

● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brakegently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-vent the jerking that can be caused by thelocking of trailer wheels.

● Due to the gross combination weight of thetowing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-tance increases.

● When going down a slope, go into a lowergear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-vantage of the braking power provided by theengine. Otherwise, the braking system couldoverheat and even fail.

280


● The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-bination weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer, change the centre of gravity and theproperties of the vehicle.

● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trail-er is loaded, then the load distribution is in-correct. Under these conditions, drive slowlyand with extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailer

Depending on the slope of the hill and thecombination weight of the towing vehicleand trailer, the vehicle might start rollingbackwards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the follow-ing:

● Press and hold the brake pedal.

● Press the button to disconnect the elec-tronic parking brake ››› page 186.

● If the vehicle is equipped with a manualgearbox, push the clutch pedal all the waydown.

● Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-lector lever to position D/S ››› page 192.

● Pull out the button and hold it in thatposition to stop the towing vehicle and trailerwith the electronic parking brake.

● Release the brake pedal.

● Start driving slowly. To do this, in the caseof a manual gearbox, slowly release theclutch pedal.

● Do not release the button until the en-gine has sufficient force to start driving.

WARNING

If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may leadto loss of control of the vehicle and seriousinjury.

● Driving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects will change the vehiclehandling and braking distances.

● Always drive cautiously and carefully.Brake earlier than usual.

● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-fic conditions. Slow down, especially whendriving down hills or slopes.

● Accelerate with particular care and caution.Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

● Take great care when overtaking. Reducespeed immediately if you notice that the trail-er is swaying, however slightly.

● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.

● Take into account the speed limit for vehi-cles with a trailer, as it could be lower thanfor vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicleand trailer

The stabilisation of the towing vehicle andtrailer together is an additional function ofthe electronic stability control (ESC).

If the system detects that the trailer is sway-ing, it intervenes automatically with the driv-er steering recommendation to reduce theswaying of the trailer.

Requirements for the stabilisation of thetowing vehicle and trailer

● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with acompatible towing bracket.

● The ESC and ASR are active. The controllamp or is not lit up on the instrumentpanel.

● The trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer powersocket.

● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h(approx. 37 mph).

● The maximum vertical load technically per-missible is being utilised on the coupling de-vice.

● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.

● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equip-ped with a mechanical overrun brake. »

281

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Operation

WARNING

The enhanced security provided by the elec-tric stability control of the towing vehicle andtrailer should not lead you to take any risksthat could compromise your safety.


● Accelerate with caution when the road isslippery.

● When adjusting any settings, stop acceler-ating.

WARNING

The electric stability control for the towingvehicle and trailer may not correctly detect alldriving conditions.

● When the ESC is switched off, the stabilisa-tion of the towing vehicle and trailer is alsoswitched off.

● The stability system does not always detectlight and unstable trailers, so it may not sta-bilise these correctly.

● When driving on slippery surfaces withpoor grip, the trailer can even interfere withthe stability system.

● Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tipeven without having previously swayed.

● If a trailer is not attached, but the trailerpower socket is connected (e.g. installationof a bicycle rack with lights), repeated auto-

matic braking may occur in extreme drivingconditions.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Fig. 237 Limits and attachment points for ret-rofitting a towing bracket.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets beretrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distancespecifications should always be kept inmind. The distance between the centre of thespherical head and the road ››› Fig. 237 D

must never be less than that indicated. Thisalso applies when the vehicle is fully loaded,including the technically permissible maxi-mum vertical load on the coupling device.

Distance specifications ››› Fig. 237:

Attachment points

932.5 mm

65 mm min.

350-420 mm

220 mm

615.5 mm

1,043 mm

WARNING

If the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, this may lead to malfunctions inthe entire vehicle electronic system, as wellas to accidents and serious injuries.

● Never connect the trailer's electric systemto the electrical connections of the tail lights

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

282


or any other unsuitable power sources. Onlyuse suitable connectors to connect the trail-er.

● The towing bracket should be retrofittedonly at a specialised workshop.

WARNING

If the towing bracket is badly fitted or unsuit-able, the trailer may separate from the vehi-cle while driving. This could cause serious ac-cidents and fatal injuries.

Note

Only use towing brackets that have been ap-proved by SEAT for the model in question.

283

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Advice

Care and maintenance

Accessories and modificationsto the vehicle

Accessories, replacement parts andrepair work

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailerfor advice before purchasing accessories andreplacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a highstandard of active and passive safety. For thisreason, we recommend that you ask a SEATOfficial Service for advice before fitting ac-cessories or replacement parts. Your SEAT Of-ficial Service has the latest information fromthe manufacturer and can recommend acces-sories and replacement parts which are suita-ble for your requirements. They can also an-swer any questions you might have regardingofficial regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT hastested these parts and accessories for suita-bility, reliability and safety. SEAT OfficialServices have the necessary experience andfacilities to ensure that the parts are installedcorrectly and professionally.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a directeffect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driv-en, such as a cruise control system or elec-tronically-controlled suspension, must beapproved for use in your vehicle and bear thee mark (the European Union's authorisationsymbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fittedwhich do not serve to control the vehicle it-self (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop orventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Union).

WARNING

Accessories, for example telephone holdersor cup holders, should never be fitted on thecovers, or within the working range of the air-bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury ifthe airbag is triggered in an accident.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac-cording to our specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to the electroniccomponents, software, wiring or data transferin the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. Dueto the way the electronic components arelinked together in networks, other indirectsystems may be affected by the faults. Thiscan seriously impair safety, lead to excessive

wear of components, and also invalidate yourvehicle registration documents.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealershipcannot be held liable for any damage causedby modifications and/or work performed in-correctly.

We therefore recommend that all work shouldbe performed by a SEAT Official Service usinggenuine SEAT parts®.

WARNING

Incorrectly performed modifications or otherwork on your vehicle can lead to malfunctionsand cause accidents.

Radio transmitters and office equip-ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)

Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. SEATgenerally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters provi-ded that:

● The aerial is installed correctly.

● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth-er with non-reflective aerial trimming).

● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

284


A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-shop will be able to inform you about optionsfor installing and operating radio transmitterswith a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters

Commercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.

● External aerial incorrectly installed.

● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment insidethe vehicle without a properly installed exter-nal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipment

Retrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-ded the equipment cannot interfere with thedriver's immediate control of the vehicle andthat any such equipment carries the mark.Any retrofit equipment that could influencethe driver's control of the vehicle must have atype approval for your vehicle and must carrythe e mark.

WARNING

Mobile telephones or radio equipment whichis operated inside the vehicle without a prop-erly installed external aerial can create exces-sive magnetic fields that could cause a healthhazard.

Note

● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li-cence and could lead to the withdrawal of thevehicle registration document under certaincircumstances.

● Please use the mobile telephone/radio op-erating instructions.

Care and cleaning

General information

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of the vehicle. This may also be oneof the requirements for upholding any war-ranty claims in the event of corrosion or paintdefects.

SEAT Official Services and specialist retailerscarry stocks of suitable car care materials.Please follow the instructions for use on thepackaging.

WARNING

● Cleaning products and other materials usedfor car care can be damaging to your health ifmisused.

● Always keep care products in a safe place,out of the reach of children. Failure to complycould result in poisoning.


● If possible, use environmentally friendlyproducts.

● The remains of car care products should notbe disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

Vehicle exterior care

Washing the vehicle

The longer substances such as insects, birddroppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, in-dustrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt andother aggressive materials remain on the ve-hicle, the more damage they do to the paint-work. High temperatures (for instance due tostrong sunlight) further intensify the corro-sive effect.

After the period when salt is put on the roadsit is important to have the underside of thevehicle washed thoroughly. »

285

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Automatic car washes

Before going through a car wash, be sure totake the usual precautions such as closingthe windows and roof. If the vehicle has spe-cial accessories such as spoilers or a roofrack, it is advisable to consult the car washtunnel operator.

It is best to use a car wash without revolvingbristles if possible.

Washing the vehicle with a high pressurecleaner

When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure and thespraying distance. Do not hold the nozzle tooclose to soft materials such as rubber hosesor seals. The same applies for the parking aidsensors*, which are located in the rearand/or front bumper.

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

Factory-fitted adhesive sheets

The following indications should be taken in-to account to avoid damaging adhesivesheets:

● Do not use high pressure cleaners.

● Do not use scrapers to remove ice or snowfrom the sheets.

● Do not polish the adhesive sheets.

● Do not use dirty cloths or sponges.

● It is preferable to wash them with a softsponge and gentle neutral soap.

Washing the car by hand

When washing the car by hand, use plenty ofwater to soften the dirt first, and rinse off aswell as possible.

Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge,glove or brush using only slight pressure.You should start on the roof and work down.Special car soap should only be used for verypersistent dirt.

Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and of-ten.

Wheels, sills and similar should be cleanedlast. Use a second sponge for this.

WARNING

● The vehicle should only be washed with theignition switched off. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.

● Do not clean the underside of chassis, theinside of wheel arches or wheel trims withoutprotecting your hands and arms. You may cutyourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Other-wise, there is a risk of sustaining cuts.

● When washing the car during the winterseason: water and ice in the brake systemcan reduce braking effectiveness: risk of acci-dent!

CAUTION

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight –otherwise the paint can be damaged.

● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.This could damage the surface.

● Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) fromthe headlights at regular intervals, for in-stance when filling the fuel tank. The head-lights should only be washed with water, donot wipe them with a dry cloth or sponge. Itis best to use soapy water.

● Never wash tyres with a jet that sprays thewater out in a direct stream. This could dam-age the tyres even if the spray is kept at adistance and only used for a very short time.

● Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, please make sure to retract the ex-terior mirrors to prevent them from beingdamaged. Electrically retractable exteriormirrors must not be folded in or out by hand,always use the electrical power control.

CAUTION

● Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, please proceed as follows to lockthe wiper arms so that they are not moved to-wards the top of the windscreen:

286


– the bonnet must be closed.

– switch the ignition on and off.

– press the windscreen wiper lever forwardbriefly (windscreen washer function).This will lock the wiper arms.


The car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These areas are prepared to pre-vent oily water from getting into the publicdrains. In some places, washing vehicles out-side the areas intended for this purpose isprohibited.

Camera sensors and lenses

● Use a small brush to remove snow and ade-icer spray to remove ice.

● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod-uct and a soft, dry cloth.

● Moisten the camera lens using a standardalcohol-based glass cleaning agent andclean the lens with a dry cloth. In the activelane assist*, the area in front of the lens isnormally cleaned with the windscreen wash-er.

CAUTION

● When you clean the vehicle with a pressurewasher:

– Stay a suitable distance from the sensorson the front and rear bumpers.

– Do not clean the camera lenses or sur-rounding area with the pressure washer.

● Never use warm or hot water to removesnow and ice from the reverse camera lens,as it could crack the lens.

● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on thelens.

Waxing and polishing

Care

Waxing protects the paintwork. It is time toapply a coat of good wax when water no lon-ger forms droplets and rolls off the cleanpaintwork.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in thevehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro-tect the paint with a hard wax coating at leasttwice a year.

In the summer, you will find it is much easierto remove dead insects (which accumulateon the bumper and the front of the bonnet) ifthe car has been treated with care productsrecently.

Polishing

Polishing is only necessary if the paint haslost its shine, and the gloss cannot bebrought back by putting on wax.

If the polish does not contain wax, a waxproduct should be applied after polishing.

CAUTION

● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-ted parts with a matt finish or on plasticparts.

● Do not apply paint polishes to the side trimthat runs around the panoramic roof and endson the windscreen. However, it can be treatedwith hard wax.

Trims

In respect for the environment, the silver-plated trims on the body are made of purealuminium (they do not contain chrome).

Dirt or marks on the trim mouldings shouldbe removed with a cleaning product with aneutral PH (do not use a chrome cleaner).Body polish is also unsuitable for use on trimmouldings. The intensive cleaning fluids of-ten used before the car goes into a car washmay contain alkaline substances, which cancause dull or milky patches when they dryout.

SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaningproducts which have been tested for use onyour vehicle and are not harmful to the envi-ronment.

287

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Plastic parts

Plastic parts are cleaned with a power wash-er. If this is not sufficient, plastic partsshould only be treated with a special solvent-free plastic cleaning agent. Do not use paint-work cleaners, polishes or wax on plasticparts.

Carbon parts

The carbon parts on your vehicle have a pain-ted surface. They do not need any specialcare and are cleaned just like any other pain-ted part ››› page 285.

Paint damage

Minor damage to the paint, such as scratchesor stone chips, should be touched up withoutdelay before the metal starts to corrode. Suit-able touch-up brushes or sprays for your carcan be obtained from a SEAT Official Service.

The number of the original paint finish on thevehicle is given on the data sticker››› page 317.

If corrosion is already visible it must be thor-oughly removed by a specialised workshop.

Windows

Clear vision is an essential safety factor.

The windscreen must not be cleaned with in-sect remover or wax, otherwise the wind-screen wipers will not function properly (jud-dering).

Traces of rubber, oil, grease or silicone canbe removed with a window cleaning solutionor a silicone remover. Wax residue can onlybe removed with a special cleaner. Your SEATOfficial Service will be able to provide youwith more detailed information.

The windows should also be cleaned on theinside at regular intervals.

Use a separate cloth or chamois to dry thewindows. Cloths used for waxing and polish-ing contain residues that will cause smearson the glass.

WARNING

Do not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditions (e.g.in the rain, dark or with a low sun), thesecoatings may cause dazzle: risk of accident!Such coatings can also cause the windscreenwiper blades to make noise.

CAUTION

● Remove snow and ice from windows and ex-terior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To

avoid scratches caused by dirt on the glass,the scraper should only be pushed in one di-rection and not moved to and fro.

● The heating element for the rear window islocated on the inner side of the window. Toavoid damaging them, do not apply stickersto these heating elements.

● Never use warm or hot water to removesnow and ice from windows and mirrors. Thiscould cause the glass to crack!

Rims

The wheels require regular attention to pre-serve their appearance. It is important to re-move road salt and brake dust by washingthe wheels at regular intervals, otherwise thefinish will be impaired.

After washing, the wheels should only becleaned with an "acid-free" cleaning agentfor alloy wheels. This is available from SEATOfficial Services and specialist retailers. Nev-er leave the cleaning agent on the rims forany longer than specified in the instructionsbefore rinsing it off. If the wheel cleaner fluidcontains acid it can attack the surfaces of thewheel bolts.

Car polish or other abrasive agents shouldnot be used for maintaining the rims. If theprotective coating is damaged, e.g. by flyingstones, the damaged area should be re-paired immediately.

288


WARNING

Please note when cleaning the wheels thatwater, ice and road salt can impair the effec-tiveness of the brakes; this can cause an acci-dent.

Exhaust pipe

It is important to remove road salt and brakedust by washing the wheels at regular inter-vals, otherwise the exhaust tail pipe materialcould be damaged. To remove impurities, donot use rim, paint or chrome cleaners or oth-er abrasive products. Clean the exhaust tailpipes with cleaning products that are suita-ble for stainless steel.

SEAT Official Services carry stocks of cleaningproducts that have been tested and ap-proved for use on your vehicle.

Caring for the vehicle interior

Screen for the radio/Easy Connect*and control panel*

The display can be cleaned with a soft clothand a professionally available “LCD cleaner”.Moisten the cloth with a small amount of thecleaning fluid.

The Easy Connect control panel* should firstbe cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goesinto the device or between the keys andhousing. Next, we recommend cleaning theEasy Connect control panel* using a clothdampened with water and washing-up liquid.

CAUTION

● To avoid scratching the screen, do not wipethe display with a dry cloth.

● To avoid damage, ensure that no liquidgoes into the Easy Connect control panel*.

Plastic and leatherette parts

Plastic parts and leatherette can be cleanedwith a damp cloth. If this is not sufficient,plastic parts and leatherette should only betreated with a special solvent-free plasticcleaner.

Textile covers and trim parts

Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, doortrim) should be cleaned regularly with a vac-uum cleaner. This will remove surface dirtwhich could otherwise be rubbed into thetextile material during use. Do not use steamcleaners, as the steam could carry the dirtdeeper into the textile material.

Normal cleaning

We recommend that you use a soft sponge ora commercially available lint-free, micro-fibrecloth for normal cleaning. Only use brusheson floor coverings and mats, as other textilesurfaces could become damaged.

In the case of normal surface dirt you can usea foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread thefoam on the textile surface and to work it intothe material lightly. However, make sure thatthe textile material does not become soakingwet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab-sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) andvacuum off any residue once the surface iscompletely dry.

Cleaning stains

Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruitjuice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli-cate fabrics. This solution should be appliedwith a sponge. If the stains are difficult to re-move, a washing paste can be applied direct-ly onto the stain and worked into the fabric.The surface will then have to be wiped withclear water to remove any residue left by thepaste. To do so, use a damp cloth or spongeand then dab the stain with an absorbentcloth.

Remove chocolate or make-up stains with acleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re-move the soap with water (wet sponge). »

289

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

A spirit-based cleaner can be used to removegrease, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Thendab the dissolved grease or colour particlesoff with an absorbent cloth or similar. Youmay also have to treat the stain once moreusing washing paste and water.

If the covers or textile trim panels are badlysoiled we recommend that you have themcleaned by a professional cleaning companywith a shampoo and spray.

Note

Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure they areclosed.

Natural leather

General information

Our range of leathers is large. The main typeused is particularly nappa in various forms,that is, leather with a smooth surface in dif-ferent colours.

The amount of dye used determines the ap-pearance and properties of leather. If theleather is left in a more natural state, it re-tains its typical natural napped appearanceand confers excellent all-weather propertiesto the seats. Fine veins, healed scars, insectbites, wrinkles and a subtle variation in shad-

ing remain visible; these are the characteris-tic features of genuine natural leather.

Natural napped leather does not have a pro-tective surface coating of dye. It is thereforesomewhat more prone to damage. Thisshould be borne in mind if children or petsoften travel in the car, or if there are otherfactors that could lead to damage.

Types of leather with a coloured surface coat-ing are likely to be more resistant to damage.This has a great advantage for day-to-dayuse. However, this means that the typicalnatural characteristics of the surface are lessapparent, though this does not affect quality.

Cleaning and care

Due to the natural properties of the speciallyselected hides employed, the finished leath-er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt,etc. so a degree of care is required in every-day use and when looking after the leather.Dark clothing (especially if damp or incorrect-ly dyed) may stain leather upholstery on theseats. Dust and grit in the pores and seamscan scratch and damage the surface. There-fore leather should be cleaned at regular in-tervals, depending on the actual amount ofuse. When they have been in use for a certaintime, your car seats will acquire a typical andunmistakable patina. This is characteristic forleather as a natural product and is a sign ofgenuine quality.

To maintain the value of natural leather youshould note the following points:

CAUTION

● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlightfor long periods, otherwise it may tend tolose some of its colour. If the car is left for aprolonged period in the bright sun, it is bestto cover the leather.

● Sharp-edged objects on clothing, such asbelts, zip fasteners, rivets or similar, can alsoleave permanent scratches and rough markson the surface of the leather.

Note

● Use a suitable impregnating cream with ul-tra-violet protection at regular intervals andafter cleaning. The cream nourishes andmoisturises the leather, keeps it supple andable to breathe. A protective film will alsoform.

● Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months andremove fresh dirt as soon as possible.

● Remove stains from fresh ball-pen and oth-er inks, lipstick, shoe cream and similarstains as soon as possible.

● Preserve the colour of the leather. A specialcoloured cream will renew the colour of theleather when required and will eliminate dif-ferences in colour.

290


Cleaning and care of leather uphols-tery

Natural leather requires an extra degree of at-tention and care.

Normal cleaning

– Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa-ter and wipe over the leather surfaces.

More stubborn dirt

– More stubborn dirt can be removed using amild soap solution (pure liquid soap: twotablespoons dissolved in one litre of wa-ter).

– Do not let the water soak through the leath-er or penetrate into the seams.

– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.

Removal of stains

– Remove fresh water-based stains such ascoffee, tea, juices, blood etc. with an ab-sorbent cloth or kitchen roll, or use thecleaning agent from the care set for dried-on stains.

– Remove fresh grease-based stains thathave not penetrated the surface such asbutter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc. with anabsorbent cloth or kitchen roll or with thecleaning agent from the care set.

– Treat fat-based, dried-in stains with grease-dissolving spray.

– Treat less common stains on leather, suchas ball-pen and other inks, felt-tip pens,nail polish, dispersion paint, shoe creametc. with a special leather stain remover.

Leather maintenance

– The leather should be treated regularly(about twice a year) with a special leather-care product.

– Apply these products very sparingly.

– Then wipe off with a soft cloth.

Should you have questions regarding thecare and cleaning of the leather upholstery inyour vehicle, we recommend that you contactyour SEAT Official Service. Our representa-tives will be happy to advise you and tell youabout the product range for leather conserva-tion, for example:

● Cleaning and care set.

● Coloured leather-care cream.

● Stain remover for ball-pen inks, shoe creametc.

● Grease dissolving spray.

● New products and further developments

CAUTION

On no account use solvents (such as petrol,turpentine), wax polish, shoe cream or simi-lar materials.

Cleaning Alcantara upholstery

Removing dust and dirt

– Moisten a cloth just a little and wipe downthe seat covers.

Removing stains

– Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di-luted white spirits.

– Dab at the stain. Start at the outside andwork inwards.

– Dry the clean area with a soft cloth.

Do not use leather cleaning products on Al-cantara seat covers.

You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams canscratch and damage the surface. If the car isleft standing in the sun for long periods, Al-cantara leather should be protected againstdirect sunlight to prevent it from fading. How-ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor-mal use. »

291

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

CAUTION

● Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoecream, stain removers, leather cleaning prod-ucts or any similar products on Alcantara.

● To avoid damage, stubborn stains shouldbe removed by a specialised workshop.

● On no account use brushes, hard spongesor similar utensils.

Seat belts

– Keep the seat belts clean.

– For cleaning, use a mild solution of soapand water.

– Check the condition of the seat belts at reg-ular intervals.

The retract function may not operate properlyin very dirty belts. Make sure that the inertiareel seat belts are completely dry before al-lowing them to retract.

CAUTION

● Do not remove the seat belts from the vehi-cle to clean them.

● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on theseat belts, as this can damage the webbing.Ensure that the seat belts do not come intocontact with corrosive fluids.

● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,

the belt in question must be replaced by aspecialised workshop.

Checking and refilling levels

Filling the tank

Refuelling


If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as thefuel tank is “full”. Do not try to put in morefuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fillthe expansion chamber in the fuel tank.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap. Further notes on fuel can be found at››› page 293.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-en in ››› page 56.

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri-ous burns and other injuries.

● When refuelling, turn off the engine, theauxiliary heater ››› page 177 and turn off theignition for safety reasons.

● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or acanister. Naked flames are forbidden in thevicinity due to the risk of explosion.

292


● Observe legislation governing the use,storage and carrying of a spare fuel canisterin the vehicle.

● For safety reasons we do not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.In an accident the canister could be damagedand could leak.

● If, in exceptional circumstances, you haveto carry a spare fuel canister, please observethe following points:

– Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canisterif it is inside or on top of the vehicle. Anelectrostatic charge could build up duringfilling, causing the fuel vapour to ignite.Danger of explosion. Always place thecanister on the ground to fill it.

– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possibleinto the spare fuel canister.

– If the spare fuel canister is made of met-al, the filling nozzle must be in contactwith the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapour is ex-plosive. Risk of fatal accident!

CAUTION

● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, itshould be removed immediately. It could oth-erwise damage the paintwork.

● Never run the tank completely dry. An irreg-ular fuel supply could cause misfiring. As aresult, unburnt fuel could enter the exhaustsystem and damage the catalytic converter.

● When filling the fuel tank after having run itcompletely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en-gine, the ignition must be switched on for atleast 30 seconds before starting the engine.When you then start the engine it may takelonger than normal (up to one minute) tostart firing. This is because air needs to bebled from the fuel system while starting.


Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause thefuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Note

There is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces-sary, request assistance from specialised per-sonnel.

Note

Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective de-vice that prevents the insertion of the wrongfuel hose1). It is only possible to refuel withDiesel nozzles.

● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or ifit is very small, it is possible that it will notbe able to open the protective device. Beforetrying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it,try a different pump or request specialisthelp.

● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel canis-ter, the protective device will not open. Oneway to resolve this is to pour the fuel in veryslowly.

Fuel

Types of petrol

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside thefuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleaded pet-rol. The petrol must comply with EuropeanStandard EN 228 or German standard DIN51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re-fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of »

1) Depending on country293

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti-ated by their octane rating (RON).

The following titles appear on the corre-sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap:

Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc-tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super 95 octane pet-rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octanepetrol, with a slight decrease in power.

Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95octanes

You should use super petrol with a minimumof 95 octanes.

If super is not available, in an emergency youmay refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. Inthis case only use moderate engine speedsand a light throttle. Refuel with super as soonas possible.

Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc-tane unleaded petrol

We recommend you use super plus 98 octanepetrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc-tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power.

If super is not available, in an emergency youmay refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. Inthis case only use moderate engine speedsand a light throttle. Refuel with super as soonas possible.

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel influences the behav-iour, power and service life of the engine.This is why the petrol you use should carrysuitable additives already included by thepetrol industry, free of metals. These addi-tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep thefuel system clean and prevent deposits frombuilding up in the engine.

If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi-tives is not available or engine problemsarise, the necessary additives must be addedwhen refuelling ››› .

Not all petrol additives have been shown tobe effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad-ditives may cause significant damage to theengine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad-ditives should never be used. Metal additivesmay also be contained in petrol additives forimproving anti-detonation ratings or octaneratings ››› .

SEAT recommends “genuine VolkswagenGroup Fuel Additives for petrol engines”.These additives can be bought at SEAT deal-ers, where information on how to use themcan also be obtained.

CAUTION

● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that thefuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations of

metal additives. Using them may damage theengine!

● Never refuel with fuels containing a largeproportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).This could damage the fuel system.

● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel orfuel containing other metal additives wouldseriously impair the efficiency of the catalyticconverter.

● Only use fuel additives that have been ap-proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti-knock additives may contain metal additivesthat could seriously damage the engine orthe catalytic converter. These additives mustnot be used.

● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol with anoctane rating lower than the correct grade forthe engine.

Note

● You may use petrol with a high octane num-ber than the one recommended for your en-gine.

● In those countries where unleaded petrol isnot available, you may refuel with a fuel witha low lead content.

Diesel fuel

Please note the information on the inside ofthe fuel tank flap.

294


We recommend the use of diesel fuel whichcomplies to European standard EN 590. Ifdiesel fuel which meets European standardEN 590 is not available, the Cetane number(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engineis equipped with a particulate filter, the sul-phur content of the fuel must be below 50parts per million.

Winter-grade diesel

Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and itis more difficult to start the engine. For thisreason, petrol stations in some countries al-so offer winter diesel with improved fluiditywhen cold (winter-grade diesel).

Water in the fuel filter1)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and isequipped with a fuel filter with a water sepa-rator, the instrument panel may display the

following warning: Water in thefuel filter. If this is the case, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop so thatthey can drain the fuel filter.

CAUTION

● The vehicle is not designed for the use ofFAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system wouldbe damaged if you used biodiesel.

● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called“thinners”, petrol or similar additives withdiesel fuel.

● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may benecessary to drain the fuel filter more fre-quently than is specified in the MaintenanceProgramme. We recommend having this doneby a specialised workshop. If water is allowedto collect in the filter, this can cause engineperformance problems.

AdBlue®

Information on AdBlue®

The consumption of AdBlue® depends onyour personal driving style, the temperatureof the system and on the outdoor tempera-ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11°C(+13°F). The system has heating elementsthat guarantee its operation even at low tem-peratures.

The AdBlue® tank level capacity is approxi-mately 11 litres.

The AdBlue® tank should never be empty.When the distance to empty drops below2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue® tank

will appear on the dash panel display››› page 295. If this information is ignored,later on it will not be possible to re-start theengine. If this warning does not appear, it isnot necessary to refill the AdBlue® tank.

AdBlue® is a registered brand of the GermanAssociation of the Automotive Industry (VDA)and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (DieselExhaust Fluid).

CAUTION

Filling the AdBlue® tank excessively cancause damage to the tank.

Refilling AdBlue®

Fig. 238 AdBlue tank cap. »

1) Valid for the market: Algeria.295

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Operations prior to refilling

Park the vehicle on a flat surface. If the vehi-cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex-ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb,the level indicator may not detect the loadproperly.

If a warning message about AdBlue® levelsappears on the dash panel display, fill atleast the minimum amount required (approx.5 litres). Only after adding this amount willthe system detect that AdBlue® has beenadded and you will be able to start the en-gine again. The maximum amount that canbe refilled is 11 litres.

Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is notswitched off during refilling, the warning torefill may continue to appear on the instru-ment panel display.

Fill with a refill bottle

Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.

● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 238.

● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-ti-clockwise direction.

● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-tions, indicated on the refill bottle.

● Check the expiry date.

● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.

● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fill-er neck vertically and screw the bottle on byhand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.

● Press the refill bottle in the direction of thefiller neck and hold it in this position.

● Wait until the contents of the refill bottlehave been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Donot compress or break the bottle!

● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise direc-tion and gently pull it upwards ››› .

● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liq-uid comes out of the bottle.

● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-tion until it is tightly closed.

● Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving

● After refilling the tank, only switch on theignition.

● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-onds for the system to detect the fluid load.

● Make sure you wait for at least 30 secondsbefore starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue

Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-duction.

● Open the tank cap.

● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise››› Fig. 238.

● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for thefirst time.

● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwiseuntil you hear a click.

WARNING

AdBlue® should only be stored in the originalcontainer, which should be tightly closed andkept in a safe place.

● Never keep AdBlue® in empty food contain-ers, bottles or other similar containers. Otherpeople may confuse it for other products.

● Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

● When refilling, the nozzle grip should bealigned downward. Otherwise the nozzle willnot connect automatically.

● Do not try to add any more additive afterthe nozzle has stopped for the first time. TheAdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue couldspill out.

● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.

● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or addi-tives. Any type of damage caused by such amixture will not be covered by the warranty.

● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank. Thiscould result in engine damage.

● Do not carry the refill bottle inside the vehi-cle. If there is a leak (due to temperature

296


changes or damage to the bottle), theAdBlue® may damage the vehicle.


Dispose of the refill bottle in an environment-friendly manner.

Note

You can buy refill bottles that are adequatefor AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships.

297

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Engine compartment

Checking levels

Fig. 239 Diagram for the location of the variouselements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank

Engine oil dipstick

Engine oil filler cap

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)

Windscreen washer reservoir

1

2

3

4

5

6

The checking and refilling of service fluidsare carried out on the components men-tioned above. These operations are descri-bed in ››› page 298.

Overview

You will find further explanations, instruc-tions and restrictions on the technical speci-fications as of ››› page 317.

Working in the engine compartment


Always be aware of the danger of injury andscalding as well as the risk of accident or firewhen working in the engine compartment(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). Al-ways observe the warnings listed below andfollow all general safety precautions. The en-gine compartment of the vehicle is a poten-tially hazardous area ››› .

298


WARNING

● Switch the engine off, remove the key fromthe ignition and apply the hand brake. If thevehicle has a manual gearbox, place the leverin neutral; if it has an automatic gearbox,place the selector lever in position P. Wait forthe engine to cool down.

● Keep children away from the engine com-partment.

● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-tion on the engine compartment, as thesemay catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in coolant).

● Take care not to cause short circuits in theelectrical system, especially when workingon the battery.

● If working inside the engine compartment,remember that, even when the ignition isswitched off, the radiator fan may start up au-tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-jury.

● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!

● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-pansion tank when the engine is hot. Thecooling system is under pressure.

● Protect face, hands and arms by coveringthe cap with a large, thick rag to protectagainst escaping coolant and steam.

● If it is necessary to work in the engine com-partment while the engine is running, the ro-tating components (for example, poly-V belt,

alternator, radiator fan) and the high voltageignition system are an additional hazard.

● Observe the following additional warningsif work on the fuel system or the electricalsystem is necessary:

– Always disconnect the battery from theon-board network.

– Do not smoke.

– Never work near naked flames.

– Always keep an approved fire extinguish-er immediately available.

CAUTION

When topping up fluids make sure the correctfluid is put into the correct filler opening, oth-erwise this can cause serious malfunctions orengine damage.


Inspect the ground underneath your vehicleregularly so that any leaks are detected at anearly stage. If you find spots of oil or otherfluids in the area where it was parked, haveyour vehicle inspected at the workshop.

Note

In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake flu-id reservoirs are on the other side of the en-gine compartment ››› Fig. 239.

Opening the bonnet


The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Check that the windscreen wiper arms arenot unfolded. Otherwise the paint may bedamaged.

The bonnet can only be unlocked when thedriver door is open.

WARNING

Never open the bonnet if you see steam ordrips of coolant being released from the en-gine compartment. Failure to comply couldresult in burns. Wait until no steam or coolantcan be seen before opening the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet

– Slightly lift the bonnet.

– Release the bonnet stay before pressing itback into its support.

– Carefully close the bonnet.

– Press the bonnet down until it locks intoplace.

– Make sure that the bonnet catches onto itsclasp. Do not press down too hard ››› . »

299

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

WARNING

● For safety reasons the bonnet must alwaysbe completely closed when the vehicle ismoving. Therefore, after closing the bonnet,always check that the locking element isproperly engaged. This is the case if the bon-net is flush with the adjacent body panels.

● Should you notice that the bonnet is notsafely secured when the vehicle is moving,stop the vehicle immediately and close thebonnet. Failure to follow this instructioncould result in an accident.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-gradeoil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up orchanging oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out inthe following page should appear on the con-tainer of the service oil; when the containerdisplays the specific standards for petrol anddiesel engines together, it means that the oilcan be used for both types of engines.

We recommend that the oil change indicatedin the Maintenance Programme, be per-formed by a technical service or specialisedworkshop.

The correct oil specifications for your engineare listed in the ››› page 58, Engine oilspecifications.

Service intervals

Service intervals can be flexible (LongLifeservice) or fixed (dependent on time/dis-tance travelled).

If the PR code that appears on the back of theMaintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6,this means that your vehicle has the LongLifeservice programmed. If it lists the codes QI1,QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service isdependent on time/distance travelled.

Flexible service intervals (LongLife serviceintervals*)

Special oils and processes have been devel-oped which, depending on the characteris-tics and individual driving profiles, enablethe extension of the oil change service (Long-Life service intervals).

Because this oil is essential for extending theservice intervals, it must only be used ob-serving the following indications:

● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in-tervals.

● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 301,Checking engine oil level and LongLife oil isnot available, it is permitted to top up (once)with oil for fixed service intervals››› page 58 (up to a maximum of 0.5 li-tres).

Fixed service intervals*

If your vehicle does not have the “LongLifeservice interval” or it has been disabled (byrequest), you may use oils for fixed serviceintervals, which also appear in››› page 58, Engine oil specifications. Inthis case, your vehicle must be serviced aftera fixed interval of 1 year/15,000 km (10,000miles)(whatever comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Programme.

● In exceptional circumstances, if the engineoil level is too low ››› page 301, Checking en-gine oil level and you cannot obtain the oilspecified for your vehicle, you can add asmall quantity of oil conforming to the speci-fication ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 (petrol engines)or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (upto 0.5 l).

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

The Maintenance Programme states whetheryour vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulatefilter.

300


Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ashformation, may be used in diesel enginesequipped with particulate filter. Using othertypes of oil will cause a higher soot concen-tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 301,Checking engine oil level and you cannot ob-tain the oil specified for your vehicle, you canuse a small quantity of oil (once) conformingto the VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification(up to 0.5 l).

Checking engine oil level

Fig. 240 Engine oil dipstick.


The engine oil dipstick indicates the level ofthe oil.

Checking oil level

– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed untilthe operating temperature is reached andthen stop.

– Wait for about two minutes.

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out once more and check the oillevel ››› Fig. 240. Top up with engine oil ifnecessary.

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oilconsumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, prefera-bly when filling the tank and before a jour-ney.

WARNING

Any work carried out in the engine compart-ment or on the engine must be carried outcautiously.

● When working in the engine compartment,always observe the safety warnings››› page 298.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area A , do not startthe engine. This could result in damage to theengine and catalytic converter. Contact aTechnical Service.

Topping up engine oil

Fig. 241 In the engine compartment: Engineoil filler cap.


Before opening the bonnet, read and observethe warnings ››› in Working in the enginecompartment on page 299.

The position of the oil filler opening is shownin the corresponding engine compartment il-lustration ››› page 298.

Engine oil specification ››› page 58. »

301

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

WARNING

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine compo-nents when topping up.

CAUTION

If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 240 A , donot start the engine. This could result in dam-age to the engine and catalytic converter.Contact a specialised workshop.


The oil level must never be above area››› Fig. 240 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn inthrough the crankcase breather and escapeinto the atmosphere via the exhaust system.

Note

Before a long trip, we recommend finding anengine oil that conforms to the correspond-ing VW specifications and recommend keep-ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-gine oil will always be available for a top-up ifneeded.

Changing engine oil


The engine oil must be changed at the inter-vals given in the service schedule.

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

The oil change intervals are shown in theMaintenance Programme.

WARNING

Only change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!

● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 298.

● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.

● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, suchas acid burns, caused by splashes of oil.

● When removing the oil drain plug with yourfingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre-vent oil from running down your arm.

● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.

● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must bestored in a safe place out of the reach of chil-dren.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Any dam-age caused by the use of such additiveswould not be covered by the factory warranty.


● Because of disposal problems and the spe-cial tools and specialist knowledge required,we recommend that you have the engine oiland filter changed by a Technical Service.

● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.

● Use a suitable container when draining theused oil. It must be large enough to hold allthe engine oil.

Cooling system

Topping up coolant


Top up coolant when the level is below theMIN (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level

– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be between the marks.When the engine is hot, it may be slightlyabove the upper mark.

302


Topping up coolant

– Wait for the engine to cool down.

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap witha cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left››› .

– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-ant in the expansion tank, otherwise youcould damage the engine. If there is nocoolant in the expansion tank, do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain professio-nal assistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expan-sion tank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level becomesstable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates aleak in the cooling system. Take the vehiclestraight to a specialised workshop to havethe cooling system examined. If there are noleaks in the engine cooling system, a loss ofcoolant can only occur if the coolant boilsand is forced out of the system as a result ofoverheating.

WARNING

● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-sion tank when the engine is hot: risk ofburns!

● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be ahealth hazard. Therefore, the antifreezeshould be stored in the original container in asafe place out of reach of children. Failure tocomply could result in poisoning.

● If working inside the engine compartment,remember that, even when the ignition isswitched off, the radiator fan may start up au-tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-jury.

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-ant system, the engine may fail leading to se-rious damage.

● Please make sure that the percentage ofadditive is correct with respect to the lowestexpected ambient temperature in the zone inwhich the vehicle is to be used.

● When the outside temperature is very low,the coolant could freeze and the vehiclewould be immobilised. In this case, the heat-ing would not work either and inadequatelydressed passengers could die of cold.

CAUTION

Do not top up the expansion tank with cool-ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter thecooling system. In this case, stop driving.Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, thereis a risk of engine damage.

CAUTION

The original additives should never be mixedwith coolants which are not approved bySEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causingsevere damage to the engine and the enginecooling system.

● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur-ple but is, for example, brown, this indicatesthat the G13 additive has been mixed with aninadequate coolant. The coolant must bechanged as soon as possible if this is thecase! This could result in serious faults andengine damage.


Coolants and additives can contaminate theenvironment. If any fluids are spilled, theyshould be collected and correctly disposedof, with respect to the environment.

Brake fluid

Top up brake fluid


Checking the brake fluid level

The brake fluid level must be between theMIN and MAX markings. »

303

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

However, if the brake fluid level goes downnoticeably in a short time, or drops below theMIN mark, there may be a leak in the brakesystem. Seek specialist assistance. A warn-ing light on the instrument panel displaymonitors the brake fluid level ››› page 119.

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluidreservoir is on the other side of the enginecompartment.

Changing brake fluid

The regular intervals at which the brake fluidshould be replaced are listed in the Mainte-nance Programme. We recommend you haveit replaced at a SEAT Official Service, duringan Inspection Service.

WARNING

● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out of reachof children. Risk of poisoning!

● If the brake fluid is left in the system fortoo long and the brakes are subjected toheavy use, vapour bubbles may form in thebrake system. This would seriously affect theefficiency of the brakes and the safety of thevehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTION

Brake fluid should not come into contact withthe vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and topping up the wind-screen washer reservoir


Check the water level in the windscreenwasher reservoir regularly and top up as re-quired.

The container for the windscreen washer con-tains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen,the rear window and the headlight washersystem*.

● Open the bonnet ››› page 298.

● The windscreen washer reservoir is markedwith the symbol on the cap.

● Check there is enough windscreen water inthe reservoir.

Recommended windscreen wipers

● For the hottest seasons we recommendsummer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-ter).

● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clearglass. Approximate proportion of the wintermixture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part con-centrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4

proportion of mixture in the washer fluidtank.

Capacity

The reservoir holds approximately 3 litres inversions without headlight washer and 5 li-tres in versions with headlight washer.

WARNING

If the water from the windscreen washer doesnot contain enough anti-freeze, it may freezeon the windscreen and rear window, reducingforward and rear visibility.

● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.

● In cold conditions, you should not use thewindscreen wiper system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the ventilationsystem. The antifreeze could freeze on thewindscreen and reduce visibility.

WARNING

Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen washerwater. A greasy layer may be formed on thewindscreen which will impair visibility.

● Use clean water with a window cleaner rec-ommended by SEAT.

● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

304


CAUTION

● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-ded by SEAT with other products. This couldlead to flocculation and may block the wind-screen washer jets.

● When topping up service fluids, make abso-lutely certain that you fill the fluids into thecorrect reservoirs. Using the wrong fluidscould cause serious malfunctions and enginedamage!

● Not having windscreen wiper fluid reducesvisibility through the windscreen, and leadsto loss of visibility in headlights in modelswith headlight washer.

Battery

General information


The battery is located in the engine compart-ment and is almost maintenance-free. It ischecked as part of the Inspection Service.Nevertheless, check the terminals are cleanand have the correct tightening torque, espe-cially in summer and winter.

Disconnecting the battery

The battery should only be disconnected inexceptional cases. When the battery is dis-

connected, some of the vehicle's functionsare “lost” (››› table on page 305). Thesefunctions will require resetting after the bat-tery is reconnected.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before youdisconnect the battery Otherwise the alarmwill be triggered.

Function Reprogramming

One-touch function ofthe electric windows

››› page 141, One-touchopening and closing.

Remote control key

If the vehicle does not re-spond to the key, theyshould be synchronised››› page 134.

Digital clock ››› page 116.

ESC warning lampAfter driving for a few me-tres, the warning lamp goesout again.

If the vehicle is not used for long periods

The vehicle has a system for monitoring thecurrent consumption when the engine is leftunused for long periods of time ››› page 203.Some functions, such as the interior lights, orthe remote door opening, may be temporarilydisabled to prevent the battery from runningflat. These functions will come back on assoon as the ignition is switched on and theengine started.

Winter conditions

During the winter, the starting power may bereduced, and if necessary, the battery shouldbe charged ››› in Important safety warn-ings for handling a vehicle battery onpage 306

Important safety warnings for han-dling a vehicle battery

All work on batteries requires specialistknowledge. Please refer to a SEAT OfficialService or a workshop specialising in batter-ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never try tochange the fluid level of the battery. Other-wise explosive gas is released from the bat-tery that could cause an explosion.

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. In the eventof electrolyte splashes, rinse off with plenty ofwater.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-hibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well-ven-tilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries! »

305

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

WARNING

● When repairing or working on the electricalsystem, proceed as follows:

– 1. Remove the key from the ignition. Thenegative cable on the battery must bedisconnected.

– 2. When the repair is finished, reconnectthe negative pole of the battery.

● Switch off all electrical devices before re-connecting the battery. Reconnect first thepositive cable and then the negative cable.Never reverse the polarity of the connections.This could cause an electrical fire.

● Ensure that the vent hose is always connec-ted to the battery.

● Never use damaged batteries. This couldcause an explosion! Replace a damaged bat-tery immediately.

CAUTION

● Never disconnect the battery if the ignitionis switched on or if the engine is running.This could damage the electrical system orelectronic components.

Charging the battery

Terminals for charging the battery are fittedin the engine compartment.

– Note the warnings ››› in Important safetywarnings for handling a vehicle battery onpage 306 and ››› .

– Switch off all electrical devices. Remove theignition key.

– Raise the bonnet ››› page 299.

– Open the battery cover.

– Connect the charger clamps as describedto the positive pole of the battery (+) andexclusively to an earth on the bodywork(–).

– Only use a charger which is compatible foruse with 12 V nominal voltage batteries.The charge must not exceed a voltage of 15V.

– Now connect the battery charger to thepower socket and switch on.

– After charging the battery: switch off thebattery charger and disconnect the powersocket cable.

– Finally disconnect the charger cables fromthe battery.

– Replace the battery cover correctly.

– Close the bonnet ››› page 299.

Important: Before you charge the batterymake sure you read the manufacturer's in-structions for using the battery charger.

WARNING

Never charge a battery that has frozen: re-place battery! Failure to do so may lead to anexplosion.

Note

Use only the terminals in the engine compart-ment to charge the battery.

Replacing the battery

The new battery should have the same speci-fications (amperage, load and voltage) as theused battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy ››› page 203.The power management function ensuresthat the battery is charged much more effi-ciently than on vehicles without a powermanagement system. To maintain this func-tion after replacing the battery, we recom-mend that the replacement battery used is ofthe same make and type as the original fittedbattery. To make proper use of the powermanagement function after the battery hasbeen changed, have the battery coded to thepower management mode at a specialisedworkshop.

306

Wheels

CAUTION

● Some vehicles, for example those with theStart-Stop system* are fitted with a specialbattery (AGM-type or EFB-type battery). If anyother type of battery is fitted, the Start-Stopfunction may be considerably reduced andthe vehicle may not stop on repeated occa-sions.

● Make sure that the vent hose is always at-tached to the original opening on the side ofthe battery. Gases or battery acid can other-wise escape and possibly cause damage.

● The battery holder and clamps must alwaysbe correctly secured.

● Before starting any work on the battery, al-ways observe the warnings listed under››› page 305, Important safety warnings forhandling a vehicle battery.

● Do not forget to replace the battery cover-ings, where applicable. It is a protection forhigh temperatures. This in turn extends thevehicle service life.


Batteries contain toxic substances includ-ing sulphuric acid and lead. They must bedisposed of appropriately and must not bedisposed of with ordinary household waste.Make sure disconnected batteries cannot tipover. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects embed-ded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace.

New tyres

New tyres do not give maximum grip straightaway and should therefore be “run in” by

driving carefully and at moderate speeds forabout the first 500 km (300 miles). This willalso increase the useful life of the tyres.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-cording to the type and make of tyre and thetread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicate thatone of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speedimmediately if there is any reason to suspectthat damage may have occurred. Inspect thetyres for damage. If no external damage isvisible, drive slowly and carefully to the near-est specialised workshop and have the carinspected.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This guaranteesoptimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan-ing, excessive noise and wear.

Retrofitting accessories

If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you consultwith a SEAT Official Service centre for adviceregarding current techniques.

307

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Service life of tyres

Fig. 242 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-ing habits will increase the useful life of yourtyres.

● Check tyre pressure at least once a month,and also prior to any long trip.

● The tyre pressure should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. Do not reduce thepressure of warm tyres.

● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-ried by the vehicle.

● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,save the modified pressure of tyres››› page 311, ››› page 308.

● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.

● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear fromtime to time.

The useful life of your tyres depends on thefollowing factors:

Tyre pressure

The tyre inflation pressures are listed on asticker on the rear of the front left door frame››› Fig. 242.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-rect inflation pressures are very important,especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure canbe adjusted to medium load to improve driv-ing comfort (tyre pressure ). When drivingwith comfort tyre pressure fuel consumptionmay increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accordingto the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehi-cle is going to carry the maximum load, thetyre pressure should be increased to the max-imum value indicated on the sticker››› Fig. 242.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checkingthe tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-

flated to the highest pressure required for theroad wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary sparewheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure la-bel ››› Fig. 242.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking (squealing tyres) all increase tyrewear.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, certain circumstances may lead toimbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, asthey otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fittedor if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, youshould check wheel alignment at a SEAT Offi-cial Service.

308

Wheels

WARNING

● Always adapt the tyre pressure accordinglywhen the vehicle load changes.

● A tyre with low air pressure has to flex a lotmore when the vehicle is heavily loaded or athigh speeds, therefore causing overheatingto occur. Under these conditions, the tyrebead may be released or the tyre may burst.Risk of accident!


Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Wear indicators

Fig. 243 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators

Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre isworn.

The original tyres on your vehicle have1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” runningacross the tread. Depending on the manufac-turer, there will be 6 to 8 of them spaced atequal distances around the tyre. Markings onthe tyre sidewall (for instance the letters“TWI” or a triangle) indicate the positions ofthe tread wear indicators.

The minimum tread depth required by law is1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves nextto the tread wear indicators). (Different fig-ures may apply in other countries.)

WARNING

The tyres must be replaced at the latest whenthe tread is worn down to the tread wear indi-cators. Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in an accident.

● Especially in difficult driving conditionssuch as wet or icy roads. It is important thatthe tyre tread be as deep as possible and beapproximately the same on the tyres of boththe front and the rear axles.

● The scant driving safety due to insufficienttread depth is particularly evident in vehiclehandling, when there is a risk of “aquaplan-ing” in deep puddles of water and when driv-ing through corners, and braking is also ad-versely affected.

● The speed has to be adapted accordingly,otherwise there is a risk of losing control overthe vehicle.

Interchanging tyres

Fig. 244 Interchanging tyres.

To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresthe wheels should be changed round fromtime to time according to the system››› Fig. 244. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time.

New tyres or new wheels

– All four wheels must be fitted with tyres ofthe same type, size (rolling circumference)and preferably the same tread pattern.

– Tyres should be replaced at least in pairsand not individually (i.e. both front tyres orboth rear tyres together).

– Do not use tyres whose effective size ex-ceeds the dimensions of the factory-ap-proved makes of tyre. »

309

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

– If you wish to fit the vehicle with rims ortyres different to those installed in manu-facture, it is advisable to consult a SEAT Of-ficial Service before purchasing them.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essentialpart of the vehicle's design. The tyres andrims approved by SEAT are specially matchedto the characteristics of the vehicle and makea major contribution to good roadholdingand safe handling ››› .

The sizes of the rims and tyres approved foryour vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity orCOC document1)). The vehicle documentationvaries depending on the country of resi-dence.

A knowledge of tyre designations makes iteasier to choose the correct tyres. The follow-ing wording can be read on the sides of thetyre:

215/60 R16 95VThis contains the following information:

215 Tyre width in mm

60 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre construction: Radial

16 Rim diameter in inches

95 Load rating code

V Speed index

The manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outerpart):

DOT... 2216...it means, for example, that the tyre was man-ufactured in the 22nd week of 2016.

But note that with some types of tyre, the ac-tual tyre size can differ from the nominal sizemarked on the tyre (for instance 215/60 R1695 V), and there may be significant differen-ces in the contours of the tyres, even thoughthe tyres are marked with the same nominalsize. When replacing the tyres, it is thereforeimportant to make sure that the actual sizeof the new tyres does not exceed the dimen-sions of the factory-approved makes of tyre.

Failure to observe this requirement can af-fect the clearance needed for the tyres. If thetyres rub against the bodywork, in certaincircumstances the tyres, running gear orbodywork and pipes may be damaged, andvehicle safety could be severely impaired››› .

If you use tyres that are approved by SEATyou can be sure that the actual tyre dimen-sions will be correct for your vehicle. If you

decide to fit a different type of tyre, you mustobtain the appropriate manufacturer's certif-icate from the tyre retailer to confirm thatthe tyres are suitable for your vehicle. Keepthis certificate in a safe place.

Your SEAT Official Service will be able to ad-vise you on which tyres may be fitted to yourvehicle.

It is best to have all servicing of wheels andtyres performed by a specialised workshop.They are familiar with the procedure andhave the necessary special tools and spareparts as well as the proper facilities for dis-posing of the old tyres respecting the envi-ronment.

WARNING

● It is very important to ensure that the tyresyou have chosen have adequate clearance.When selecting replacement tyres, do not re-ly entirely on the nominal tyre size marked onthe tyre, since the effective tyre size can dif-fer significantly depending on the manufac-turer. Inadequate tyre clearance can result indamage to the tyres or the vehicle, causing aserious safety risk. Risk of accident! It mayalso invalidate the vehicle's registration foruse on public roads.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.310

Wheels

● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that aremore than 6 years old. If you have no alterna-tive, you should drive slowly and with extracare at all times.

● If wheel trims are fitted after the car is pur-chased, ensure that there is an adequate flowof air for cooling the brake system.


Old tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note

● A SEAT Service Centre should be consultedto find out whether wheels or tyres of differ-ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEATcan be fitted, and to find out about the com-binations allowed between the front axle(axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).

● Never mount used tyres if you are not sureof their “previous history”.

● For technical reasons, it is not generallypossible to use the wheels from other vehi-cles. In some cases, this may also be true forthe same model of wheel.

Wheel bolts

The wheel bolts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels (for instancealloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it isimportant to use the correct wheel bolts with

the right length and correctly shaped boltheads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-curely and that the brake system functionscorrectly.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi-ly.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel bolts* ››› page 65.

Tyre monitoring systems

Introduction

WARNING

Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyresmay lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, totread separation or even to a blow-out.

● Check tyre pressures regularly and ensurethey are maintained at the pressures indica-ted. Tyre pressure that is too low could causeoverheating, resulting in tread detachment oreven burst tyres.

● Tyre pressure should be that indicated onthe label when the tyres are cold at all times››› page 319.

● Regularly check the cold inflation pressureof the tyres. If necessary, change the tyrepressure of the vehicle tyres while they arecold.

● Regularly check your tyres for damage andwear.

● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type of tyrefitted on your vehicle.


Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuelconsumption and tyre wear.

Note

● Driving for the first time with new tyres at ahigh speed can cause them to slightly ex-pand, which could then produce an air pres-sure warning.

● Only replace used tyres with those author-ised by SEAT for the corresponding type vehi-cle.

● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring sys-tem. Regularly check your tyres to ensurethat the tyre pressure is correct and that thetyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts,tears and impacts/dents. Remove objectsfrom the tyres only when they have notpierced the tyres.

311

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

Tyre monitoring control lamp

If a light appears

The pressure in one or more tyres hasclearly reduced in comparison to thetyre pressure set by the driver or thetyre has structural damage.

Additionally, an audible warning can be heard and a textmessage can be seen on the instrument panel display.Stop! Reduce speed immediately! Stop the vehiclesafely as soon as possible. Avoid sudden manoeuvresand braking! Check all tyres and pressures. Replace anydamaged tyres.

If flashing

System malfunction

The control lamp flashes for approximately one minuteand then lights up permanently.If tyre pressure is correct, switch the ignition off and onagain. If the control lamp remains lit up, the tyre moni-toring indicator can be calibrated. Have the systemchecked by a specialised workshop.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

When the tyres are inflated at different pres-sures or at a pressure that is too low then atyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of

control of the vehicle and a serious or fatalaccident.

● If the warning lamp lights up, stop im-mediately and check the tyres.

● If the tyres are inflated at different pres-sures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this willincrease tyre wear, negatively affecting vehi-cle stability and increasing braking distan-ces.

● If tyres are inflated at different pressures ora tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be dam-aged and burst resulting in a loss of controlof the vehicle.

● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflatedto the right pressure. The recommended tyrepressure is indicated on the label››› page 319.

● The tyre monitoring system can only oper-ate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated tothe correct pressure when cold.

● Driving with tyres at the wrong pressurecan damage them and result in an accident.Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyrescorrespond to the vehicle load.

● Before starting a journey, always inflatetyres to the correct pressure.

● Tyres with insufficient pressure are subjec-ted to more flexing. Due to this, the tyrecould become excessively hot, causing treadseparation and also tyre blow-out.

● With an overloaded vehicle at high speed,the tyres can overheat and burst resulting ina loss of vehicle control.

● Tyre pressures which are too high or toolow reduce the useful life of the tyre, affect-ing vehicle performance.

● If a tyre has not been punctured and it doesnot have to be changed immediately, drive tothe nearest specialised workshop at a moder-ate speed and have the tyre checked and in-flated to the correct pressure.

WARNING


Note

● If excessively low tyre pressure is detectedwith the ignition on, an audible warning willsound. In the event that there is a fault in thesystem, an audible warning will sound.

● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period oftime or driving in a sporty style can tempora-rily deactivate the TPMS. The control lampshows a fault, but disappears when road con-ditions or the driving style change.

312

Wheels

Tyre monitoring indicator

Fig. 245 Instrument panel: warning of loss oftyre pressure.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheelrevolutions and, with this information, thetread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. Ifthe rolling circumference of one or morewheels has changed, the tyre monitoring in-dicator will indicate this on the instrumentpanel through a warning lamp and a warningto the driver ››› Fig. 245. When only one spe-cific tyre is affected, its position within thevehicle will be indicated.

Loss of pressure: Check lefttyre pressure!

Wheel tread change

The wheel tread changes when:

● Tyre pressure is manually changed

● Tyre pressure is insufficient

● Tyre structure is damaged

● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload

● The wheels on an axle are subject to aheavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).

● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains

● The temporary spare wheel is fitted

● The wheel on one axle is changed

There may be a delay in the reaction of thetyre monitoring indicator or it may not in-dicate anything under certain circumstances(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un-paved roads, or when driving with snowchains).

Calibrating the tyre monitoring indica-tor

After changing the tyre pressure or replacingone or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-

cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, forexample, when the front and rear wheels areswapped.


● Store the new tyre pressure in the EasyConnect1) system with the button and theSETTINGS function button ››› page 33.

● In vehicles without radio: press and holddown the button with the ignition on,until an acoustic signal is heard.

When driving, the system self-calibrates thetyre pressure provided by the driver and thewheels fitted. After a long journey with variedspeeds the programmed values are collectedand monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, thetyre pressure must be increased to the totalrecommended tyre pressure before the cali-bration ››› page 319.

Note

● The tyre monitoring indicator does notfunction when there is a fault in the ESC orABS ››› page 189. »

1) In vehicles that are not equipped with the EasyConnect system, the switch for adjusting tyre pres-sure is located in the centre console next to the haz-ard warning lights.

313

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

● An erroneous indication may be given whensnow chains are in use because they increasethe tread of the wheel.

Temporary spare wheel

General information

Fig. 246 Compact temporary spare wheel:raised floor panel.

The temporary spare wheel has been de-signed to be used for short periods of time.Have the tyres checked and replaced as soonas possible at a SEAT Official Service or at aspecialised workshop.

Please note the following restrictions whenusing the compact temporary spare wheel.The compact temporary spare wheel is de-signed specifically for this model. For this

reason, do not use a temporary spare wheelfrom a different type of vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel

– Lift and hold up the floor panel to removethe temporary spare wheel.

– Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise››› Fig. 246.

– Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Chains

For technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-porary spare wheel in place of one of the rearwheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheelthat you have removed and replace the punc-tured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING

● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.Failure to do so may cause an accident. Thetyre pressure is listed on the back of the leftfront door frame ››› Fig. 242.

● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)when the temporary spare wheel is fitted onthe vehicle: risk of accident!

● Never travel more than 200 km using a tem-porary spare wheel.

● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking andfast cornering: risk of accident!

● Never use more than one temporary sparewheel at the same time, risk of accident.

● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.

● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automatically switchoff during the journey. Switch off the systemwhen starting off.

Extraction of the spare wheel in vehi-cles with SEAT SOUND 10 speakers(with subwoofer)*

Fig. 247 In the luggage compartment: re-move the subwoofer.

314

Wheels

To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-move the subwoofer.

● Lift and secure the luggage compartmentfloor as described in ››› page 168.

● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 247 1

speaker cable.

● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-wise direction ››› Fig. 247 2 .

● Remove the subwoofer speaker and thespare wheel.

● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place thesubwoofer on the base of the wheel rim withcare. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”arrow on the subwoofer should point for-ward.

● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-tate the securing wheel clockwise so that thesubwoofer system and wheel are firmly inplace.

Winter service

Winter tyres

– Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

– Only use winter tyres that are approved foryour vehicle.

– Please note that the maximum permissiblespeed for winter tyres may be lower thanfor summer tyres.

– Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-fective when the tread is worn down.

– After fitting the wheels you must alwayscheck the tyre pressures. When doing so,take into account the correct tyre pressureslisted on the rear of the front left doorframe ››› page 308.

In winter road conditions winter tyres willconsiderably improve vehicle handling. Thedesign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. This applies particularly to vehi-cles equipped with wide section tyres or withhigh speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y onthe sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-proved for your vehicle. The sizes of thesetyres are specified in the vehicle's docu-ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity orCOC1)). The vehicle documentation varies de-pending on the country of residence. See al-so ››› page 309.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-ties when the tread is worn down to a depthof 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se-verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread isstill much deeper than 4 mm.

Winter tyres are subject to the following max-imum speed limits according to speed ratingcode letter: ›››

Speed ratingcode letter››› page 309

Maximum speed limit

Q 160 km/h (100 mph)

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V240 km/h (149 mph) (please noterelevant restrictions)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speedsmust have an appropriate sticker attached sothat it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickersare available from the SEAT Official Service »

1) COC = certificate of conformity.315

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Advice

and specialised workshop. Please note theregulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used insteadof winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-rating

Please note that the generally applicable240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyreswith the letter V is subject to technical re-strictions; the maximum permissible speedfor your vehicle may be significantly lower.The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-pends directly on the maximum axle weightsfor your car and on the listed weight rating ofthe tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service tocheck the maximum speed which is permissi-ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car onthe basis of this information.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum speed permitted forthe winter tyres fitted on your car can causetyre failure, resulting in a loss of control ofthe vehicle – risk of accident.


Summer tyres should be fitted again as soonas possible after the winter period; they givebetter handling on roads which are free ofsnow and ice. Summer tyres perform withless rolling noise, tyre wear and – most im-portant – reduce fuel consumption.

316

Technical specifications

Technical data


Important

The information in the vehicle documentationalways takes precedence over the informa-tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in thisdocumentation are valid for the standardmodel in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-ded in the Maintenance Programme or thevehicle registration documents shows whichengine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different dependingwhether additional equipment is fitted, fordifferent models, for special vehicles and forother countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi-cations section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PSPferdestärke (horsepower), formerly usedto denote engine power.

rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZCetane number, indication of the dieselcombustion power.

RONResearch octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 248 Vehicle data sticker (luggage com-partment).

Fig. 249 Chassis number.

VIN in the Easy Connect

● Select: button > SETTINGS functionbutton > Service > Chassis number.

Chassis number

The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on thevehicle data sticker and under the wind-screen, on the driver side ››› Fig. 249. Alsothe VIN is located in the engine compart-ment, on the left-hand side in the direction oftravel. The number is engraved on the topside rail, and is partially covered.

Type plate

The type plate is located on the right sidedoor pillar. Vehicles for certain export coun-tries do not have a type plate. »

317

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Vehicle data sticker

The vehicle data sticker is under the carpettrim in the luggage compartment, in thespare wheel well. A sticker with the vehicledata is attached to the inside cover of theMaintenance Programme.

The following information is provided on thevehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 248

Vehicle identification number (chassisnumber)

Vehicle type, model, capacity, enginetype, finish, engine power and gearboxtype

Engine code, gearbox code, externalpaint code and internal equipment code

Optional extras and PR numbers

Identifying letters

The identifying letters of the engine can beviewed on the instrument panel when the en-gine is switched off and the ignition is on.

● Hold down the button 0.0/SET on the dashpanel for more than 15 seconds.

1

2

3

4

Information on fuel consump-tion

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or supervisedby certified EU laboratories, according to thelegislation in force at the time (for more infor-mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) andapply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the documen-tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions dependon the equipment/features of each individualvehicle, as well as on the driving style, roadconditions, traffic conditions, environmentalconditions, load or number of passengers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factorsmentioned here, consumption values can dif-fer from those calculated in the current Euro-pean regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with afuel tank filled to 90% capacity and withoutoptional extras. The figure quoted includes75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

Special versions, optional equipment fittingsor retro-fitting accessories will increase theweight of the vehicle ››› .

WARNING

● Please note that the centre of gravity mayshift when transporting heavy objects; thismay affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-cident. Always adjust your speed and drivingstyle to suit road conditions and require-ments.

● Never exceed the gross axle weight ratingor the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-missible axle load or the permissible totalweight is exceeded, the driving characteris-tics of the vehicle may change, which couldlead to accidents, injuries and damage to thevehicle.

318


Trailer mode

Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-proved are selected in intensive trials accord-ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles inthe EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be differentin other countries. All data in the official vehi-cle documentation takes precedence overthese data at all times ››› .

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitted drawbar load on theball joint of the towing bracket must not ex-ceed 88 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommendthat you always tow approaching the maxi-mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-er on the road will be poor, if the drawbarload is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar loadcannot be met (e.g. with small, empty andlight-weight single axle trailers or tandemaxle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailerweight is legally required for the drawbarload.

WARNING

● For safety reasons, you should not drive atspeeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towinga trailer. This also applies in countries wherehigher speeds are permitted.

● Never exceed the maximum trailer weightsor the drawbar load. If the permissible axleload or the permissible total weight is excee-ded, the driving characteristics of the vehiclemay change, leading to accidents, injuriesand damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow chains and wheelbolts

Tyre pressure

The sticker with the tyre pressure values canbe found on the back of the left front doorframe. The tyre pressure values given thereare for cold tyres. The slightly raised pres-sures of warm tyres must not be reduced.›››

The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar(2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summertyres.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the frontwheels, and only for the following tyres:




Other dimensions do not allow chains

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, thetightening torque of the wheel bolts shouldbe checked as soon as possible with a torquewrench ››› . The tightening torque for steeland alloy wheels is 140 Nm.

WARNING

● Check the tyre pressure at least once permonth. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or toolow, there is an increased danger of accidents- particularly at high speeds.

● If the tightening torque of the wheel boltsis too low, they could loosen while the vehi-cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts andthreads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your TechnicalService for information about appropriatewheel, tyre and snow chain size.

319

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Engine data

Petrol engine 1.0 85 kW (115 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel

85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)

a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights

Top speed (km/h) 183 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.2


Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,830

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,280

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 940

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 640

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,500


320


Petrol engine 1.4 110 kW (150 CV) Start-Stop ACT®


110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,395 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)


Outputs and weights 2WD Manual 2WD Automatic 4WD Manual 4WD Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 201 (5) 198 (6) 192 (5) 189 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.9 6.0 6.0 5.9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.5 8.6 9.0 8.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,900 1,920 2,000 2,010

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,359 1,375 1,460 1,476

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 970 990 1,000 1,010

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 980 980 1,050 1,050

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 670 680 730 730

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,850 1,800 1,950 1,950

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,800 1,600 1,900 1,900

321

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

Petrol engine 2.0 140 kW (190 PS) Start-Stop


140 (190)/4,200-6,000 320/1,450-4,200 4/1,984 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)


Outputs and weights 4WD

Top speed (km/h) 212(5)





Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,070

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,060





322


Diesel engine 1.6 85 kW (115 PS)


85 (115)/3,250-4,000 250/1,500-3,250 4/1,598Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.

51 CZ

Outputs and weights












323

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data




51 CZ

Outputs and weights Automatic












324





51 CZ

Outputs and weights 2WD Manual 2WD Automatic 4WD

Top speed (km/h) 201 (6) 200 (6) 196 (6)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.2 5.9 6.0

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.8 8.7 9.0

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,990 2,010 2,100

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,453 1,483 1,548

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 1,060 1,090 1,080

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 940 930 1,070

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 700 720 750

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,900 1,900 2,000

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,900 1,900 2,000

325

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data




51 CZ

Outputs and weights 4WD Automatic







Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 1,060





326


Dimensions

Fig. 250 Dimensions.

Fig. 251 Angles and ground clearance »

327

Tech

nica

l dat

aA

dvic

eO

pera

tion

Emer

genc

ies

Saf

ety

Technical data

››› Fig. 250, ››› Fig. 251 2WD 4WD

A Front projection (mm) 868 868

B Rear projection (mm) 857 865

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,638 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,363

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,576 1,572

F Backa) track (mm) 1,541 1,544

G Width (mm) 1,841

H Height at kerb weight (mm)1,601b)

1,615c)1,611b)

1,625c)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 176 189

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 19.4° maximum 20.6°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 27.9° maximum 25.5°

Turning radius (m) 10.8

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.b) Distance to the roof.c) Dimension to the roof bars.

328

Index

Index

AABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 284Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

function for preventing overtaking in an insidelane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228warning and control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Adaptive Cruise Controldeactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

AdBlueinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295maximum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Additional consumers (efficiency program) . . . . . 42Adjusting

front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Adjusting the head restraintsfront head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

AdjustmentCAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 84

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 86functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Air conditioningauxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 170heated windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53user instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Alcantara: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 95Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 95

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Anti-slip regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 134trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow pro-

tection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . 15, 125, 133Anti-theft system

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Anti-trap function

sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Area view system (Top View Camera)special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis-

tance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234emergency brake assist (Front Assist) . . . . . . . 217fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237parking system Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Top View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265traffic jam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

329

Index

Audible warning signallights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144seat belt not fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Automatic car washes

switching the Auto Hold function off . . . . . . . . 212Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196emergency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197launch control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . 49safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . 181selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193steering wheel with gear shift paddles . . . . . . 195tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 195towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179electric consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

replacement in the remote control (auxiliaryheater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Belt tensioners

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Bicycle rack

fitting on the retractable tow hitch . . . . . . . . . 277maximum load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240indication in the external rear view mirror . . . 238malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 298opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Brakingfront assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

BSDsee Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

BSD Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

CCamera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118windscreen washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Car-care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44CD-ROM player (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Panoramic sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 140remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110rear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

330

Index

Changing gearengaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 192

Changing settingsCAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Childproof locks

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 91

categorisation into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 90securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 29

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291carbon parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Easy Connect control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289exhaust pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 289radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Close

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Coming Home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 119

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 205ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 48instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292remote control (auxiliary heater) . . . . . . . . . . . 178seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Controls and displaysgeneral instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 139Controls on the steering wheel

operating the audio, telephone and naviga-tion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Coolantchecking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Coolingcoolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Cooling systemchecking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Corneringlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Correct sitting positionrear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 212operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212warning and indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

DDangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 22Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Defective bulbs

changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

331

Index

Dieseldiesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Diesel particulate filtermalfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 115Display messages

speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Display of traffic signs on the instrument panel

activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Disposalbelt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Distance controlsee Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Doors

childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 74, 75, 76Driver-side general instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driver information systemengine oil temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42operation through the windscreen wiper lever . 36

Drivingdriving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Driving abroadheadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Driving datadata summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Driving in wintertrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Dynamic lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

EE10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 120Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Efficiency program

additional consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Electrical accessoriessee Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 139convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 140

Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Electronic torque management (XDS) . . . . . . . . . 190Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95automatic gearbox emergency program . . . . . 199bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 68fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234see Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Emergency braking assistance systemindications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

332

Index

Emergency operationfront passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Emission control systemcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181starting up (driver messages with the mechan-

ical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181switching off (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Engine and ignitionautomatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 184stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 298battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 305brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 303closing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 302engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 301opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 59, 304

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Engine faultcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 300changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 302checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Environmentecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Environmental tipsfilling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 284ESC

electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 189Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Exhaust gas purification system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Exhaust pipe: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Exhaust purification system for vehicles with

diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . . 256Exterior lighting

changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Exterior mirrorsadjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Exterior rear-view mirrorsadjusting the exterior rear-view mirrors . . . . . 155exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

FFastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Four-wheel drive

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 86Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Front Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front seatmanual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 293consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

333

Index

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Fuel consumptionengine cut-off due to inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 204

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Full-LED Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Function Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 102

fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

GGear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 195General instrument panel

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

HHand brake

see Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 149HDC

see Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . . . . 81Head-protection airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Headlightschanging a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54Heated windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Hill Descent Control

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

IIdentifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 181Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 181

see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 40driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Emergency brake assist system (Front Assist) 217engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 193service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116traffic signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246tyre monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 40

Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 115instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

334

Index

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 95

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

KKey-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Keyless-Entry

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Keyless-Exit

see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Keyless Access

Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 129

Keyless Access locking and ignition systemsee Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Keysassign key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126car key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126driver messages (mechanical contact) . . . . . . 181remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 127

Kick-downautomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Knee airbagssafety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

LLane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

cleaning the camera area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Launch control (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 197Leather: care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 144

audible signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144lighting of instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151lighting of the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Load compartment in the luggage compartment

see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 162Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 162Loading the vehicle

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 164trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Locking and unlockingin the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Locking the front passenger door manually . . . . . 16Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 152luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . 167manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163special characteristics of the electric rear lid . 138storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164see also Loading the luggage compartment . 162

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . . 167Luggage net

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

335

Index

MMain beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Main panel

turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 145Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204emergency braking assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Manual release mechanism

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Manual unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Maximum trailer weight

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279MFD

see Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Multi-function display (MFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

NNatural leather

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Navigation systemCD-ROM player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Net bagluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Noisesadaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 307

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58On-board computer

see Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36One-touch opening and closing

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Open and close

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137sun blind (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 125bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16rear lid with electric opening and closing . . . . 137sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Operating malfunctionPark Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

PPaint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Paintworkcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Panoramic sliding sunroofconvenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 140see also Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249automatic braking intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . 257automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250conditions for exiting a parking space . . . . . . 256exiting a parking space (only for parallel

spaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254perpendicular parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249stopping prematurely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 196with Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Parking aidadjusting the display and audible warn-

ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 265

336

Index

automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 265rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 264

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 262

Parking assistanceparking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Parking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187automatic release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 262

Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 262Particulate filter (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Passenger

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 74, 75, 76Passenger-side instrument panel

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Petroladditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 289Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Positioning seat belts

during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Power steering

see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Pre-heating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Press & Drive

starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Punctureaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

RRacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 223Radio-operated remote control

see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Radio screen: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

control of the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

see Parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Rearheadrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Rear-view mirroranti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155interior anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Rear bulbs in the side panel

disassemble the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17

see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 137Rear lights in the rear lid

disassemble the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Rear seat backrest

folding down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159folding down and lifting the backrest . . . . . . . 159lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Rear seat passengerssee Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 74, 75, 76

Rear shelfstoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Refuelling

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118opening fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Remote control keyunlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Remote control (auxiliary heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . 178replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Removing and attaching head restraints . . . . . . 157Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

337

Index

Replacementparts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Replacing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Retrofitting

towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . 193Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 115Rims

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Roll-back functionwindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

RON (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Roof luggage rack

attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

SSafe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Safelock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

see also Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . 125Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 22safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Safety information

knee airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Safety instructions

belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86use of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 90

Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Saving fuel

inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Saving tips (efficiency program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Seat

electric seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Seat belt positionfor pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 82cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 84safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 83SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Seats

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156rear seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Selective catalytic reductionsee Exhaust purification system (diesel) . . . . 295

Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Side airbags

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Sliding panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 319

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Special characteristics

area view system (Top View Camera) . . . . . . . 268high-pressure cleaning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 277tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 214control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer . . 281Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Start-Stop system

driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . 208switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

338

Index

the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 209the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Steering

electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200engaging the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Steering wheeladjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . 195

Storage areafront seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 161glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Storing objectstrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Sun blindsanti-trap function (sunroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Switching off the engine

with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . 30, 181

System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

TTailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . . . 164Tail lights

changing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Technical datacapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Textiles: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Things to note

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 193, 195Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 29Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 29Top View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

see Top View Camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Top View Camera system

Instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Tow hitch

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277electrical unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Towingblind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276also see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275electrical unlocking tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276fitting a bicycle rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 98, 99automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99front towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99rear towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99towing not allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99with towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 95Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 278Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234situations in which Traffic Jam Assist must be

switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Traffic sign detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Traffic Sign Detection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Traffic signsindication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

339

Index

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279anti-theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275hooking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279maximum trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 319parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 265power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278rear LED lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 278rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 278retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer 281technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 278trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280unlocking the electrical unlocking tow hitch . 276vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . 273, 279

Trailer modealso see towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273see Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Transporting items

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Transporting objectsloading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

tailboard for transporting long items . . . . . . . 164trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Trimscleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Turn signal convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Tyre Mobility Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Tyre Mobility Systemsee Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 319Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . . 67with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

UUnfastening your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Unfasten the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Upholstery: cleaningalcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Vehicle

chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66unlocking and locking the vehicle with Keyless

Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 305

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 305disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Vehicle carenatural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 71

Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 136activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 95Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

340

Index

Vertical load on the coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Vertical load on the trailer coupling

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

WWarning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149What negatively affects driving safety? . . . . . . . . 73Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307, 319central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 66new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Wheel trim

removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Windows

electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 139removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Windscreen

heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

windscreen and rear window wiper bladeschanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . . 97Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 153Windscreen washer water

capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-temsservice position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 153functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 153lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153window wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Winter conditionsbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305defrosting the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Winter drivingsunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Winter operationheadlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 153salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

XXDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

341

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.17

About this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the vehicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in cer-tain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ATECA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not in-cluded in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the mar-ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle ex-cept when otherwise indicated.

The audiovisual material only is intended to help users to understand certain car function-alities better. It does not replace the instruc-tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-al to obtain more comprehensive information and indications.

The equipment marked with an aster-isk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as op-tional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

® All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright symbol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

>> The section is continued on the follow-ing page.

Important warnings on a given page

Detailed contents on a given page

General information on a given page

Emergency information on a given page

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-mation on safety. They warn you about possi-ble dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION

Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.


Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-vant information concerning environmental protection.

Note

Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-nal information.

This manual is divided into six large parts, which are:

1. The essentials

2. Safety

3. Emergencies

4. Operation

5. Tips

6. Technical data

At the end of this manual, there is a detailed alphabetical index that will help you quickly find the information you require.

OWNER’S MANUAL

Ateca

575012720BE

Ingl

és 5

7501

2720

BE

(11

.17)

Ate

ca

Ingl

és (

11.1

7)

SEAT recommendsSEAT GENUINE OIL

SEAT recommendsCastrol EDGE Professional

Documents

SEAT - Explore our Compact Cars, MPVs, SUVs, Sedans & more · Foreword This Instruction Manual and its correspond-ing supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself